Home

d-Copia 3001MF

Contents

1. NOTE When placing the original on the platen be sure to copy the originals in page order 4 in 1 Mode For copying four originals onto a single sheet This mode can be used with Duplex mode to copy eight originals onto one sheet The following 4 in 1 options and output orientations are available Orientation of Original Platen Document processor 3 Ee 9 lil i i m i j W ln m Il Il o i m NOTE When placing the original on the platen be sure to copy the originals in page order 4 13 Copying Functions Types of Page Boundary Lines The following types of the boundary lines are available dit mv di lin edi alin eli Borders Cropmark Dotted The procedure for using Combine mode copying is explained below Copies Ready to copy Combine Layout er Hi Davin then E Down then ight L Ea Ne BE 4in1 i Bu Place original None PEF Line Top
2. 1 Press the Send key 2 Place the originals on the platen 3 Press Advanced Setup and then Border Erase a Ready to send Destination 4 Press Border Erase Sheet to erase borders for an Place original individual sheet or Border Erase Book to erase serosa T borders for a book 0 25 neor MAES a Use or to enter the width in Border or Gutter Seas Press Keys to use the number keys for entry oer n Sl sa Individual cil Press Individual Border Erase to select the zoom eae individual border erase Use or to enter the border width or press Keys and enter the width using the numeric keys Aa Ready to send A Press Original Orientation to select the original Place original orientation from either Top Edge Top or Top Edge Sra Left and press OK 5 6 005 2 00 BE m For 2 sided originals press Back Page and then ass been _ eres press Same as Front Page or Do Not Erase P al ee Ei pasls 0 25 Top Edge Top 5 Press OK Se e le Keys Orientation Cancel lt 08 08 2009 10 10 6 Specify the destination and press the Start key to start sending 5 24 Sending Functions Enter Document Name File Name This setting allows you to assign a document name to scanned images You can specify a default for the document name Use the procedure below to assign names to scanned documents that you are sending g Ready to send Place original
3. 2200000 cee eee 8 76 Maintenance Cleaning aza te cece ced wate Be eases odo etrvean ore Baer cate eae Maat tara aceetenen eee 9 2 Toner Container and Waste Toner Box Replacement 00 0 cece eee eee eee 9 7 Troubleshooting Solving Malfunctions 1 2 0 0 0 0 c cee eee eee 10 2 Responding to Error Messages cee eee 10 6 Clearing Paper Jams 2 0 teens 10 15 Management User Login Administration saast keai ad tiaa a eee eee 11 2 JOD ACCOUN erro annaa sat ERT aoe ett eaten id ete eee eds Se ee ge eee Y 11 14 Data Security Kit Operations 0 0 00 c ete ee 11 27 Appendix Optional Equipment 000 cette eee Appendix 2 Contents Character Entry Method 0 0 00 cece ett Appendix 10 PAD Gleb ate cach sh erent wi wal ee ee ee T ee eee ei EA eee ae a Appendix 13 SPeCiiCaliONS tee woke ee eae el wher eee Wt eed Vad ed S Appendix 21 Glossa 2 22 danaa a r eee E ceae E E E E ated anna Appendix 27 e a EP E N A E e a eee L AEA E ect A A EE we eect eke ee Index 1 Quick Guide Be sure to read Precautions for Use before using this machine Administrator tasks You can print via a network or print m a PDF file directly from USB It prints memory To make copies To print Simply press the Start key to make copies You can also fine tune the copy settings by changing the paper size adjusting the density i etc It copies Copying w
4. Cannot print Is the machine plugged in Plug the power cord into an AC outlet Is the machine powered on Turn on the main power switch Is the printer cable connected Connect the correct printer cable securely Was the machine powered on before the printer cable was connected Power on the machine after connecting the printer cable Is Press Status Key displayed at the top of the screen Press the Status Job Cancel key Printing Jobs and then Resume All Print Jobs to restart printing Documents are printed improperly Are the application software settings at the PC set properly Check that the printer driver and application software settings are set properly While the operation panel was being used the keys locked up and do not respond when pressed Is the operation panel locked Check the panel lock setting in Embedded Web Server and change the setting if necessary Embedded Web Server Operation Guide Cannot print with USB memory Was the USB memory formatted with a machine other than this machine Format the USB memory with this machine 6 20 Is the USB host blocked Select Unblock in the USB host settings Check that the USB memory is securely plugged into the machine When displaying an image sent from the machine on the PC an image size is shrunk vertically or horizontally Have you selected 200x100dpi
5. Date Timer Date Timer settings include Date Time 8 46 e Date Format 8 46 e Time Zone 8 47 Auto Panel Reset 8 47 e Auto Sleep 8 48 e Auto Error Clear 8 49 e Interrupt Clear Timer 8 50 NOTE If user login administration is enabled you can only change the settings by logging in with administrator privileges Date Time Set the date and time for the location where you use the machine If you perform Send as E mail the date and time set here will be displayed on the header CAUTION Be sure to set Time Zone before the Date Time setup Use the procedure below to set the date and time 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Date Timer and then Change of Date Time 3 Press or to enter the date and time respectively 4 Press OK NOTE If you try to change the date time when a trial application page 8 75 is running the If you change Date Time setting trial functions will be unavailable Are you sure message is displayed To change the date time press Yes Date Format Select the display format of year month and date The year is displayed in Western notation Use the procedure below to select the date format 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press x Date Timer and then Change of Date Format 3 Select MM DD YYYY DD MM YYYY or YYYY MM DD and press OK 8 46 Default Setting System Menu Time Zone Set the time differenc
6. NOTE Be sure to confirm every destination by displaying them on the touch panel You cannot press Check unless you have confirmed every destination 3 Press the Start key to start sending 3 27 Basic Operation Specifying Destination When specifying destination choose from the Address Book or use the One Touch Keys NOTE You can set the machine up so that the address book screen appears when you press the Send key For details refer to Setting the Default Send Screen on page 8 30 Choosing from the Address Book Select a destination registered in the Address Book a Ready to send Destination 1 Inthe basic screen for sending press Address Place original Book Destination Detail CE Address ABCD abcd efg com 10 200 188 120 e T Folder Path e Entry le Entry 0001 0002 0003 0004 0005 no i FAX cal Addr Entry 0006 0007 0008 0009 0010 N WSD Scan Destination Quick Setup pronaS neon aca Image Quality ow 10 10 EEN 2 Press the checkbox to select the desired destination from the list You may choose multiple destinations The selected destinations are Search Name indicated by a checkmark in the check box To use Search No an address book on the LDAP server select Ext coeur Address Book from the Addr Book pull down EET menu EA E A E O E A e a You can change the order in which the destinations a jer jer je n ja i are listed b
7. 8 28 Default Setting System Menu Destination Check before Send When performing sending jobs display the confirmation screen of destinations after pressing the Start key The table below shows the available settings a er ae Off Do not display the confirmation screen of destinations On Display the confirmation screen of destinations NOTE Refer to Confirmation Screen of Destinations on page 3 27 for the Quick Setup steps Use the procedure below to set the destination check before send 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Send and then Change of Dest Check before Send 3 Select Off or On 4 Press OK Color Type GE Set the color type when you send color documents The table below shows the available settings C eee Send color documents in RGB Allows you to match the color space for machines that support sRGB Selecting RGB displays the color profile values set on the machine Use the procedure below to set the color type 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Send and then Change of Color Type 3 Select RGB or sRGB 4 Press OK 8 29 Default Setting System Menu Entry Check for New Destination When adding new destination display the entry check screen to check the entered destination The table below shows the available settings C a rr ee Off Do not display the entry check screen On Display the entry check screen Use the pro
8. FAX directly FAX without using the Send a FAX froma telephone line computer Internet FAX i FAX Connect the modular cord for the telephone line to this machine Selection of Telephone Line Inch version only Network Setup LAN Cable Connection Install the Network FAX Driver on your computer 1 Loading Paper 2 21 FAX Operation About Network Internet Fax i FAX Basic 3 1 FAX 9 1 Optional 8 1 ion the FAX System S on the FAX System S on the FAX System S Operation Guide Operation Guide Operation Guide Operation 1 For more information refer to the Network FAX Driver Operation Guide 2 If the destination is not stored in the address book you can send the FAX by entering the address directly viii Caution Warning Labels Caution Warning labels have been attached to the machine at the following locations for safety purposes Be sufficiently careful to avoid fire or electric shock when removing a paper jam or when replacing toner AA High temperature inside Do not touch parts in this area because there is a danger of getting burned High temperature inside Do not touch parts in this area because there is a danger of getting burned Do not incinerate toner and toner container Dangerous sparks may cause burn Label inside the machine Laser radiation warning gt
9. 08 08 2009 10 10 3 Check the box details Box No 0001 gt To edit details press Change of the detail you Box Name Usage Restriction wish to edit Edit the detail as desired and press SALES gt 21 MB gt OK Box Password SOOO gt Auto File Deletion Overwrite Setting Change 30 day s gt Permit gt Free Space Delete after Printed Change 30 GB Off gt Cancel el Register 08 08 2009 10 10 4 Ifyou have changed the details press Register and then press Yes in the confirmation screen If you did not change the details press No 5 Press Close The display returns to the default Document Box screen 3 36 Basic Operation Previewing Documents Checking Document Details You can use this function to preview the documents stored in a document box or display the document details for checking Use the procedure below 1 Select highlight a document to preview and then press Preview or Detail 3 2 Preview the document or check the document details The operations available in the preview screen are shown below When you have zoomed in you can use these keys to move the displayed area In multiple page documents Prev 2070404057450 GED you can change pages by entering the desired page 7 number SS Hectowing tere be ew Biso Eh wed re n multiple page documents you can use these buttons to change pages A p8 2009 10
10. 3 42 Basic Operation Copy Original Image i Register Original Image function on the Quick Setup screen 3 Press Key 3 here as the key to set replacement location off Key 1 Key 2 if a f Key 4 Key 5 Key 6 08 08 2009 10 10 4 Press OK A confirmation screen appears Press Yes The Original Image Quality function will be newly registered 3 43 Basic Operation Program Copying and Sending By registering sets of frequently used functions as a single program you can simply press the program number as needed to recall those functions You can also name the programs for easy identification when recalling NOTE Sending operation can be registered in the program as well Up to 50 functions combining copying and sending can be registered in the program If user login administration is enabled you can only register functions by logging in with administrator privileges Registering Programs Use the procedure below to register a program The following procedure is an example of registering the copying function 1 Press the Program key while the copy mode is accessed 2 Press Register and press a number 01 to 50 for the program number If entering Program screen from the Copy screen or Send screen go to step 4 NOTE If you select a program number already registered the currently registered functions can be replaced with a new set of functions Check that Co
11. 7 Lower the finisher process tray 10 28 Troubleshooting Remove the paper If the paper tears remove every loose scrap from inside the machine Raise the finisher process tray 10 29 Troubleshooting Job Separator Follow the steps below to clear paper jams in the optional job separator 1 Remove any paper in the output section If the paper tears remove every loose scrap from inside the machine 2 Pull up left cover 1 lever and open left cover 1 3 Remove the paper If the paper tears remove every loose scrap from inside the machine 4 Press the indicated position to close left cover 1 10 30 11 Management This chapter explains the following operations e User Login Administration wnccccscertt asc cuenidaseciccresedepiancnectactsionasanacmaced 11 2 e JODACCOUNINO cadran iaa enina 11 14 e Data Security Kit Op SraOMnS cacssetenterecivassneseetetesdeesnecdcagbeatntinecanes 11 27 11 1 Management User Login Administration User login administration specifies how the user access is administered on this machine Enter correct login user name and password for user authentication to login Access are in three levels User Administrator and Machine Administrator The security levels can be modified only by the machine administrator First User Login Administration Follow these steps for the first user login administration Enable user login administration
12. Handling of plastic bags A WARNING Keep the plastic bags that are used with the machine away from children The plastic may cling to their nose and mouth causing suffocation Q Xi Precautions for Use Cautions when using the machine A WARNING Do not place metallic objects or containers with water flower vases flower pots cups etc on or near the machine This type of situation presents a danger of fire or electrical shock should they fall inside Do not remove any of the covers from the machine as there is a danger of electrical shock from high voltage parts inside the machine Do not damage break or attempt to repair the power cord Do not place heavy objects on the cord pull it unnecessarily or cause any other type of damage These types of situations present a danger of fire or electrical shock Never attempt to repair or disassemble the machine or its parts as there is a danger of personal injury fire electrical shock or exposure to the laser If the laser beam escapes there is a danger of it causing blindness If the machine becomes excessively hot smoke appears from the machine there is an odd smell or any other abnormal situation occurs there is a danger of fire or electrical shock Turn the main power switch off immediately be absolutely certain to remove the power plug from the outlet and then contact your service representative If anything harmful paper clips water other fluids e
13. Of Moving parts inside i A a May cause personal injury Ox Do not touch moving parts NOTE Do not remove these labels Installation Precautions Environment A CAUTION Avoid placing the machine on or in locations which are unstable or not level Such locations may cause the machine fall down or fall over This type of situation presents a danger of personal injury or damage S to the machine Avoid locations with humidity or dust and dirt If dust or dirt become attached to the power plug clean the plug to avoid the danger of fire or electrical shock Avoid locations near radiators heaters or other heat sources or locations near flammable items to avoid the danger of fire S To keep the machine cool and facilitate changing of parts and maintenance allow access space as shown below Leave adequate space especially around the rear cover to allow air to be properly Q ventilated out of the machine 23 15 16 t 10 cm A E 2 11 13 16 30 cm Other precautions The service environmental conditions are as follows e Temperature 50 to 90 5 F 10 to 32 5 C e Humidity 15 to 80 However adverse environmental conditions may affect the image quality Avoid the following locations when selecting a site for the machine e Avoid locations near a window or with exposure to direct sunlight e Avoid locations with vibrations e Avoid locations with drastic temperature fluctua
14. Original Size Standard Sizes 1 Standard Sizes 2 5 83 17 00 Others j A 08 08 2009 10 10 Copies 08 08 2009 10 10 1 O O N O i o Press the Copy key Place the originals on the platen Press Org Paper Finishing Paper Selection and then MP Tray Setting Press Standard Sizes 1 Standard Sizes 2 Others or Size Entry to select the paper size If you select Size Entry press or to specify X horizontal and Y vertical sizes You can enter the size directly using the numeric keys after pressing Keys Press Media Type Select paper type and press OK Press OK Press OK Press the Start key to start scanning the originals When the machine is ready the confirmation screen for the specified paper appears Load the required paper in the multi purpose tray and press Continue to start copying Copying Functions Mixed Sized Originals Using the optional document processor the originals of different sizes can be loaded in a batch and copied In this operation up to 30 originals of different sizes can be placed in the document processor at the same time Supported Combinations of Originals Originals of the Same Width The supported combinations of originals are as follows Ledger and Letter A3 and A4 C4 Letter A4 Ledger and Letter R Foli
15. The network cable is connected The hub is not operating properly The server is not operating properly Reference Page Failed to send the e mail Failed to send via FTP Failed to send via SMB Failed to send i FAX Failed to send the e mail Failed to send via FTP Failed to send i FAX Failed to send via FTP Failed to send via SMB Failed to send via FTP Check the network The network cable is connected The hub is not operating properly The server is not operating properly Failed to send the e mail Failed to send i FAX Check the e mail size limit of the SMTP settings on the Embedded Web Server Failed to send the e mail Failed to send i FAX Check the authentication methods of both the sender and the recipient Failed to send via FTP Check the network The network cable is connected The hub is not operating properly The server is not operating properly Failed to send the e mail Failed to send i FAX Check the SMTP user authentication method of the recipient Turn the main power switch off and back on If this error occurs several times make a note of the displayed error code and contact your service representative The scanned original exceeds the acceptable number of pages of 999 Send the excess pages separately 10 13 Troubleshooting Responding to Authentication Server Connection Error
16. This machine contains the transmitter module We the manufacturer hereby declare that this equipment is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999 5 EC Radio Tag Technology Europe In some countries the radio tag technology used in this equipment to identify the toner container may be subject to authorization and the use of this equipment may consequently be restricted NOTE Product marked with the Crossed out Wheeled Bin Symbol includes the battery that complies with the European Parliament and Council Directive 2006 66 EC the Battery Directive in European Union Do not remove and dispose of the batteries included in this machine Xvi Legal Restriction on Copying Scanning It may be prohibited to copy scan copyrighted material without permission of the copyright owner Copying Scanning the following items is prohibited and may be penalized by low It may not be limited to these items Do not knowingly copy scan the items that are not to be copied scanned Paper money Bank note Securities Stamp Passport Certificate Local laws and regulations may prohibit or restrict copying scanning of other items not mentioned above xvii xviii Legal and Safety Information Please read this information before using your machine This chapter provides information on the following topics e ile Miennienlons ccicthntcoke emer aa etree he aan XX e Regardin
17. 1 100 WSD Scan aes E NOTE If you enter a 4 digit soeed dial number the ew hoy oy operation in step 3 can be omitted The basic send Status 08 08 2009 10 10 screen appears and the specified destination appears in the destinations list Basic Operation Touch Panel Display Display for Originals and Paper The touch panel displays the selected paper source and output tray Press Start key to start printing Copies Press Cancel to change settings Original position Shortcut 1 Output ee tray Shortcut 2 a Paper Shortcut 3 source 2 r Auto 100 Size orientation of Shortcut 4 original and paper Gigual A Zoom 100 Paper A4 Shortcut 5 r Paper f Selection 2 sided gt gt 2 sided Org Image Quality Layout Edit Advanced Frising OE Set 08 08 2009 10 10 Shortcut 6 ee Quick Setup Status 3 4 Basic Operation Original Preview You can display a preview image of the scanned document on the panel NOTE To view a preview of an image stored in a Custom Box refer to Previewing Documents Checking Document Details on page 3 37 The procedure for previewing scanned originals is explained below The procedure described here is for copying a single page original 1 Press the Copy key and place the original on the platen Ready to copy Ss 2 Press Preview Copy
18. Thickness Avoid using paper that is too thick or thin Signs that paper may be thin include frequent problems with paper jams or with several sheets being supplied at once Paper jams may also indicate that the paper is too thick The proper thickness is between 0 086 and 0 110 mm Moisture Content Paper moisture content is the ratio of moisture to dryness expressed as a percentage Moisture affects how the paper is supplied the electrostatic changeability of the paper and how the toner adheres Paper moisture content varies depending on the relative humidity in the room High relative humidity causes paper to become damp making the edges expand so it appears wavy Low relative humidity causes paper to lose moisture making the edges tighten and weakening print contrast Wavy or tight edges may cause the paper to slip when it is supplied Try to keep the moisture content between 4 to 6 To maintain the right level of moisture content bear in mind the following considerations e Store paper in a cool well ventilated place e Store paper flat and unopened in the package Once the package is opened reseal it if the paper is not to be used for a while e Store paper sealed in the original package and box Put a pallet under the carton to keep it raised above the floor Especially during rainy seasons keep the paper a sufficient distance away from wooden or concrete floors e Before using paper that has been stored keep it at the
19. e Glossy paper e Watermarked paper e Paper with an uneven surface e Perforated paper Special Paper This section describes printing onto special paper and print media The following paper and media can be used e Transparencies e Preprinted paper Bond paper e Recycled paper Thin paper from 60 g m to 64 g m or less e Letterhead e Colored paper e Prepunched paper e Envelopes e Cardstocks Hagaki Thick paper from 106 g m to 200 g m or less e Labels e High quality paper When using these paper and media choose that are designed specifically for copiers or page printers such as laser printers Use the multi purpose tray for transparencies thick paper envelopes cardstocks and label paper Choosing Special Paper Although special paper that meets the following requirements can be used with the machine print quality will vary considerably due to differences in the construction and quality of special paper Thus special paper is more likely than regular paper to cause printing problems Before purchasing special paper in volume try testing a sample to ensure the print quality is satisfactory General precautions when printing onto special paper are given below Note that we are not responsible for any harm to the user or damage to the machine caused by moisture or specifications of special paper Select a cassette or multi purpose tray for special paper Transparencies Transparencies must be ab
20. File Name Entry i Add a file name Additional information such as Job No and Date and Time can also be set Destination C Additional Info amp Date and Time e i Add Shortcut Cancel P 08 08 2009 10 10 1 5 Press the Send key Place the originals on the platen Press Advanced Setup and then File Name Entry Press File Name Enter the document name and press OK NOTE Up to 32 characters can be entered for the document name 6 Press Job No to enter the job No and Date and Time to enter the date and time Press OK Specify the destination and press the Start key to start sending 5 25 Sending Functions Enter E mail Subject and Body When sending E mail enter the subject and body of the E mail Use the procedure below to enter the subject and body for an E mail message and then send the E mail 1 Press the Send key 2 Press Advanced Setup and then E mail Subject Body ee Ready to send A Destination 1 3 Press Subject Place original E mail Subject Body 08 08 2009 10 10 4 Enter the subject and press OK NOTE Up to 60 characters can be entered for the subject 5 Press Body 6 Enter the body and press OK NOTE Up to 500 characters can be entered for the body 7 Press OK 8 Specify the destination and press the Start key to start sending 5 2
21. Input units Dimensions Inch models X 2 to 17 in 0 01 increments Y 2 to 11 69 in 0 01 increments Metric models X 50 to 432 mm in 1 mm increments Y 50 to 297 mm in 1 mm increments Up to four custom original sizes can be added Use the procedure below to set a custom original size Press the System Menu key Press Common Settings Next of Original Paper Settings and then Next of Custom Original Size Press Change of any one of Custom 1 to Custom 4 on which you wish to register the size Press On and then press or numeric keys to enter X horizontal and Y vertical dimensions Press OK oa h WN Move to the copy send or document box screen and press the Reset key Adding a Custom Size and Media Type for Paper to Print Set up a maximum of four frequently used custom paper sizes The custom size options are displayed on the screen to select paper set in the multi purpose tray The table below lists the sizes that can be registered Input units Dimensions Inch models H 5 83 to 17 in 0 01 increments V 3 86 to 11 69 in 0 01 increments Metric models H 148 to 432 mm in 1 mm increments V 98 to 297 mm in 1 mm increments Default Setting System Menu Up to four custom paper sizes can be added Select media type for each paper size Media type Plain Transparency Rough Vellum Labels Recycled Preprinted Bond Cardstock Color Prepunched L
22. OPERATION GUIDE 552503en PUBLICATION ISSUED BY Olivetti S p A Gruppo Telecom Italia Via Jervis 77 10015 Ivrea ITALY www olivetti com Copyright 2010 Olivetti All rights reserved The mark affixed to the product certifies that the product satisfies the basic quality requirements C 4 The manufacturer reserves the right to carry out modifications to the product described in this manual at any time and without any notice ENERGY STAR is a U S registered mark ENERGY STAR The ENERGY STAR program is an energy reduction plan introduced by theUnited States Environmental Protection Agency in response to environmental issues and for the purpose of advancing the development and utilization of more energy efficient office equipment Your attention is drawn to the following actions which could compromise the conformity attested to above as well as the characteristics of the product e incorrect electrical power supply e incorrect installation incorrect or improper use or use not in compliance with the warnings provided in the User s Manual supplied with the product e replacement of original components or accessories with others of a type not approved by the manufacturer or performed by unauthorised personnel All rights reserved No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying recording or by any information storage a
23. Press Close Plain Media Type 08 08 2009 10 10 11 25 Management Printing an Accounting Report Total pages counted at all relevant accounts can be printed as an accounting report Reports have different formats depending on how the count of copiers and printers is administered When Split is selected for Managing the Copier Printer Count ACCOUNT REPORT MFP Firmware Version For the count by paper size the report will be printed by size Use the procedure below to print a job accounting report 1 Check that Letter or A4 paper is loaded in the cassette Press the System Menu key Press User Login Job Accounting If user login administration is disabled the user authentication screen appears Enter your login user name and password and then press Login For this you need to login with administrator privileges Refer to Adding a User on page 11 5 for the default login user name and password Press Next of Job Accounting Setting and then Print of Print Accounting Report Press Yes on the screen to confirm the printing 11 26 Management Unknown Account ID Jobs The behavior of the machine when it receives a job from unknown account ID i e unsent ID can be specified Refer to Unknown login user name Job on page 11 9 for details Checking and Printing Counter Press the Counter key to check the number of sheets printed and scanned Printed Pages Copy P
24. Select the operation of the reserve copy and interrupt copy functions and for canceling jobs Use the procedure below to select the default Reserve Next Priority setting 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Copy and Change of Reserve Next Priority 3 Select the default for Off or On 4 Press OK 8 26 Default Setting System Menu Preset Limit Restrict the number of copies that can be made at one time Options are 1 999 copies Use the procedure below to set the limit on the number of copies 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Copy and Change of Preset Limit 3 Press or or use the numeric keys to enter the limit for the number of copies 4 Press OK Quick Setup Registration Select the copying functions to be registered for Quick Setup Six keys of the Quick Setup screen are allocated to typical functions but can be changed as necessary Six items from the following options are available Paper Selection Zoom Staple Density Duplex Combine Collate Offset Original Image Original Size Original Orientation Continuous Scan NOTE Refer to Quick Setup Screen on page 3 41 for the Quick Setup steps GE Use the procedure below to register the Quick Setup functions 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Copy and Next of Quick Setup Registration 3 Press Change of the function to be registered in Quick Setup 4 Select a key 1 6 allocated on the Quick Setup Registration scree
25. aoa quality Delete Be ee If you selected PDF or High Comp PDF press ar a Encryption and specify the encryption settings fad JPEG B 5 Press OK Off ca 08 08 2009 10 10 o Specify the destination and press the Start key to start sending File Separation Create several files by dividing scanned original data page by page and send the files Use the procedure below to split scanned original data into separate files when sending scanned originals 1 Press the Send key 2 Place the originals on the platen 3 Press Original Sending Data Format and then File Separation a Ready to send Destination 4 Press Each Page to set File Separation Place original 1 File Separation 5 Press OK J oe a ee eee 6 Specify the destination and press the Start key The scanned original is sent after being divided into files of one page each abc_001 pdf abc_002 pdf is attached to the end of m 6 the file name NOTE Three digit serial number such as 08 08 2009 10 10 5 13 Sending Functions PDF Encryption Functions If you have selected PDF or High Comp PDF for file format you can restrict the access level for displaying printing and editing PDF s by assigning a secure password The items you can restrict the access level with are as follows Detail Compatibility Acrobat 4 0 or later Select the version that is compatible with the PDF file Acrobat 5
26. enter the correct password 3 Select the document you wish to print by checking ES the checkbox ia Fie Name A 0404200710574501 10 10 2008 09 40 21 MB Search Name The document is marked with a checkmark GE 00 v 0404200710574511 10 10 2008 09 50 21 MB ooc v E 0404200710574521 10 10 2008 10 00 21 MB NOTE To deselect press the checkbox again and remove the checkmark Detail Preview A ia Join z Ea Fas 4 Press Print d Close 08 08 2009 10 10 5 Set the paper selection duplex printing etc as desired 6 Press the Start key Printing of the selected document begins 6 5 Document Box Sending Documents The procedure for sending documents in a custom box is explained below 1 Press the Document Box key 2 Press Custom Box select the box containing the document you want to send and press Open NOTE If a custom box is protected by a password enter the correct password 3 Select the document you wish to send by checking the checkbox Search Name The document is marked with a checkmark 10 10 2008 09 50 21 MB 10 10 2008 10 00 21 MB NOTE You cannot select and send multiple documents ha To deselect press the checkbox again and remove the Preview checkmark Vv Move Copy Delete Store File a a 4 Press Send 08 08 2009 10 10 The screen for sending appears NOTE Depending on the s
27. 1 Low Quality to 5 High Quality 4 Press OK High Comp PDF Image Select the default quality setting for high compressed PDF files The table below shows the available settings Compression Ratio Priority Compression Ratio is given priority with smaller file size Standard Standard quality Quality Priority Image quality is given priority with larger file size Use the procedure below to select the default quality setting for highly compressed PDF files 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Common Settings vv and Next of Function Defaults Press v twice and Change of High Comp PDF Image 3 Select the default for Compression Ratio Priority Standard or Quality Priority 4 Press OK Color TIFF Compression Settings Select the compression method for TIFF images handled on this machine Use the procedure below to set the default Color TIFF Compression setting 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Common Settings v and Next of Function Defaults Press twice and then Change of Color TIFF Compression Select TIFF V6 or TTN2 Press OK 8 22 Default Setting System Menu Repeat Copying Select the Repeat Copy default The options are as follows The table below shows the available settings a ee rr ae No Repeat Copy is performed Repeat Copy is performed NOTE This setting is not displayed when the optional Data Security Kit is installed or
28. 2 Press Layout Edit and then Form Overlay Ready to copy 3 Press Scan New Form to use the first page of originals as a form Form Overlay TEU 10 NOTE Press or in Density to adjust the Sa density of the form Choose from ten levels in 10 increments a ox 08 08 2009 10 10 Copies To use the forms already registered press Select Stored Form Press Select Form to display the document boxes that store documents which can be used as a form Select the desired form from the list and press OK a Up Detail NOTE To return to a higher level folder press Up Preview Open 08 08 2009 10 10 Press OK 5 Place the originals Place the original for the form on top of the other originals When using the optional document processor the first page of the originals should be placed on the top 6 Press the Start key to start copying 4 22 Copying Functions Page Numbering Number multiple pages of originals in sequential order The formats for numbering are 1 P 1 or 1 n The format 1 n prints the total number of pages in the place of n Select Top Left Top Middle Top Right Bottom Left Bottom Middle or Bottom Right as the page numbering position Original Use the procedure below to insert page numbers on your copies 1 Press the Copy key 2 Place the originals in the do
29. 5 14 Sending Functions 11 Restrict the access level of the PDF file Press y of Printing Allowed to select the item the scope of limit The item to be displayed differs according to the version of Acrobat selected in Compatibility in step 4 File Format Detail Printing Allowed Not Allowed Not Allowed Changes Allowed Copying of Text Images Others Disable Enable 08 08 2009 10 10 The table below shows the available settings Item Detail Not Allowed Make the printing of PDF file impossible Allowed Low Resolution Can print the PDF file only in low resolution only Allowed Can print the PDF file in original resolution Only displayed when Acrobat 5 0 and later is selected in Compatibility 12 Press y of Changes Allowed and select the item the scope of limit The item to be displayed differs according to the version of Acrobat selected in Compatibility in step 4 The table below shows the available settings Not Allowed Cannot change the PDF file Commenting Can only add commenting Inserting Deleting Rotating Pages Can only insert delete and rotate the pages of the PDF file Page Layout except extracting Pages Can change the page layout except extracting the pages of the PDF file Any except extracting Pages Can conduct all operations except extracting the pages of the PDF file Only displayed when Acrobat 5 0 and lat
30. 6 Confirm the count and press Close 2 00 00 10 Press Execute of Counter Reset to reset the counter 8 Press Yes on the screen to confirm the reset The Counter Reset Execute pe p counter is reset a Close 08 08 2009 10 10 Each Job Accounting Reseiting the Counter This counts the number of pages for each account and resets the counts by account Use the procedure below to display and reset the counter 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press User Login Job Accounting 3 If user login administration is disabled the user authentication screen appears Enter your login user name and password and then press Login For this you need to login with administrator privileges Refer to Adding a User on page 11 5 for the default login user name and password 4 Press Next of Job Accounting Setting and Check of Each Job Accounting E 5 Select the account to check the count i Maintain a separate counter for each account department Sort Name y Accoun NOTE Select Name or ID from the Sort pull down serene menu to sort the account names Search id Press Search Name or Search ID to search by Other Account account name or account ID 6 Press Detail 08 08 2009 10 10 11 24 Management 7 Press Check at the function to check the count sigan J sas C The results will be displayed FAX Transmission Pages FAX Transmission Time
31. Counting the Number of Pages Printed on page 11 23 and Printing an Accounting Report on page 11 26 for details Use the procedure below to set the counting methods 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press User Login Job Accounting 3 If user login administration is disabled the user authentication screen appears Enter your login user name and password and then press Login For this you need to login with administrator privileges Refer to Adding a User on page 11 5 for the default login user name and password 4 Press Next of Job Accounting Setting Next of Default Setting and then Change of Copier Printer Count 5 Press Total or Split 6 Press OK Restricting the Use of the Machine This section explains how to restrict the use of the machine by account or the number of sheets available The items that can be restricted differ depending on whether Split or Total is selected for Managing the Copier Printer Counts on page 11 18 Restriction Items Split selected for Copier Printer Count ltem Detail Copy Restriction Total Limits the total number of sheets used for copying Print Restriction Total Limits the total number of sheets used for printing Scan Restriction Others Limits the number of sheets scanned excludes copying FAX TX Restriction Limits the number of sheets sent by fax This is displayed when the optional fax kit is installed FAX Port Restriction Restricts the ports us
32. Date and Time to add the date time to the job or press Job No to add the job number to the job The added information will be displayed in Additional Info 6 Press OK E mail Subject Body Set the subject and body automatically entered default subject and body when sending the scanned originals by E mail NOTE Refer to Send as E mail on page 3 22 Use the procedure below to set the default e mail subject and message body 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Common Settings v Next of Function Defaults v and then Change of E mail Subject Boay 3 Press Subject to enter an E mail subject not more than 60 characters NOTE Refer to the Character Entry Method on page Appendix 10 for details on entering characters Press OK 4 5 Press Body to enter an E mail Body not more than 500 characters 6 Press OK 7 Check that the entries are correct and press OK Border Erase Default Set the default width to be erased as a border The table below shows the measurement ranges that can be set Inch 0 to 2 in 0 01 increments Metric 0 mm to 50 mm in 1 mm increments NOTE Refer to page 4 17 and page 5 23 for Border Erase Use the procedure below to set the default border erase width 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Common Settings v Next of Function Defaults v and then Change of Border Erase Default 3 Press or for the Border and Gutter width to era
33. Follow the steps below to connect a LAN cable to the machine 1 When the machine is powered up first press the Power key on the operation panel Check that the Power indicator and the memory indicator are off After this turn off the main power switch Check that the indicators 2 Connect the LAN cable to the network interface located on right side of the body 3 Connect the other end of the cable to the hub 4 Configure the network For details refer to Network Setup LAN Cable Connection on page 2 14 2 5 Preparation before Use Connecting USB Cable Follow the steps below to connect a USB cable to the machine 1 When the machine is powered up first press the Power key on the operation panel Check that the Power indicator and the memory indicator are off After this turn off the main power switch Check that the indicators are off 2 Connect the USB cable to the appropriate interface located on the right side of the body 3 Connect the other end of the cable to the PC Connecting the Power Cable Connect one end of the supplied power cable to the machine and the other end to a power outlet IMPORTANT Only use the power cable that comes with the machine 2 6 Preparation before Use Power On Off Power On When the main power indicator is lit Press the Power key Open the main power switch cover and turn
34. Send as E mail 3 22 Emulation Appendix 28 Selection 8 33 Energy Star Program xxv Enlarged Display 8 76 Enter E mail Subject and Body 5 26 Enter key 3 3 Entry Body 5 26 Document Name 5 25 File Name 4 35 5 25 Subject 5 26 Error Handling 8 12 Error Messages 10 6 Expansion Memory Appendix 9 F File Format 5 12 PDF 5 14 File Name 4 35 File Separation 5 13 Form Overlay 4 22 Storing a Form 6 17 FTP Appendix 28 FTP Reception Protocol Detail 8 66 FTP Encrypted TX 5 31 G Glass Platen Cleaning 9 2 GPL xxii Gray Adjustment 8 45 Grayscale 5 21 Appendix 28 Green Knob 1 5 Grounding the Machine xi H Help Appendix 28 Host Name 8 64 HTTP Protocol Detail 8 66 HTTPS Index 3 Index Protocol Detail 8 67 Send 5 29 K Image Quality Send 5 16 Image repeat copy 4 27 Included Guides 2 Installation Precautions x Interface Block 8 72 Internet Browser 8 58 Interrupt Clear Timer 8 50 Interrupt Copy 3 16 IP Address Appendix 28 IPP Appendix 29 IPP over SSL Protocol Detail 8 67 J Job Available Status 7 2 Canceling 3 40 7 13 Checking History 7 9 Checking Status 7 2 Detailed Information 7 7 Detailed Information of Histories 7 10 Details of the Status Screens 7 3 Displaying History Screen 7 9 Displaying Status Screens 7 2 Pause and Resumption 7 13 Reordering 7 14 Sending the Job Log History 7 11 Job Accounting 11 14 Managing the Copier Printer Counts 11 18 Restricting the Use of
35. Some firewalls are set up so as to reject only certain Bonjour packets If Bonjour does not run stably check the firewall settings and ensure that Bonjour is registered on the exceptions list and that Bonjour packets are accepted If you install Bonjour on Windows XP Service Pack 2 or later the Windows firewall will be set up correctly for Bonjour Default Gateway This indicates the device such as a computer or router that serves as the entrance exit gateway for accessing computers outside the network that you are on When no specific gateway is designated for a destination IP address data is sent to the host designated as the Default Gateway Appendix 27 Appendix DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP that automatically resolves IP addresses subnet masks and gateway addresses on a TCP IP network DHCP minimizes the load of network management employing a large number of client computers because it relieves individual clients including printers from the IP address being assigned DHCP IPv6 DHCP IPv6 is the next generation of the Internet s Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol and supports IPv6 It extends the BOOTP startup protocol that defines the protocols used for transferring configuration information to hosts on the network DHCP IPv6 permits the DHCP server to use its expanded functionality to send configuration parameters to an IPv6 node Because the network addresses
36. The Copying screen appears in the touch panel during gt 100 2 2sided printing gt 2 sided Collate gt Top Edge Top gt 1 Press the Stop key or Cancel Top Tray C TET The current print job is cancelled o 08 08 2009 10 10 2 A4 3 40 Basic Operation Quick Setup Screen In the initial screen for copying and sending the screen which appears immediately after the Copy or Send key is first pressed after power on important and generally often used functions are registered from among the versatile functions of this machine This initial screen is called Quick Setup Screen Registration of functions in the Quick Setup Screen can be adjusted to suit your work environment for better efficiency Functions Available for Registration in the Quick Setup Screen Default registrations and the functions available for registration are as follows Function Copying Default Registration Paper Selection Zoom Density Duplex Combine Staple Functions Available for Registration Paper Selection Zoom Density Duplex Combine Staple Original Orientation Collate Offset Original Image Original Size Continuous Scan Sending Zoom Scan Resolution FAX TX Resolution Density 2 sided Book Original File Format Zoom Scan Resolution FAX TX Resolution Density 2 sided Book Original File Format Original Size Sending Size Original
37. account ID Refer to Job Accounting on page 11 14 E mail Address The user can register his her E mail address The registered address will be automatically selected for subsequent operations that need any E mail function Mandatory at user registration NOTE By default one of each default user with machine administrator rights and administrator privileges is already stored Each user s properties are Machine Administrator User Name DeviceAdmin Login User Name 3000 Login Password 3000 Access Level Machine Administrator Administrator User Name Admin Login User Name Admin Login Password Admin Access Level Administrator It is recommended to periodically change the user name login user name and login password regularly for your security Use the procedure below to register a new user Login as a user with administrator rights Press the System Menu key Press User Login Job Accounting A OO N a If user login administration is disabled the user authentication screen appears Enter your login user name and password and then press Login For this you need to login with administrator 11 5 Management privileges Refer to Adding a User on page 11 5 for the default login user name and password 5 Press Next of User Login Setting Register Edit of Local User List and then Add Press Change of User Name User Name 01 User 2 7 Enter the user name an
38. and then Change of Group Authorization Press On Press OK Register the groups that is restricted the machine usage Up to 20 groups can be individually registered Other users and groups belong to Others The table below explains the group information to be registered Item Description Group ID Enter the ID displayed on the group list between 1 and 4294967295 Group Name Enter the name displayed on the group list up to 32 characters Access Level Select Administrator or User for group access privileges Print Restriction Select whether or not to reject usage of print functions for the printer Copy Restriction Select whether or not to reject usage of copy functions Send Restriction Select whether or not to reject usage of the send functions FAX TX Restriction Select whether or not to reject usage of the FAX transmissions Storing Restr in Box Select whether or not to reject usage of storing in the document boxes 11 10 Management ees S Storing Restr in Memory Select whether or not to reject usage of storing in the removable memory For Group ID specify PrimaryGroupID assigned by ActiveDirectory of Windows If you are using Windows Server 2008 check Attribute Editor tab of user properties If you are using Windows Server 2000 2003 check ADSIEdit ADSIEdit is a support tool included on the installation CD ROM for Windows Server OS under SUPPORT TOOLS U
39. to B 3 Darker You can change the density level 3 Lighter to 3 Darker in half steps To change density adjustment from Manual to Auto press Auto Place original 5 Press OK 08 08 2009 10 10 6 Press the Start key Copying begins 3 7 Basic Operation Selecting Image Quality Select image quality suited to the type of original The table below shows the quality options Image Quality Option Description For originals with both text and photographs Text Photo Text For originals primarily consisting of text Photo For photos taken with a camera Printed Document For documents printed from this machine The procedure for selecting the quality of copies is explained below Ready to copy Copies Original Image f A Select original image type for best results Printed Document Suitable for documents printed from this machine Fal P Place original f 5 a Text Photo Text Photo Printed Document 1 Press the Copy key 2 Place the originals on the platen 3 Set the original on the platen and press Image Quality gt Original Image 4 Select the image quality 5 Press OK Cancel a OK 08 08 2009 10 10 6 Press the Start key Copying begins Basic Operation Zoom Copying Adjust the magnification to reduce or enlarge the original image The following zoom options are available Auto
40. 0 or later Password to Off On Enter the password to open the PDF file Open Document Password to Off On Enter the password to edit the PDF file Edit Print When you have entered the password to edit print Document document you can specifically limit the operation When you send a PDF file use the procedure below to encrypt the PDF file for transmission 1 Press the Send key 2 Place the originals on the platen 3 Press Original Sending Data Format File Format PDF or High Comp PDF and Encryption a een 4 Press y of Compatibility select Acrobat 4 0 and Compatibility Acrobat 4 0 and later later or Acrobat 5 0 and later Encryption Level Middle 40 bit oe eal on 5 When you enter the password to open the PDF file B Confirmation E select On of Password to Open Document 6 Press Password enter a password up to 256 Password a characters and then press OK Password to Edit Print Document a Confirmation NOTE Refer to the Character Entry Method on page m Appendix 10 for details on entering characters 08 08 2009 10 10 7 Press Confirmation and enter the password again for confirmation Then press OK 8 When you enter the password to edit the PDF file select On of Password to Edit Print Document 9 Inthe same way as the entry of Password to Open Document enter the password to change the PDF file 10 Press Detail
41. 10 Management Deleting a user 1 Press Delete 2 Press Yes on the screen to confirm deletion The selected user will be deleted NOTE The default user with administrator rights cannot be deleted For a user without administrator rights who logs in These users can partially change their own user properties including user name login password and E mail address Although login user name access level or account name cannot be changed the users can check the present status Use the procedure below to change user properties 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press User Property 3 Refer to steps 6 to 17 of Adding a User to change user properties User Name Change 01 User a eee ia eet aa Press Detail of Login User Name or Account oe See Name to check the present status Access Level Account Name Detail User 02Account 2 E mail Address Change IC Card Information abcd efg com 2 Empty Cancel lel Register 08 08 2009 10 10 4 Press Register to finalize changed user properties 11 8 Management Unknown login user name Job This specifies the behavior for handling the jobs sent with unknown login user names or User ID i e unsent IDs If the User Login is set to invalid and Job Accounting is set to valid follow the procedure when the Account ID is unknown The table below shows the available settings a The job is rejected not printed T
42. 2 E mail Recipient 3 TCP IP b aa es SMTP Protocol on O off AppleTalk SMTP Port Number 25 NetBEUI SMTP Server Name mailserver kyocera com E mail Recipient 1 SMTP Server Timeout 30 seconds Authentication Protocol On O POP before 2 19 Preparation before Use 2 Enter the correct settings in each field The settings to be specified in the SMTP settings screen are shown below Item Description SMTP Protocol Enables or disables SMTP protocol To use E mail this protocol must be enabled SMTP Port Number Set the SMTP Port Number or use the SMTP default port 25 SMTP Server Name Enter the SMTP server IP address or its name The maximum length of the SMTP server name and IP address is 64 characters If entering the name a DNS server address must also be configured The DNS server address may be entered on the TCP IP General tab SMTP Server Timeout Set the amount of time to wait before time out in seconds Authentication Protocol Enables or disables the SMTP authentication protocol or sets POP before SMTP as the protocol The SMTP authentication supports Microsoft Exchange 2000 Authenticate as Authentication can be set from three POP3 accounts or you can choose a different account Login User Name When Other is selected for Authenticate the login user name set here will be used for SMTP authentication The maximum length of the login user name i
43. 2 sided Sheet Original 2 sided Binding Left Right Binding Top Open Book Original such Book as magazine and book Binding Left Binding Right i Only when the optional document processor is used Use the procedure below to select the original type and binding direction when sending scanned originals 4 Ready to send Destination Place original 2 sided Book Original Top Edge Top Original Orientation 08 08 2009 10 10 1 Press the Send key Place the originals on the platen Press Original Sending Data Format and then 2 sided Book Original Press 1 sided 2 sided or Book When selecting 2 sided select the binding direction and press Original Orientation to select the direction in which the original is set on the platen When selecting Book select the binding direction Press OK Specify the destination and press the Start key to start sending 5 10 Sending Functions Original Orientation To send the document in the orientation that can be read properly specify the upper orientation of original To use the functions below select the orientation in which the original is set on the platen e 2 sided Book Original Border Erase If On is selected as the Orientation Confirmation page 8 14 setting in the System Menu the selection screen for original orientation appears when you select any of the above functions When plac
44. 22 doc20070225142253 Completed 000083 01 25 14 24 doc20070225142458 Error S 000082 01 25 14 23 doc20070225142310 Completed f 001 001 g z 000084 01 25 14 30 doc20070225143034 Completed Printing Jobs Sending Jobs Storing Jobs Device lie canmunaton P27 08 08 2009 10 10 Status Job Cancel Checking the Detailed Information of Histories Check the detailed information of each history Display of the detailed information of Job Finish history Use the procedure below to check the job finish history Status E Job Type All y JobNo End Date Type Job Name Result 000080 01 25 14 14 doc20070225141427 Completed 000081 01 25 14 22 doc20070225142253 Completed 000082 01 25 14 23 doc20070225142310 Completed f 001 001 000083 01 25 14 24 doc20070225142458 Error 000084 01 25 14 30 doc20070225143034 Completed Printing Jobs Sending Jobs Storing Jobs Device lie 08 08 2009 10 10 Press the Status Job Cancel key Press Printing Jobs Sending Jobs or Storing Jobs and then Log Select the job to check details from the list and press Detail Detailed information of the selected job is displayed NOTE To check the information of the next previous page press v or A 4 To exit from the detailed information press Close 7 10 Status Job Cancel Sending the Job Log History You can send the job log history by e mai
45. 7 1 4 x10 1 2 B5 257 x 182 mm Envelope DL 110 x 220 mm B5 R 182 x 257 mm Envelope C5 162 x 229mm A5 R 148 x 210 mm Envelope C4 229 x 324mm Folio 210 x 330 mm ISO B5 176 x 250 mm Ledger Envelope 10 Commercial 10 4 1 8 x 9 1 2 Legal Envelope 9 Commercial 9 3 7 8 x 8 7 8 Letter Envelope 6 Commercial 6 3 4 3 5 8 x 6 1 2 Letter R Envelope Monarch 3 7 8 x7 1 2 Statement R Youkei 2 114 x 162 mm Oficio II Youkei 4 105 x 235 mm 8 5 x 13 5 Size Entry 98 x 148 to 297 x 432 mm 8K 273 x 394 mm 16K 273 x 197 mm 16K R 197 x 273 mm Smoothness The paper surface should be smooth With paper that is too smooth and slippery several sheets may accidentally be supplied at once causing jams Basis Weight In countries that use the metric system basis weight is the weight in grams of one sheet of paper one square meter in area In the United States basis weight is the weight in pounds of one ream 500 sheets of paper cut to the standard size or trade size for a specific grade of paper Paper that is too heavy or too light may be supplied incorrectly or cause paper jams which may cause excessive wear of the machine Mixed paper weight i e thickness may cause several sheets to be supplied at once accidentally and may also cause blurring or other printing problems if the toner fails to adhere correctly Appendix 15 Appendix
46. 8 10 Type of Cover Description Front Cover First page of the originals is copied on a different paper Front and Back First page and last page of the originals are Covers copied on different paper The procedure for using Cover mode copying is explained below 1 Press the Copy key Place the originals on the platen Press Layout Edit and then Cover 2 3 Ready to copy Copies 4 Press Front Cover or Front and Back Covers 5 Press OK li Print cover pages on the different type of paper using a different paper source Select either Front Cover or Place original Front and Back Covers Set paper source for cover in System Menu Sm in H Front Tover Front and Back Covers 08 08 2009 10 10 6 Press the Start key Copying begins If the originals are placed on the platen consecutively replace each original after pressing the Start key After scanning all originals press Finish Scan to start copying 4 21 Copying Functions Form Overlay Copy the original images onto the form Once you scan and register the form the form is overlaid onto the S p gt original You can also use a form that is already G registered in the machine s memory Miginal Copy NOTE To register a form in advance refer to Form for Form Overlay Box on page 6 17 for details Follow the steps as below for form overlay 1 Press the Copy key
47. 8 5x13 5 Oficio Il 11x15 8K 16K Others Select from Hagaki Oufuku Hagaki Hagaki Sending Functions Relationship between Original Size Sending Size and Zoom Original Size page 5 2 Sending Size and Zoom page 5 5 are related to each other Refer to the following table Original Size and the size you wish to send as are the same different Original Size Specify as Specify as necessary necessary Sending Size Select Same as Select the Original required size Zoom Select 100 Select Auto or Auto NOTE When you select Sending Size that is different from Original Size and select the Zoom 100 you can send the image as the actual size No Zoom Use the procedure below to select the size for transmission when sending scanned images 1 Press the Send Key 2 Place the originals on the platen 3 Press Original Sending Data Format and then Sending Size a Ready to send Destination 4 Press Standard Sizes 1 Standard Sizes 2 or Place original 1 Others to select the sending size Sending Size Standard Same as Ledger Letter Ea Prose Size 5 Press OK Legal Statement 11x15 Place original Standard Sizes 2 18 5x13 5 OficioII Others Cancel 4l OK 08 08 2009 10 10 6 Specify the destination and press the Start key to start sending Sending Functions Zoom Scans the original by automatically
48. 8 Confirm the count and press Close 2 20 0 00 10 Press Execute of Counter Reset to reset the counter 10 Press Yes on the screen to confirm the reset The Counter Reset Execute p counter will be reset pT paee Close 08 08 2009 10 10 Counting by Paper Size This counts the number of pages by paper size e g Letter NOTE Paper size is available in five types 1 to 5 These types are specified in accounting reports Refer to Printing an Accounting Report on page 11 26 In addition to paper size media type can also be specified e g count the letter size color paper used If no media type is specified usage is counted for all media types of that size Use the procedure below to count the number of pages 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press User Login Job Accounting 3 If user login administration is disabled the user authentication screen appears Enter your login user name and password and then press Login For this you need to login with administrator privileges Refer to Adding a User on page 11 5 for the default login user name and password 4 Press Next of Job Accounting Setting Next of Default Setting Change of Count by Paper Size Change of Paper Size 1 to 5 and then On Select the paper size User Login Job Accounting Paper Size 1 i Select the paper sizes and types to count Press Media Type to specify media type Select the media type and press OK
49. A1 We do not guarantee that USB memory printing is error free if a USB hub is used Printing Print documents stored in the removable USB memory 1 Plug the USB memory into the USB memory slot A1 IMPORTANT Use USB memory formatted by this machine If a USB memory formatted by any other device is used The removable memory is not formatted may appear To format a USB memory press Format and follow the instructions on the screen 2 When the machine reads the USB memory Removable Memory is recognized Displaying files may appear Press Yes to display the removable memory screen NOTE If the message does not appear press the Document Box key and then Removable Memory 3 Select the folder containing the file to be printed and press Open The machine will display documents in the top 3 folder levels including the root folder NOTE To return to a higher level folder press Up 6 20 Document Box Removable Memory 4 Select the file to be printed and press Print B jovable Memory Date and Time 10 10 2008 09 30 1 MB E 2 Document 10 10 2008 09 40 3 Document 10 10 2008 09 50 Memory D 4 Document 10 10 2008 10 00 Information B 5 Document 10 10 2008 10 05 Remove Memory Store File 08 08 2009 10 10 5 Change the number of copies duplex printing etc as desired 6 Press the Start key Printing of the selected file begins Removing USB Mem
50. Book of Finishing to select the E O ae setting for duplex Bool Left Right Top e a 4 K 08 08 2009 10 10 k gt gt 2 sided 3 12 Basic Operation Ready to copy re T sided Original gt gt 1 sided IRI 1 sided ji A gt gt 2 sided Binding Binding Left Right Tor 2 sided DR a gt gt 1 sided 2 sided gt gt 2 sided Top Edge Top Original Orientation 08 08 2009 10 10 i Book gt gt 1 sided Collate Offset Copying 6 Ifyou choose 2 sided gt gt 1 sided 2 sided gt gt 2 sided Book gt gt 1 sided or Book gt gt 2 sided select the binding edge of the originals of Original 7 Press Original Orientation to select orientation of the originals either Top Edge Top or Top Edge Left Then press OK 8 Press OK 9 Press the Start key Once an original placed on the platen is scanned replace it with the next one Then press the Start key After scanning all originals press Finish Scan to start copying The machine can collate and offset at the same time as it copies You can use the Collate Offset copy function for tasks such as those shown below Collate Original Offset Without Document Finisher Copy each set Scan multiple originals and deliver complete sets of c
51. Built in Finisher Item Description Number of Trays 1 tray Paper Size Ledger Legal Oficio II 8 5x13 5 A3 B4 Folio 8K 250 sheets Non stapling Letter Letter R A4 A4 R B5 16K 500 sheets 60 to 105 g m Maximum Sheets Ledger Legal Oficio II 8 5x13 5 A3 B4 Folio 8K 20 sheets for Stapling Letter Letter R A4 A4 R B5 16K 30 sheets Paper weight 80 g m or less Dimensions 12 13 16 17 11 16 6 1 2 W x D x H 325 x 450 x165 mm Weight 17 6 Ibs or less 8 kg or less NOTE Consult your dealer or service representative for recommended paper types Maschinenlarminformations Verordnung 3 GPSGV der h chste Schalldruckpegel betr gt 70 dB A oder weniger gemass EN ISO 7779 Das Ger t ist nicht f r die Benutzung am Bildschirmarbeitsplatz gem BildscharbV vorgesehen Um st rende Reflexionen am Bildschirmarbeitsplatz zu vermeiden darf dieses Produkt nicht im unmittelbaren Gesichtsfeld platziert werden Appendix 26 Appendix Glossary Accessibility The machine is designed featuring good accessibility even for the elderly and those who are physically challenged or visually impaired Touch panel characters can be enlarged while the touch panel is adjustable in two angles AppleTalk AppleTalk which comes with Apple Computer s Mac OS is a network protocol AppleTalk enables file printer sharing and also enables you to utilize application software that is
52. Check the SMB settings Login user name and login password If the sender is a domain user specify the domain name Host name Path Failed to send the e mail Check the followings on the Failed to send i FAX Embedded Web Server SMTP login user name and login password POPS login user name and login password Failed to send via FTP Check the FTP settings Login user name and login password If the sender is a domain user specify the domain name Path Folder share permissions of the recipient Failed to send via SMB Check the SMB settings Login user name and login password If the sender is a domain user specify the domain name Path Folder share permissions of the recipient Failed to send via FTP Check the FTP settings Path Folder share permissions of the recipient 10 11 Troubleshooting Error Message Failed to send the e mail Failed to send i FAX Corrective Actions Check the e mail address If the address is rejected by the domain you cannot send the e mail Check the i FAX address If the address is rejected by the domain you cannot send i FAX Reference Page FAX System S Operation Guide Chapter 8 Internet Faxing i FAX Option Failed to send via SMB Select On of the SMB settings on the Embedded Web Server Failed to send the e mail Select On of the SMTP settings on the Embedde
53. Color Grayscale Auto Color Color Black and White Full Color Grayscale Black and White 1 Low Quality High Comp to 5 High Quality Low Comp Auto Color Color Grayscale Full Color Grayscale High Comp PDF 1 Low Quality High Comp to 5 High Quality Low Comp 1 Compression Ratio Priority to 3 Quality Priority Auto Color Color Grayscale Full Color Grayscale Auto Color Color Grayscale Auto Color Color Black and White Full Color Grayscale NOTE In the color mode when auto color color black and white is selected JPEG and XPS cannot be specified and when black and white is selected JPEG High Comp PDF and XPS cannot be specified When High Comp PDF is specified you cannot adjust the image quality In addition when previewing the color of the image by selecting High Comp PDF it may differ from the actual color You can use PDF encryption functions For details refer to the following PDF Encryption Functions 5 12 Sending Functions Use the procedure below to select the file format for transmission 1 Press the Send key 2 Place the originals on the platen 3 Press Original Sending Data Format and then File Format 4 Select the file format from PDF TIFF JPEG XPS and High Comp PDF a Ready to send Destination When the color mode in scanning has been Place original 1 selected for Grayscale or Full Color set the image
54. Density Adjust Press Change of Auto or of Manual Press 3 3 Lighter Darker to adjust density Press OK a A W N 8 41 Default Setting System Menu Print Density Adjust print density Adjustment can be made in 5 levels Use the procedure below to adjust the print density 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press x Adjustment Maintenance and then Change of Print Density 3 Press 1 5 Lighter Darker to adjust density 4 Press OK Drum Refresh Refresh the drum when image blur or white spots appear on images in copies There are 2 drum refresh modes Item Description Drum Refresh 1 Use this mode when images are blurred or smeared Refreshing takes about 160 seconds Drum Refresh 2 Use this mode when white spots appear on images Refreshing takes about 90 seconds NOTE Drum Refresh cannot be performed while printing Execute Drum Refresh after the printing is done When you run Drum Refresh 2 the machine makes a vibrating sound for about 90 seconds until drum refreshing is completed The toner soiling on the ejected paper is normal and does not indicate a fault To use Drum Refresh 2 load Ledger or A3 size paper into the Multi Purpose tray Use the procedure below to refresh the drum 1 Press the System Menu key Press v Adjustment Maintenance Press v and then Next of Drum Refresh 1 or Drum Refresh 2 Press Execute to perform Drum Refresh ao
55. Drum Refresh 8 42 Disable the Printed Document Guard Kit Appendix 9 Printouts are fuzzy Is the machine being used in very humid conditions Carry out Drum Refresh 8 42 Images are skewed Are the originals placed correctly When placing originals on the platen align them with the original size indicator plates 2 34 When placing originals in the optional document processor align the original width guides securely before placing the originals Is the paper loaded correctly Check the position of the paper width guides Paper often jams Is the paper loaded correctly Load the paper correctly Is the paper of the supported type Is it in good condition Remove the paper turn it over and reload it Is the paper curled folded or wrinkled Replace the paper with new paper Are there any loose scraps or jammed paper in the machine Remove any jammed paper 10 3 Troubleshooting Symptom Printouts from the document processor have black lines Checkpoints Is the slit glass dirty Corrective Actions Clean the slit glass Reference Page Printouts are wrinkled Is the paper separator of the paper feed unit dirty Clean the paper separator Is the paper damp Replace the paper with new paper Is the paper set in a proper orientation Change the orientation in which the paper is positioned
56. For this you need to login with administrator privileges Refer to Adding a User on page 11 5 for the default login user name and password 3 Select Document Guard from the list and then Activate 4 Enter the license key and press Official To use the function as a trial press Trial without entering the license key NOTE For details on how to enter the license key consult your dealer or service representative 8 74 Default Setting System Menu Optional Functions You can use the optional applications installed on this machine Overview of the Applications The applications listed below are installed on this machine You can use these applications for a limited period on a trial basis Printed Document Guard Kit This prevents the unauthorized copying and or transmission of documents that contain important confidential or personal information When a document is printed from a computer this feature imprints a special pattern on the document When anyone attempts to copy or send that document on this machine the machine detects the pattern and protects the information by printing the document in blank prohibiting transmission NOTE Restrictions such as the number of times the application can be used during the trial period differ depending on the application Starting Application Use gi Use the procedure below to start using an application 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press System and
57. If an error occurs when connecting to the authentication server check the error message and follow the corresponding corrective action appears on the operation panel Corrective Actions Symptom Reference Page Cannot connect to Set machine time to match the 2 12 authentication server server s time Cannot connect to Check the domain name 11 2 authentication server Check the hostname 11 2 server Check the connection status with the Responding to an Attention Indicator Flashes If an attention indicator flashes press Status Job Cancel to check an error message If the message is not indicated on the touch panel when Status Job Cancel is pressed or the attention indicator flashes for 1 5 seconds check the following Symptom Cannot send fax Checkpoints Is the modular cord connected correctly Corrective Actions Connect the modular cord correctly Reference Page Is Permitted FAX No or Permitted ID No registered correctly Check Permitted FAX No and Permitted ID No FAX System S Operation Guide Chapter 6 Registering Permit FAX No and Registering Permit ID No Has a communication error occurred Is the destination FAX line busy Does the destination FAX machine respond Is there an error other than above Check error codes in the TX RX Result Report and Activity Report If the error code starts with U or E perform the correspo
58. List 3 Press OK 4 Press Yes on the screen to add the destination to the One Touch Key Deleting the Registered Information 1 Press Delete 2 Press Yes on the screen to confirm the deletion of the data registered in the One Touch Key 8 56 Default Setting System Menu Sort Settings Select the default sort setting of the address for the address book The table below shows the available settings Displays the destination list in order of the registered number Displays the destination list in order of the registered name Use the procedure below to specify the Sort settings 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Edit Destination Next of Address Book Defaults and then Change of Sort 3 Select No or Name 4 Press OK Narrow Down Settings This procedure can be used to filter narrow down the types of destination listed when the address book is GE displayed The table below shows the available settings ltem Detail Displays all destination types in the destination list Displays only e mail destinations Displays only folder SMB or FTP destinations Displays only FAX destinations Displays only i FAX destinations Displays only groups Use the procedure below to specify the Narrow Down settings 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Edit Destination Next of Address Book Defaults and then Change of Narrow Down 3 Select the type of destinati
59. Media Type Plain 105 g m or less Rough Vellum 64 g m or less Recycled Preprint Bond Color Prepunched Letterhead Thick 106 g m and more High Quality Custom 1 8 To change to a media type other than Plain refer to Paper Weight on page 8 7 When the paper weight settings shown below are selected the media indicated for each setting cannot be selected Custom 1 to 8 Heavy3 or Extra Heavy To print on preprinted or prepunched paper or on letterhead refer to Special Paper Action on page 8 10 Default Setting System Menu Use the procedure below to select the paper size and media type for each cassette 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Common Settings Next of Original Paper Settings Next of Cassette Setting Next of Cassette 1 to Cassette 4 on which you want to register the size and then Change of Paper Size 3 To detect paper size automatically press Auto and select Metric or Inch for Paper Size To select paper size press Standard Sizes 1 or Standard Sizes 2 for Paper Size 4 Press OK The previous screen reappears 5 Press Change of Media Type to select media type and press OK Paper Size and Media Type Setup for Multi Purpose Tray Select size and media type for multi purpose tray Set up frequently used size and media type before use The available paper sizes and media types are shown in the table below Item Description Auto Automatically detect paper size Sel
60. Menu key 2 Press Common Settings v Next of Function Defaults and then Change of Original Orientation 3 Select Top Edge Top or Top Edge Left for the default 4 Press OK Continuous Scan Set the continuous scan defaults The available default settings are shown below i a ee ee Continuous scan not performed Continuous scan performed Refer to page 4 10 for Original Orientation Use the procedure below to select the default settings for continuous scanning 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Common Settings v Next of Function Defaults and then Change of Continuous Scan 3 Select Off or On for the default Use the procedure below to select the default quality setting for originals 4 Press OK Original Image Set the default original document type The available default settings are shown below a ee Text Photo Text and photos together Photo For photos taken with a camera Default Setting System Menu Item Description Text Only text no photos for OCR Image quality suitable for OCR software Printed Document For documents printed from this machine This function is only available for black and white mode Use the procedure below to select the default quality setting for originals 1 2 3 4 Press the System Menu key Press Common Settings v Next of Function Defaults and then Change of Original Image Se
61. Normal or 200x400dpi Super Fine for the scan resolution Select a scan resolution other than 200x 100dpi Normal or 200x400dpi Super Fine when sending an image 10 4 Troubleshooting Symptom Checkpoints Corrective Actions rg USB memory not Check that the USB memory recognized is securely plugged into the machine Is the USB host blocked Select Unblock in the USB host settings Perform Gray Over long periods of use the Whenever the printed hues differ Adjustment in the effects of the ambient from the original document or System Menu is temperature and humidity image carry out Gray Adjustment displayed can cause color output hues to vary slightly 10 5 Troubleshooting Responding to Error Messages If the touch panel displays any of these messages follow the corresponding procedure Alphanumeric Error Message Acceptable staple count exceeded Checkpoints Is the acceptable staple count exceeded For details refer to Specifications on page Appendix 25 Appendix 26 Corrective Actions Press Continue to print without stapling Press Cancel to cancel the job Reference Page Add paper in cassette 1 Is the indicated cassette out of paper Load paper Add paper in Multi Purpose tray Is the paper of the selected size loaded in the multi purpose tray Load the paper in the multi purpose tray which is of the size and type indicat
62. Number 4 37 Outputting 4 37 Selecting 4 36 Replacement Toner Container 9 7 Waste Toner Box 9 7 Reserve Next 3 15 Reserve Next Priority 8 26 Resolution Appendix 22 Appendix 23 Restarting the System 8 63 Index 6 Index S Protocol Detail 8 66 Safety Conventions i Safety Instructions Regarding the Disconnection of Power xvi Scan Resolution 5 18 Default settings 8 16 Scanner Cleaning 8 46 Secure Protocol 8 69 Send File Format 5 12 Image Quality 5 16 Original Size Selection 5 2 Print 5 30 Sending Size Selection 5 3 Setup 8 28 Store 5 30 Sending Send as E mail 3 22 Send to Folder FTP 3 25 Send to Folder SMB 3 24 Sending E mail 2 19 Sending Functions 5 1 Sending Settings 8 28 Color Type 8 29 Quick Setup Registration 8 28 Sending Size Selection 5 3 Sending to Different Types of Destinations Multi Sending 3 30 Separator Cleaning 9 4 Setting Date and Time 2 12 Sharpness adjust Copy 4 30 Send 5 19 Shortcuts 3 46 Adding 3 46 Sleep 2 10 Slit Glass 1 4 Cleaning 9 3 SMTP Appendix 30 SMTP E mail TX Protocol Detail 8 66 SNMP Protocol Detail 8 66 SNMPv3 Solving Malfunctions 10 2 Specifications Built in Finisher Appendix 26 Document Finisher Appendix 25 Document Processor Appendix 24 Job Separator Appendix 25 Machine Appendix 21 Paper Feeder Appendix 24 Printer Appendix 23 Scanner Appendix 23 Specifying Destination 3 27 3 28 Status Job Cancel 7 1 Status Page 8 38 Appendix 3
63. One Touch Key number 0001 to 1000 for the destination Pressing Quick No Search key or No enables direct entry of a One Touch Key number Select a One Touch Key with no registered destination Press Register Edit The address book appears Select a destination contact or group to add to the One Touch Key number Pressing Detail shows the detailed information of the selected destination NOTE Destinations can be sorted or searched by destination name or address number Refer to Specifying Destination on page 3 28 for Address List 6 Press OK The destination will be added to the One Touch Key 8 55 Default Setting System Menu Editing One Touch Key Edit delete the destinations you added to One Touch Key Use the procedure below to edit the One Touch key 1 2 3 Press the System Menu key Press Edit Destination and then Register Edit of One Touch Key Select a One Touch Key number 0001 to 1000 for the destination Pressing Quick No Search key or No enables direct entry of a One Touch Key number The procedure differs depending on the details to be edited Changing the Registered Information 1 Press Register Edit 2 Select a new destination Contact or group Pressing Detail shows the detailed information of the selected destination NOTE Destinations can be sorted or searched by destination name or address number Refer to Specifying Destination on page 3 28 for Address
64. Orientation Original Image Color Selection Continuous Scan 3 41 Basic Operation Function Document Storage Document Box Default Registration Color Selection Resolution Density 2 sided Book Original Original Orientation Original Image Functions Available for Registration Color Selection Resolution Density 2 sided Book Original Original Orientation Original Image Original Size Zoom Continuous Scan Storing Size Sending From Box File Format Delete after Transmitted FAX TX Resolution Sending Size File Format Delete after Transmitted FAX TX Resolution Sending Size Printing From Box Changing Registration Di Ready to copy 100 Normal 0 Paper Zoom Density Selection 2 sided 2in1 ta gt 2 sided om eo wy Quality Quick Setup Paper Selection Delete after Printed Collate Offset Duplex Staple Combine Copies 1 Shortcut 1 g 1S Shortcut 2 S Shortcut 3 Is Shortcut 4 A Shortcut 5 Shortcut 6 g Advanced Setup 08 08 2009 10 10 Paper Selection Delete after Printed Collate Offset Duplex Staple Combine The following procedure is one example for replacing the registration of Density with Original Image in the Quick Setup Screen for copying 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Copy Next of Quick Setup Registration and then Change of Original Image
65. Press the System Menu key 2 Press Printer v and Change of Form Feed Timeout 3 Press or to set the Form Feed Timeout You can set the timeout delay in seconds You cannot use the numeric keys to enter this value 4 Press OK LF Action Set the line feed action when the machine receives the line feed code character code OAH The table below shows the available settings LF Only Only line feed performed LF and CR Line feed and character return performed Ignore LF No line feed performed Use the procedure below to specify an LF action 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Printer v and Change of LF Action 3 Press LF Only LF and CR or Ignore LF 4 Press OK 8 36 Default Setting System Menu CR Action Set the character return action when the machine receives the character return code character code ODH The table below shows the available settings Item Description CR Only Only character return performed LF and CR Character return and line feed performed Ignore CR No character return performed Use the procedure below to specify a CR action 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Printer v and Change of CR Action 3 Press CR Only LF and CR or Ignore CR 4 Press OK Paper Feed Mode GE While printing from the computer select how to feed paper when the paper source and type are specified The table below shows the available se
66. Protocol and then Change of LDAP Security Press Off LDAP over SSL or LDAPv3 TLS Press OK a fF W N After changing the setting restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON again For detailed information on restarting the system refer to Restarting the System on page 8 63 8 70 Default Setting System Menu IPSec Setting Sets up IPSec The default setting is Off Use the procedure below 1 2 Press the System Menu key Press System Next of Network and then Change of PSec NOTE If user login administration is disabled the user authentication screen appears Enter your login user name and password and then press Login For this you need to login with administrator privileges Refer to Adding a User on page 11 5 for the default login user name and password 3 4 5 Press On Press OK After changing the setting restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON again For detailed information on restarting the system refer to Restarting the System on page 8 63 LAN Interface Setup Specify the settings for the LAN interface to be used The default setting is Auto Use the procedure below 1 2 3 Press the System Menu key Press System Next of Network and then Change of LAN Interface Select Auto 10BASE T Half 10BASE T Full 100BASE TX Half or 100BASE TX Full as the LAN interface Press OK After changing the setting resta
67. Touch keys Choosing by Speed Dial gl Ready to send Destination Access the destination by specifying the 4 digit 0001 to Place original 1000 One Touch Key number speed dial Destination I Detail g prre i R In the basic screen for sending press the Quick No Dien Search key or No and use the numeric keys to enter eae the One Touch key number in the numeric entry On Hook Direct Chain J sess J oat J et FAX No screen Entry Gp G hee Entry 0001 0002 0003 se 0004 ae ac HE 2700 g WSD Scan NOTE if you entered the speed dial in 1 to 3 digit press OK Destination Quick Setup opine ning Color Image Quality ow 10 10 Sending to Different Types of Destinations Multi Sending You can specify destinations that combine e mail addresses folders SMB or FTP and fax numbers optional This is referred to as Multi Sending This is useful for sending to different types of destination e mail addresses folders etc in a single operation No of broadcast items E mail Up to 100 Folders SMP FTP Total of 10 SMB and FTP FAX Up to 500 i FAX Up to 100 Also depending on the settings you can send and print at the same time Procedures are the same as used in specifying the destinations of respective types Continue to enter E mail address or folder path so that they appear in the destination list Press the Start key to launch transmission to
68. Type This sets the color type when you send color documents The table below shows the available settings Selecting RGB displays the color profile values set on the machine 1 Press System Menu key Press Send and Change of Color Type Send Color Type i Specify the color type to send color images 2 3 Select RGB or sRGB 4 Press OK Profile RGB FINE 1 08 08 2009 10 10 5 31 Sending Functions About Color Profiles The color scanner provides color profiles to adjust color NOTE The color profile data import method varies for every TWAIN WIA compliant software Use the color profile after carefully reading the manual included with your TWAIN WIA complaint software Selecting a color profile compatible with this device 1 Select the color profile found in the CD included with this scanner CD Product Library under the Color Profile folder NOTE Use the indicated color profiles when you chose RGB in color type 5 32 6 Document Box This chapter explains the typical procedure for utilizing Document Box lt Using a Custom BOX va sons an cicinccncteacdninsaaniaesdacsceasdensnuadantsuneceadatataibiadanad s NPS adob BOX rssarann a EENE 6 12 e Printing Documents Stored in Removable USB Memory 6 20 e Saving Documents to USB Memory Scan to USB eee 6 22 6 1 Document Box Using a Custom Box NOTE In the following exp
69. Y default Y Bond Y Y default Cardstock N N Y default Color Y default N Prepunched Y default N Z Z Z lt 2 2 Z lt 2 Letterhead Y default N z lt lt lt 2 lt lt lt Thick N Y default z z lt lt lt 2 lt lt lt z lt Z Z lt lt lt lt Z Z Z lt lt Z z z lt lt lt Envelope Y default 8 7 Default Setting System Menu Paper Weight Normal 1 Normal 2 Normal 3 High Quality Y Y Y default Y N N N N Custom 1 8 Y Y Y default Y Y Y y y When Heavy 3 or Extra Heavy is selected the media type cannot be selected for the cassettes For Custom 1 8 settings for duplex printing and media type name can be changed Use 1 2 3 4 5 6 Item Description Prohibit Duplex printing not allowed Permit Duplex printing allowed Change names for Custom 1 8 Names should be not more than 15 characters Selecting media type at multi purpose tray the name after change will be displayed the procedure below to set the paper weight Press the System Menu key Press Common Settings Next of Original Paper Settings and then Next of Media Type Setting Press Next for the media type whose weight you want to change Press Change of Paper Weight Select the weight and press OK Press Close The
70. Zoom Ledger 129 Automatically reduces or enlarges the original image suitably to the selected paper size 3 er R ell Il gt A3 141 Statement R 64 Manual Zoom Manually reduces or enlarges the original image in 1 increments between 25 and 400 Preset Zoom Reduces or enlarges at preset magnifications The following magnifications are available Model Zoom Level Original Copy Inch Models 100 Auto 400 Max 200 STMT gt gt Ledger 154 STMT gt gt Legal 129 Letter gt gt Ledger 121 Legal gt gt Ledger 78 Legal gt gt Letter 77 Ledger gt gt Legal 64 Ledger gt gt Letter 50 Ledger gt gt STMT 25 Min Metric Models 100 Auto 400 Max 200 A5 gt gt A3 141 A4 gt gt A3 A5 gt gt A4 127 Folio gt gt A3 106 11x15 gt gt A3 90 Folio gt gt A4 75 11x15 gt gt A4 70 A3 gt gt A4 A4 gt gt A5 50 25 Min Metric Models Asia 100 Auto 400 Max 200 A5 gt gt A3 Pacific 141 A4 gt gt A3 B5 gt gt B4 122 A4 gt gt B4 A5 gt gt B5 115 B4 gt gt A3 B5 gt gt A4 86 A3 gt gt B4 A4 gt gt B5 81 B4 gt gt A4 B5 gt gt A5 70 A3 gt gt A4 B4 gt gt B5 50 25 Min 3 9 Basic Operation XY Zoom Select vertical and horizontal magnifications individually Reduce or enlarge original images in 1 increments
71. address is a unique number that represents a specific computer or related device on the network The format of an IP address is four sets of numbers separated by dots e g 192 168 110 171 Each number should be between 0 and 255 Appendix 28 Appendix IPP IPP Internet Printing Protocol is a standard that uses TCP IP networks such as the Internet to enable print jobs to be sent between remote computers and printers IPP is an extension of the HTTP protocol used to view websites and enables printing to be carried out via routers on printers in remote locations It also supports the HTTP authentication mechanisms along with SSL server and client authentication as well as encryption KPDL Kyocera Page Description Language Kyocera s PostScript page description language compatible with Adobe PostScript Level 3 Multi Purpose MP Tray The paper supply tray on the right side of the machine Use this tray instead of the cassettes when printing onto envelopes Hagaki transparencies or labels NetBEUI NetBIOS Extended User Interface An interface developed by IBM in 1985 as an update from NetBIOS It enables more advanced functions on smaller networks than other protocols such as TCP IP etc It is not suitable for larger networks due to lack of routing capabilities to choose the most appropriate routes NetBEUI has been adopted by IBM for its OS 2 and Microsoft for its Windows as a standard protocol for file sharing and printing servic
72. background of the colored original when it is too dark NOTE You cannot adjust the background density if you selected Black amp White in Color Grayscale Black and White Selection see page 5 21 Use the procedure below to set the background density when sending scanned images 4 Ready to send Destination Place original Background Density Adj Background Lighter 08 08 2009 10 10 1 6 Press the Send key Place the originals on the platen Press Color Image Quality and then Background Density Adj Press On and press 1 to 5 Lighter Darker to adjust the background density Press OK Specify the destination and press the Start key to start sending 5 20 Sending Functions Color Grayscale Black and White Selection This feature allows you to select the color mode used for scanning when sending images You can select from Auto Color Gray Auto Color B amp W Full Color Grayscale or Black amp White Use the procedure below to select the color mode when sending scanned images 1 Press the Send key 2 Place the originals on the platen 3 Press Color Image Quality and then Color Selection Al Ready to send an 4 Select the color mode to be used for scanning Place original 1 5 Press OK Select scanning color Select Auto Color to automatically send color originals in full color and black amp white originals in black amp w
73. be obtained by setting the sharpness toward Unsharpen Patterns that are created by irregular distribution of halftone dots Follow the steps below to adjust sharpness Ready to copy Copies Place original Unsharpen Sharpen ae te d z 08 08 2009 10 10 6 Press Copy key Place the originals on the platen Press Image Quality and then Press Sharpness Press 3 to 3 Unsharpen Sharpen to adjust the sharpness Press OK Press the Start key Copying begins 4 30 Copying Functions Continuous Scan When a large number of originals cannot be placed in the document processor at one time the originals can be scanned in separate batches and then copied as one job With this function originals are scanned until you press Scan Finish Any of the following settings can be changed during scanning e Original size selection Zoom e Original orientation e Border erase e Image quality selection e Density e Type of original 2 sided book original e Color Selection If you use Job Build you can insert a blank paper during scanning or a blank page during duplex copying The procedure for making copies using Continuous Scan is explained below 1 Press the Copy key 2 Press Advanced Setup and then Continuous Scan Ready to copy Copies 3 If Continuous Scan is selected press On Continuous Scan If Job Build is selected press Job Build and select La peee de
74. copy paper as used in regular dry copiers and page printers such as laser printers It also supports a variety of other types of paper that conform to the specifications given in this appendix Be careful when choosing paper Paper unsuitable for the machine may cause jams or may be wrinkled Appendix 13 Appendix Supported Paper Use standard copy paper for regular copiers or laser printers The printing quality will be affected by the quality of paper Poor quality paper may result in unsatisfactory output Basic Paper Specifications The following table lists the specifications of paper that is supported with this machine Refer to the subsequent sections for further details Criteria Specifications Weight Cassettes 60 to 120 g m Multi purpose tray 45 to 200 g m Thickness 0 086 to 0 110 mm Dimensional accuracy 0 7 mm Squareness of corners 90 0 2 Moisture content 4 to 6 Grain direction Long grain paper supply direction Pulp content 80 or more NOTE Some recycled paper does not meet requirements for use with this machine as listed in the Basic Paper Specifications shown below such as moisture or pulp content For this reason we recommend purchasing a small amount of recycled paper as a sample for testing prior to use Choose recycled paper that gives the best printing results and contains low levels of paper dust We are not responsible for the problems o
75. dpi 200 x 400 dpi Resolution in FAX mode included File Format TIFF MMR JPEG compression JPEG XPS PDF MMR JPEG compression PDF high compression Scanning Speed 1 sided B W 50 Images min Color 15 Images min A4 Landscape 300dpi Image quality Text Photo original Interface Ethernet 10 BASE T 100 BASE TX Network Protocol TCP IP Transmission System SMB Scan to SMB FTP Scan to FTP FTP over SSL E mail transmission SMTP Scan to E mail TWAIN scan 2 WIA scan PC transmission 1 When using the document processor except TWAIN and WIA scanning 2 Available Operating System Windows 2000 Service Pack 2 or later Windows XP Windows Vista 3 Available Operating System Windows Vista Appendix 23 Appendix Document Processor option Item Description Original Feed Method Automatic feed Supported Original Types Sheet originals Paper Size Maximum Ledger A3 Minimum Statement R A5 R Paper Weight 45 to 160 g m Loading Capacity 75 sheets 50 to 80 g m maximum Mixed original sizes auto selection 30 sheets 50 to 80 g m maximum Dimensions W x D x H 22 x 19 3 16 x 5 3 16 559 x 487 x 131 mm Weight Approx 15 4 Ibs Approx 7 kg Paper Feeder option Item Description Paper Supply Method Friction Feed No Sheets 500 80 g m 2 cassettes Paper Size Ledger Legal Oficio Il 8 5x1
76. eee eee 2 18 Sending E mail is emetic tiriad dette Ma vee ead eee eee a a aA e AOE E a a ead adie 2 19 Loading Papon osaansa R ET IE E VEEE EIA nate aie be cue RRE EES 2 21 Loading OriginalS ose srodeteiscererre netris nennt eta daaa ia aada ede aaa 2 32 3 Basic Operation LOGINLOQOUL 4 tinct a a aaa a A E E ERE T EEES 3 2 Enter key and Quick No Search key 00 cece eet tenes 3 3 Touch Panel Display o cisco pce ve eaters ea Gare ee Meee eS eed oe pa ee et 3 4 Original PrevieW gv eva eke eee ee ede pe a eae eee ee ade ade eee ee 3 5 CODVING execs haere cae aaa nea eae he anes E Gracie easter earner te oa eat 3 6 Printing Printing from Applications 0 0 00 eae 3 19 SONGING so ein weap hea es Pang ante E ae coli aha tee aed gee le ee ee A 3 21 Confirmation Screen of Destinations 0 6 00 cece tee 3 27 Specifying Destination 2 0 0 0 00 ce tet 3 28 Using Document Box sisaret waded eeogee eee dad wee Ra A Ra tea A eee had dad 3 31 Basic Operation for Document Box 0 0c cette eee 3 33 Canceling Jobs 2441 miaa 40 set Yad ga ded sae aed eel eed Sade Eee ee ead eed 3 40 Quick Setup Screen 2 ee en en en tent e teen eens 3 41 Program Copying and Sending 0 00 c eee tet ee 3 44 Registering Shortcuts Copy Send and Document Box Settings 3 46 Using the Internet Browser 000 cece ee tenet tees 3 47 4 Copying Functions Original SIZE a ra i sia le die ce heehee ep
77. ete 5 24 Enter Document Name File Name 00 0 cece tees 5 25 Enter E mail Subject and Body 0 0 cette 5 26 WSD Scaler Mari mahana Yad eek ee eed dad ae EE a a aa eee de ee eae eee 5 27 Job Finish NOCO esiri toh eaters Bali Oe RETETE wee eee tes 5 29 Send and Print ea te aiias naiai cede aie seks ned a A teed eee eee eee aed eee 5 30 Send and Store iiia erae tenes 5 30 FILP Encrypted TA seriar tei eau ewe pee eee A a Sa ied eae id 5 31 Color TYDE rri Tp oa eiatadawekidy eigen ioe tease sane aae D dee wares hides 5 31 About Color Profiles 2 sec peags eee tee rhe rege riani ka eee are neice deed eetpeededs 5 32 Document Box iii Contents 10 11 Using a Custom BOX ksi 2iana esd laste ys idadee ye adda taeredd dans Gwec hades 6 2 Using a JOD BOX ie cits ea EAEE dated fa ate eee aed wa ace ae eee RE 6 12 Printing Documents Stored in Removable USB Memory 20000 00 eee ee eens 6 20 Saving Documents to USB Memory Scan to USB 0 0000 e eee eee 6 22 Status Job Cancel Checking Job Status 2 2246 eiaei od haa eaa pale ee ed Geka eee Mae pe Sele hale whee 7 2 Checking Job History 0 00 eee eee eee 7 9 Sending the Job Log History 0 0 c cette 7 11 Pause and Resumption of Jobs 00 ce tee ae 7 13 Canceling of JOBS kiesi de We ee be ee ae a ee hae ee ee be ee a da i 7 13 Priority Override for Waiting Jobs 00 ccc eee 7 14 Reordering Print JODS desires td
78. fF W N After Drum Refresh is completed press OK to return to the Adjustment Maintenance screen Auto Drum Refresh Auto Drum Refresh may be executed when the machine is turned on the power or recovered from the low power mode or sleep mode Auto Drum Refresh is executed automatically to keep the best image quality by monitoring its peripheral temperature and humidity 8 42 Default Setting System Menu Set the duration of time to execute Auto Drum Refresh The table below shows the available settings Item Description Off Do not perform Drum Refresh Standard Perform Auto Drum Refresh as Standard maximum 120 seconds Long Perform Auto Drum Refresh as Long maximum 160 seconds NOTE You can also execute Drum refresh as needed Refer to Drum Refresh on page 8 42 Use the procedure below to specify the setting for Auto Drum Refresh 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Adjustment Maintenance v and then Change of Auto Drum Refresh 3 Select Off Standard or Long 4 Press OK Correcting Fine Black Lines GE Correct fine black lines black streaks caused by contamination which may appear on the copies when the optional document processor used Paper feed direction lt The table below shows the available settings Description No correction performed Correction performed The reproduction of the image becomes lower when using Off Correctio
79. gpl html Open SSL License Copyright c 1998 2006 The OpenSSL Project All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit http www openssl org 4 The names OpenSSL Toolkit and OpenSSL Project must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without prior written permission For written permission please contact openssl core openssl org 5 Products derived from this software may not be called OpenSSL nor may OpenSSL appear in their names without prior written permission of the OpenSSL Project 6 Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit http Awww openssl org THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY TH
80. increments Metric size X Horizontal 148 432 mm in 1mm increments Y Vertical 98 297 mm in 1mm increments Media Type 8 7 k Selectable media types are as follows Plain 105g m or less Rough Transparency Vellum 64 g m or less Labels Recycled Preprinted Bond Cardstock Color Prepunched Letterhead Envelope Thick 106 g m and more High Quality and Custom 1 8 To change to a media type other than Plain refer to Paper Weight on page To print on preprinted or prepunched paper or on letterhead refer to Special Paper Action on page 8 10 NOTE If the optional FAX kit is installed and the multi purpose tray is used to print a received FAX the available media types are as shown below Plain Recycled Bond Color High Quality Rough and Custom 1 to 8 2 30 Preparation before Use ystem Menu Common Settings Multi Purpose Tray Setting ij Set the multi purpose tray paper size f Auto Ledger SS Letter Letter 0 Legal Standard M Statement Executive 8 5x13 5 Oficioll o Sizes 1 Standard Sizes 2 Others Size Entry 08 08 2009 10 10 Common Settings Paper Size i Set the multi purpose tray paper size Auto Standard X 5 83 17 00 Y 3 86 11 69 Sizes 1 Standard Sizes 2 Others 08 08 2009 10 10 Common Settings Media Type _ i Select type of paper in Multi Purpose Tray Trans
81. line Press OK Press Original Orientation to select orientation of the originals either Top Edge Top or Top Edge Left Press OK Press OK Press the Start key to start copying 4 26 Copying Functions Image Repeat Double Copy Tiles the 1 copied sheet with an original image You can also specify the area of the original to repeat Image Repeat Copies the original image multiple times onto 1 sheet at a specified magnification You can also specify how much of the original is repeatedly copied ik Original Double Copy Makes 2 copies of the same original on a single sheet For example you can double copy an A4 original onto oe gt an A3 sheet which you then cut in half to make 2 copies that are identical to the original Original Copy Follow the steps as below to use Image Repeat Double Copy 1 Press Copy key 2 Place the originals on the platen 3 Press Layout Edit and then press Image Repeat Ready to copy RE 4 Press Zoom Priority Image Repeat To make double copies press Double Copy and LI T a T proceed to step 8 siis CEID 5 Press or to set the zoom size rry Double 3 Copy Press Keys to enter with numeric keys 6 To setthe area of the original to be repeated press On for Specify Repeat Area Cancel 08 08 2009 10 10 4 27 Copying Functions Press
82. main charger pulled out about 2 5 cm remove the grid cleaner Then push the main charger back in fully applying pressure in the direction shown by the arrow so that the main charger is in its designated position 12 Install a new waste toner box 13 Remove the cleaning brush blue colored 14 Pull up and open left cover 1 9 10 Maintenance 15 Asshown in the figure clean dirt from the separator by moving the brush from side to side along the separator 16 As shown in the figure clean dirt from the transfer roller by moving the brush from side to side along the roller while rotating the roller by turning the gear at the left end of the roller 17 Put away the cleaning brush after the cleaning Close the left cover 1 by pressing specified part gi 18 Open the Multi Purpose tray 9 11 Maintenance 19 Remove the filter 20 Remove dust from the filter using a vacuum cleaner or dry cloth IMPORTANT Do not wash the filter with water Do not use the attached cleaning brush 21 Put the filters back in place and close the Multi Purpose Tray 22 Push the toner container stopper to the right and pull out the old toner container WARNING High voltage parts inside Handle with care because there is a danger of electric shock IMPORTANT Do not pull the toner container all the way out w
83. menivenicedsretayssnneeieiereetianeecieenen 10 15 10 1 Troubleshooting Solving Malfunctions The table below provides general guidelines for problem solving If a problem occurs with your machine look into the checkpoints and perform procedures indicated on the following pages If the problem persists contact your Service Representative Symptom The operation panel does not respond when the main power switch is turned on Checkpoints Is the machine plugged in Corrective Actions Plug the power cord into an AC outlet Reference Page Pressing the Start key does not produce copies Is there a message on the touch panel Determine appropriate response to the message and respond accordingly Is the machine in Sleep mode Press the Power key to recover the machine from Sleep mode The machine will be ready to copy within 15 seconds Blank sheets are ejected Are the originals loaded correctly When placing originals on the platen place them face down and align them with the original size indicator plates When placing originals in the optional document processor place them face up Printouts are too light Is the machine in Auto Density mode Set the correct density level for auto density Is the machine in Manual Density mode Use Image Quality to set the correct density level When changing the default density level adjust the density manua
84. optional built in finisher or document finisher is installed Stapling Limit Error Select what to do when stapling capacity is exceeded during printing rrr ee Ignore Printing continues without stapling Display Error Error message to cancel printing is displayed NOTE The messages are displayed when the optional built in finisher or document finisher is installed 8 12 Default Setting System Menu Paper Mismatch Error Select what to do when the selected paper size or type does not match paper size or type loaded in the specified paper source while printing from the computer by specifying the cassette or multi purpose tray Ignore The setting is ignored and the job is printed Display Error Error message to cancel printing is displayed Use the procedure below to specify the settings for error handling 1 Press the System Menu key Press Common Settings and then Next of Error Handling Press Change at the error you wish to change the handling Select the error handling method in the selection screen for each of the errors and then press OK ao A W N The previous screen appears To set the handling for a different error repeat steps 3 and 4 Paper Output gg Select output tray respectively for copy jobs print jobs from Custom Box computers and FAX RX data The options are as follows Top Tray Delivery on Top Tray of the machine Finisher Tray Delivery on Tray set t
85. or to input the area of the original to be repeated With metric models you can enter the border width directly using the numeric keys after pressing Keys Y1 Length from top left of platen to top edge of repeat area X1 Length from Height from top left of platen to left edge of repeat area Y2 Height of repeat area X2 Width of repeat area Press OK Press the Start key Copying begins 4 28 Copying Functions EcoPrint Use EcoPrint to save toner when printing Use this function for test copies or any other occasion where high quality print is unnecessary The procedure for making copies using EcoPrint is explained below 1 Press the Copy key Place the originals on the platen Press Image Quality and then EcoPrint 2 3 4 Press On 5 Ready to copy apis EcoPrint Press OK Conserve toner when printing Use EcoPrint for test copies and other situations where high quality copies are not necessary A a 1c Cancel a OK 08 08 2009 10 10 6 Press the Start key to start copying 4 29 Copying Functions Sharpness Adjust Adjust the sharpness of image outlines When copying penciled originals with rough or broken lines clear copies can be taken by adjusting sharpness toward Sharpen When copying images made up of patterned dots such as magazine photos in which moire patterns appear edge softening and weakening of the moire effect can
86. or incorrect compliance with the related points Symbols The A symbol indicates that the related section includes safety warnings Specific points of attention are indicated inside the symbol AN General warning A Warning of danger of electrical shock A Warning of high temperature The symbol indicates that the related section includes information on prohibited actions Specifics of the prohibited action are indicated inside the symbol S Warning of prohibited action Q Disassembly prohibited The symbol indicates that the related section includes information on actions which must be performed Specifics of the required action are indicated inside the symbol Q Alert of required action Z Remove the power plug from the outlet Always connect the machine to an outlet with a ground connection Please contact your service representative to order a replacement if the safety warnings in this Operation Guide are illegible or if the guide itself is missing fee required NOTE An original which resembles a bank note closely may not be copied properly in some rare cases because this machine is equipped with a counterfeiting prevention function Contents Contents Quick GUIdG 4 ete4 t cani pete hed neon od beige wee E aA A Aa bower deans vi Caution Warning Labels 000 ccc eens ix Installation Precautions sies d44 fees aed a Paved eed Pea Ye ad YE
87. or other trouble It is therefore recommended that you consult with your service representative in regard to cleaning of internal parts This is particularly effective if accomplished prior to seasons of high humidity Consult with your service representative in regard to the cost of cleaning the internal parts of the machine Aa AGA O Other precautions Do not place heavy objects on the machine or cause other damage to the machine Do not open the front cover turn off the main power switch or pull out the power plug during copying When lifting or moving the machine contact your service representative When moving the machine please turn the four adjusters of the paper feeding unit until they reach the floor in order to stabilize the machine Do not touch electrical parts such as connectors or printed circuit boards They could be damaged by static electricity Do not attempt to perform any operations not explained in this guide Caution Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure Do not look directly at the light from the scanning lamp as it may cause your eyes to feel tired or painful This machine comes equipped with an HDD hard disk drive Do not attempt to move the machine while the power is still on Since any resulting shock or vibration may cause damage to the hard disk be sure to turn off the power before attempting to move
88. overlaid onto the document from the displayed document boxes You can only select one image file 7 Press OK Press OK again to return to the Functions screen Press the Start key Printing begins 6 7 Document Box Editing Documents This function allows you to move or copy documents stored in custom boxes into other boxes or to join multiple documents together You can also copy documents to USB memory connected to this machine Moving a Document Copying a Document The procedure for moving or copying documents is explained below 1 Press the Document Box key 2 Press Custom Box select the box containing the document you want to move or copy and press Open NOTE If a custom box is protected by a password enter the correct password 3 Select the document in the list that you want to Ca move or copy by pressing the checkbox 5j 0404200710574501 10 10 2008 09 40 21 MB Search Name The document is marked with a checkmark amp 0404200710574511 10 10 2008 09 50 21 MB 0404200710574521 10 10 2008 10 00 21 MB l NOTE To deselect press the checkbox again and paa remove the checkmark Preview vV Join CERT Fe File 4 Press Move Copy d Close 08 08 2009 10 10 5 To move the document press Move to Custom Custom Box Box Move Copy Li Select the required operation and press Next To copy the document press Copy to Custom Box or Co
89. page 11 2 vy Add a user page 11 5 vy Log out page 11 4 vy The registered user logs in for operations page 11 3 Enabling Disabling User Login Administration This enables user login administration Select one of the following authentication methods Item Description Local Authentication User authentication based on user properties on the local user list stored in the machine Network Authentication User authentication based on Authentication Server Use a user property stored in Authentication Server to access the network authentication login page Use the procedure below to enable user login administration 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press User Login Job Accounting 3 If user login administration is disabled the user authentication screen appears Enter your login user name and password and then press Login For this you need to login with administrator privileges Refer to Adding a User on page 11 5 for the default login user name and password 4 Press Next of User Login Setting and then Change of User Login 11 2 Management 5 Select Local Authentication or Network User Login Job Accounting User Login User login administration Authentication Select Off to disable user login Select authentication method administration Host Name Local Authentication r Domain Name If you select Network Authentication enter the host name 62 characte
90. paper jam occurs the machine will stop and the location of the jam will be indicated on the touch panel Leave the machine on and follow the instruction to remove the jammed paper Print overrun Warning Low printer memory The job was paused Press Continue to re start the job Removable memory This job is canceled Press End error Removable memory This job is canceled Press End is full Replace all originals Remove originals from the document and press Continue processor put them back in their original order and place them again Press Continue to resume printing Press Cancel to cancel the job Replace the waste The waste toner box is full Replace toner box the waste toner box Remove all originals Are there any originals left in Remove originals from the document in the document the document processor processor processor Scanner memory is Scanning cannot be performed due full to insufficient memory of scanner Only one copy of the scanned pages is available Press Continue to print send or store the scanned pages Press Cancel to cancel the printing job 10 9 Troubleshooting Error Message Send error Checkpoints Corrective Actions An error has occurred during transmission Refer to Responding to Send Errorfor the error code and corrective actions Reference Page Set the waste toner box The waste toner box is not instal
91. previous screen reappears To change the duplex printing settings for Custom 1 8 press Next of Custom 1 8 and then Change of Duplex Select Prohibit or Permit and press OK The previous screen reappears Press Close To change the name for Custom 1 8 press Next of Custom 1 8 and then Change of Name Enter the name and press OK NOTE Refer to the Character Entry Method on page Appendix 10 for details on entering characters 8 8 Default Setting System Menu Default Paper Source Select the default paper source from Cassette 1 4 and Multi Purpose Tray NOTE Cassette 3 and Cassette 4 are displayed when the optional paper feeder is installed Use the procedure below to select the default paper source Press the System Menu key Press Common Settings Next of Original Paper Settings and then Change of Default Paper Source 1 2 3 Select a paper cassette for the default setting 4 Press OK 5 Move to the copy or document box screen and press the Reset key Automatic Detection of Originals Available for metric models only Automatically detect originals of special or non standard size The table below lists the special or non standard original sizes Item Description A6 Hagaki As A6 and Hagaki are similar in size select either one of them for automatic detection Folio Select Folio for automatic detection 11x15 Select the 11x15 size for autom
92. screen for tasks such as printing and sending documents For more information on using the document list refer to Document List on page 3 35 pais i ae NOTE If a custom box is protected by a password 08 08 2009 10 10 enter the correct password 3 33 Basic Operation Custom Box List The box list shows the registered custom boxes The custom boxes can be listed by box number or by box name You can manipulate the list in a range of ways as shown below Listing the boxes by number in ascending Listing the boxes by name in descending order alphabetical order gt AR Search Name Erco Registers new boxes and Register eat checks modifies or Box deletes box information 0001 0001 Box 10 Al 0002 eee OOO Box 2User 20 0003 eee OOO Box 30 Opens the selected box pe File EA a Detail a Open Custom Box Ovable Memory a Displays the details for Saves the document in the the selected box selected box 3 34 Basic Operation Document List The document list is a list of the documents stored in the custom box Documents can be listed either by name or as thumbnails The list can be used as shown below List Listing the documents by name Listing the documents by time of update in Listing the documents by size in in alphabetical order ascending descending order ascending descending order Selecting more than one document
93. section explains the paper sizes and types that can be used in the paper source Cassettes and the optional paper feeder Supported types Plain paper 60 to 120 g m Recycled paper 60 to 120 g m Supported paper sizes Ledger Legal Letter Letter R Statement A3 B4 A4 A4 R B5 B5 R A5 R Oficio Il 8 5 x 13 5 No of sheets 500 80 g m Multi Purpose tray MP tray Supported types Folio 8K 16K 16K R Supported paper sizes No of sheets Plain paper 45 to 200 g m Recycled paper 45 to 200 g m Colored paper 45 to 200 g m Ledger Legal Letter Letter R Executive R Statement A3 B4 A4 A4 R B5 B5 R A5 R B6 R A6 R Oficio Il 8 5 x 13 5 8K Folio 16K 16K R Other sizes Portrait 3 7 8 to 11 5 8 or 98 to 297 mm Landscape 5 7 8 to 17 or 148 to 432 mm 200 80 g m 130 120 g m 100 160 g m 50 200 g m Postcards Oufuku Hagaki return postcard Postcards 100 x 148 mm Return postcard 148 x 200 mm 80 Envelopes Envelope DL Envelope C5 Envelope C4 Envelope 10 Commercial 10 Envelope 9 Commercial 9 Envelope 6 Commercial 6 3 4 Monarch ISO B5 Youkei 2 Youkei 4 Other sizes Portrait 3 7 8 to 11 5 8 or 98 to 297 mm Landscape 5 7 8 to 17 or 148 to 432 mm 20 Transparency OHP film Basic Paper Specifications Letter Letter R A4 A4 R 25 This machine is designed to print on standard
94. selected either as face up print facing up or face down print facing down NOTE To change default destination for copies refer to Paper Output on page 8 13 for details Use the procedure below to select the output destination 1 Press the Copy key 2 Place the originals on the platen 3 Press Org Paper Finishing and then Paper Output Ready to copy TE 4 Select the output destination for finished copies Paper Output When you select Finisher Tray select the orientation of output copy Face Up print facing up or Face Down print facing down Place original 5 Press OK 08 08 2009 10 10 6 Press the Start key to start copying Copying Functions Combine Mode This mode allows you to copy 2 or 4 originals combined onto a single page 2 in 1 mode or 4 in 1 mode The page boundary of each original can be indicated NOTE Combine mode is available for the copy paper sizes of A3 B4 Folio A4 A4 R B5 B5 R A5 R Ledger Legal Oficio Il 8 5x13 5 Letter Letter R Statement R 8K 16K and 16K R 2 in 1 Mode 4 For copying two originals onto a single sheet This mode can be used with Duplex mode to copy four originals onto one sheet The following 2 in 1 options and output orientations are available Original Orientation of Original Platen Document processor 1
95. settings 1 3 4 Press the System Menu key Press Common Settings v Next of Function Defaults Press v twice and Change of JPEG TIFF Print Select the default for Fit to Paper Size Image Resolution or Fit to Print Resolution Press OK XPS Fit to Page Reduces or enlarges the image size to fit to the selected paper size when printing XPS file Use the procedure below to set the default XPS Fit to Page settings 1 2 Press the System Menu key Press Common Settings v Next of Function Defaults Press v twice and Change of XPS Fit to Page Select Off or On for the default Press OK 8 24 Default Setting System Menu Copy Settings The following settings are available for copying functions Paper Selection 8 25 Auto Paper Selection 8 25 Auto Priority 8 26 Reserve Next Priority 8 26 Preset Limit 8 27 Quick Setup Registration 8 27 NOTE If user login administration is enabled you can only change the settings by logging in with administrator privileges Paper Selection Set the default paper selection The table below shows the available settings Item Description Auto Automatically select the cassette containing paper in the same size as originals Default Paper Source Select paper source set by Default Paper Source refer to page 8 9 Use the procedure below to set the default paper selection 1 ao fF W
96. that can be used are allocated automatically the IPv6 node management workload is reduced in systems where the administrator has to exercise close control over IP address allocation dpi dots per inch A unit for resolution representing the number of dots printed per inch 25 4 mm EcoPrint Mode A printing mode that helps save toner Copies made in this mode are thus lighter than normal Emulation The function to interpret and execute other printers page description languages The machine emulates operation of PCL6 KPDL and KPDL automatic FTP File Transfer Protocol A protocol to transfer files on the TCP IP network whether the Internet or an intranet Along with HTTP and SMTP POP FTP is now frequently used on the Internet Grayscale A computer color expression Displayed images of this sort are typically composed of shades of gray varying from black at the weakest intensity to white at the strongest without any other colors Gray levels are displayed in numerical levels that is white and black only for 1 bit 256 gray levels including white and black for 8 bits and 65 536 gray levels for 16 bits Help A Help key is provided on this machine s operation panel If you are unsure of how to operate the machine would like more information on its functions or are having problems getting the machine to work properly press the Help key to view a detailed explanation on the touch panel IP Address An Internet protocol
97. the Repeat Copy job is set to 0 Refer to page 4 36 for Repeat Copy Use the procedure below to set the default Repeat Copy setting 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Common Settings vv and Next of Function Defaults Press v twice and Change of Repeat Copy 3 Select the default for Off or On 4 Press OK GE Collate Offset Set the defaults for Collate Offset The table below shows the available settings Item Description Collate Collate not performed On Collate performed Offset Off Offset not performed Each Set Offset performed If Off is selected of Collate it is Each Page performed Each Page NOTE Refer to page 3 13 for Collate Offset Use the procedure below to set the default Collate Offset settings 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Common Settings v Next of Function Defaults Press twice and Change of Collate Offset 3 Select the defaults for Collate and Offset respectively 4 Press OK 8 23 Default Setting System Menu JPEG TIFF Print Select the image size resolution when printing JPEG or TIFF file The table below shows the available settings Item Description Fit to Paper Size Fit the image size to the selected paper size Image Resolution Print at resolution of the actual image Fit to Print Resolution Fit the image size to the print resolution Use the procedure below to set the default JPEG TIFF Print
98. the address using the keyboard screen Add to Addr Book Next Dest Cancel tel OK 08 08 2009 10 10 Enter destination E mail address and press OK 4 Press Next Dest and repeat steps 3 to specify the destination Up to 100 E mail addresses can be specified NOTE When Add to Addr Book is displayed the destinations are registered in the Address Book 5 Press OK The destinations are registered in the destination list 3 22 Basic Operation a Ready to send sateen 6 Check the destination list Place original Select a destination and press Detail Edit to check and edit it Select a destination and press Delete to remove the destination from the list eee NOTE When selecting On for Entry Check for New Co cm ml Co a 7 Destination page 8 30 the confirmation screen ic appears Enter the same destination again and press OK When selecting On for Destination Check before Send page 8 29 the confirmation screen appears after pressing the Start key For details refer to Confirmation Screen of Destinations on page 3 27 Send to Folder SMB Send to Folder FTP Stores a scanned original image file in the specified shared folder of any PC Stores a scanned original image in a folder of an FTP server NOTE e Refer to Help of your operating system for details on how to share a folder e Be sure that SMB Protocol or FTP in the Embedded Web Server
99. the confirmation screen appears press Yes IMPORTANT If you change the date time while using an application you will no longer be able to use the application Launching Applications You can launch any application for which Activate is set Use the procedure below to launch an application 1 Press the Application key A list of available applications appears on the touch panel 2 Press the key for the application to be launched The application starts up 3 To exit the application press X When the application exit confirmation screen appears press Yes NOTE The procedure for exiting some applications may differ 8 61 Default Setting System Menu Deleting Applications Use the procedure below to delete an installed application IMPORTANT Always exit the application to be deleted before deleting the application Refer to Activating Deactivating Application on page 8 61 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press vw and then Application NOTE If login administration is disabled the user authentication screen appears Enter your login user name and password and then press Login For this you need to login with administrator privileges Refer to Adding a User on page 11 5 for the default login user name and password 3 Select the application to be deleted and press Delete You can view detailed information on the selected application by pressing Detail 4 When the deletion confirmati
100. the machine In the event there is a problem with the machine s HDD hard disk drive stored data may be erased It is recommended that important data be backed up on a PC or other media Be also sure to store originals of important documents separately xiij Cautions when handling consumables A CAUTION Do not attempt to incinerate the toner container or the waste toner box Dangerous sparks may cause S burns Keep the toner container and the waste toner box out of the reach of children S If toner happens to spill from the toner container or the waste toner box avoid inhalation and ingestion S as well as contact with your eyes and skin e Ifyou do happen to inhale toner move to a place with fresh air and gargle thoroughly with a large amount of water If coughing develops contact a physician e If you do happen to ingest toner rinse your mouth with water and drink 1 or 2 cups of water to dilute the contents of your stomach If necessary contact a physician e If you do happen to get toner in your eyes flush them thoroughly with water If there is any remaining tenderness contact a physician e If toner does happen to get on your skin wash with soap and water Do not attempt to force open or destroy the toner container or the waste toner box S If the optional Fax kit is installed and the main power switch is off transmitting receiving Fax is disabled Do not turn off the main power switch but press the Power k
101. the main power switch on NOTE If the optional Data Security Kit is installed a message might display indicating the security function is being activated and time may be taken to start up when the power is turned on IMPORTANT When turning off the main power switch do not turn on the main power switch again immediately Wait more than 5 seconds and then turn on the main power switch 2 7 Preparation before Use Power Off Before turning off the main power switch press the Power key on the operation panel to off Make sure that the Power key and the memory indicator are off before turning off the main power switch CAUTION The hard disk may be operating when the Power key or Memory indicator is lit or blinking Turning off the main power switch while the hard disk is operating may cause damage Make sure that the indicators are off In case of not using the machine for an extended period of time CAUTION If this machine will be left unused for an extended period e g overnight turn it off at the main power switch If the machine will not be used for an even longer period of time e g vacation A remove the power plug from the outlet as a safety precaution If the optional Fax kit is installed note that turning the machine off at the main power switch disables fax transmission and reception CAUTION Remove paper from the cassettes and seal it in the paper storage bag to pro
102. the paper does not fall out of the tray Adding Staples 1 Pull to open the stapler front cover 2 Pull out the staple holder Appendix 5 Appendix 3 Remove the empty staple case from the staple holder 4 Holding the staple holder in your left hand and a new staple case in your right hand insert the staple case into the staple holder in the direction of the arrow 5 Insert the staple case fully as far as it will go Pull to remove the paper tape wound on the staple case 6 Insert the staple holder into the slot of the staple unit again When fully inserted the staple holder locks with a clicking sound Appendix 6 Appendix Clearing Staple Jams 1 Pull out the staple holder referring to steps 1 and 2 of Adding Staples 2 Holding the knob A on the face plate of the staple holder lift the face plate 3 Clear the staple jammed in the cartridge end staple loaded side 4 Lower the face plate of the staple holder 5 Insert the face plate back in place When fully inserted the face plate locks with a clicking sound 6 After lifting the staple unit slightly lower it and insert it again into its place 7 Close the stapler front cover Appendix 7 Appendix Job Separator Separate paper according to output tray for easier sorting Specify as the output tray for copy or print jobs Or specify as the def
103. to Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Multi Purpose Tray on page 2 30 Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Cassettes To fix the type of paper to be used in cassettes 1 or 2 or the optional paper feeder cassettes 3 and 4 specify the paper size Also you use a media type other than plain paper specify the media type setting Selection ltem Selectable Size Type Paper size is automatically detected and selected Select whether the paper is in Metric size or in Inch size Standard Select from the standard sizes Selectable paper Sizes 1 sizes are as follows Inch size Ledger Letter R Letter Legal Statement R 8 5x13 5 and Oficio II Metric size A3 B4 A4 A4 R B5 B5 R A5 R and Folio Standard Select from the standard sizes not included in Sizes 2 Standard Sizes 1 Selectable paper sizes are as follows Inch size A3 B4 A4 A4 R B5 B5 R A5 R Folio 8K 16K R and 16K Metric size Ledger Letter R Letter Legal Statement R 8 5x13 5 Oficio Il 8K 16K R and 16K Media Type Plain 105 g m or less Rough Vellum 64 g m or less Recycled Preprinted Bond Color Prepunched Letterhead Thick 106 g m and more High Quality and Custom 1 8 To change to a media type other than Plain refer to Paper Weight on page 8 7 When the paper weight settings shown below are selected the media indicated for each setting cannot be selected e Custom 1 to 8 Heavy 3 o
104. you assign displayName in Name 7 and department in Name 2 and if the value of displayName is Mike Smith and the value of department is Sales in Active Directory of Windows the user name appears as Mike Smith Sales 4 If using Active Directory of Windows mail of Attribute may be used as E mail Address 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press User Login Job Accounting 3 If user login administration is disabled the user authentication screen appears Enter your login user name and password and then press Login For this you need to login with administrator 11 12 Management User Login Job Accounting Network User Property ij Get the network user information Pd a LDAP Server Information Server Name 192 181 11 11 Acquisition of User Information Name 1 displayName Name 2 E mail Address 30 sec Search Timeout Off LDAP Security 08 08 2009 10 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 privileges Refer to Adding a User on page 11 5 for the default login user name and password Press Next of User Login Setting Change of Obtain NW User Property Press On Press Server Name Enter the LDAP server name or the IP address and press OK Press keys to enter the LDAP port number using the numeric keys Press Name 1 Enter the LDAP Attribute to obtain the user name to be displayed and press OK Follow steps 9 and 10 above to set Name 2 Pres
105. 0 Subnet Mask Appendix 30 Supplies Checking the Remaining Amount 7 15 Switching the Language 2 11 8 2 Switching Unit of Measurement 8 11 Symbols i System Initialization 8 63 System Menu 8 1 T TCP IP Appendix 30 TCP IP IPv4 Setup 2 14 TCP IP IPv6 Appendix 28 Setup 8 64 Toner Container Checking the Remaining Amount of Toner 7 15 Replacement 9 7 Trade Names xxi Transfer Roller Cleaning 9 5 TWAIN Appendix 30 U USB Appendix 30 USB Cable Connecting 2 6 USB Interface 1 6 2 4 USB Memory Index 7 Index Printing Documents 6 20 Removing 6 21 Saving Documents 6 22 User Login Administration 11 2 Adding 11 5 Changing Properties 11 7 Enabling Disabling 11 2 Group Authorization Settings 11 10 Login 11 3 Logout 11 4 Unknown login user name Job 11 9 W Waste Toner Box 1 5 Replacement 9 7 Status 7 15 WIA Appendix 31 WSD Print Setup 8 68 WSD Scan 5 27 Setup 8 68 X XPS File formats 5 12 8 17 Printing documents stored in Removable USB Memory 6 20 Saving documents to Removable USB Memory 6 22 Z Zoom Copying Auto Zoom 3 9 Manual Zoom 3 9 Preset Zoom 3 9 XY Zoom 3 10 Zoom Mode Copy 5 5 Send 5 5 Index 8 DIRECTIVE 2002 96 CE ON THE TREATMENT COLLECTION RECYCLING AND DISPOSAL OF ELECTRIC AND ELECTRONIC DEVICES AND THEIR COMPONENTS INFORMATION 1 FOR COUNTRIES IN THE EUROPEAN UNION EU The disposal of electric and electronic devices as solid urban waste is stric
106. 1 2 Press the System Menu key Press Common Settings Next of Original Paper Settings v and then Change of Special Paper Action Select Adjust Print Direction or Speed Priority Press OK Switching Unit of Measurement Select inch or metric for the unit for paper dimensions Use the procedure below to change the input units 1 2 3 4 Press the System Menu key Press Common Settings and then Change of Measurement Select mm for metric or inch for inch Press OK 8 11 Default Setting System Menu Error Handling Select whether to cancel or continue the job when error has occurred The possible errors and what to do for the errors are as follows Duplexing Error Select what to do when duplex printing is not possible for the selected paper size and media type C e a S 1 sided Printed in 1 sided Display Error Error message to cancel printing is displayed Finishing Error Select alternative actions when finishing stapling or offsetting is not available for the selected paper size or media type Ignore The setting is ignored and the job is printed Display Error Error message to cancel printing is displayed No Staple Error Select what to do when staples run out during printing C w o ae Ignore Printing continues without stapling Display Error Error message to cancel printing is displayed NOTE The messages are displayed when the
107. 1 21 Management User Login Job Accounting Copy Restriction Total i Set the default limit value for restricting use of the functions for each account by counter 1 9999999 9999999 08 08 2009 10 10 Press Next of Job Accounting Setting Next of Default Setting and then Next of Default Counter Limit Press Change for the item you want to modify and then press or or use the numeric keys to enter the default restriction on the number of sheets Press OK To set another default restriction repeat steps 5 to 6 11 22 Management Counting the Number of Pages Printed This counts the number of pages printed Counts are classified into Total Job Accounting and Each Job Accounting A new count can also be started after resetting the count data which was stored for a certain period of time Types of the counts are as follows ltem Detail Printed Pages Displays the number of pages copied and printed and the total number of pages used You can also use Count by Paper Size and Count by Duplex Combine to check the number of pages used e For copying you can check the pages used for black and white copying For printing you can check the pages used for black and white printing e You can use Count by Paper Size to check the number of pages used in the paper size set in Counting by Paper Size on page 11 25 as well as the number of pages used in other paper sizes e Yo
108. 1 and 2 Inch models Horizontal 5 83 to 17 in 0 01 increments Vertical 3 86 to 11 69 in 0 01 increments Metric models Vertical 98 to 297 mm in 1 mm increments Horizontal 148 to 432 mm in 1 mm increments Plain 105 g m or less Transparency Rough Vellum 64 g m or less Labels Recycled Preprinted Bond Cardstock Color Prepunched Letterhead Thick 106 g m or more Envelope High Quality Custom 1 to 8 For instructions on how to specify the custom paper sizes Custom 1 to 4 refer to Adding a Custom Size and Media Type for Paper to Print on page 8 4 The input units can be changed in the System menu Refer to Switching Unit of Measurement on page 8 11 For instructions on how to specify the custom paper types 1 to 8 refer to Paper Weight on page 8 7 To print on preprinted or prepunched paper or on letterhead refer to Special Paper Action on page 8 10 NOTE You can conveniently select in advance the size and type of paper that will be used often and set them as default refer to Paper Size and Media Type Setup for Multi Purpose Tray on page 8 6 Copying Functions Use the procedure below to select the paper size and media type Ready to copy Paper Selection MP Tray Setting f Standard Sizes 1 e Df Statement Standard Sizes 2 8 5x13 5 f Oficioll Others Size Entry Copies Plain Media Type Ready to copy
109. 10 Zoom out Zoom in 3 When you have finished previewing documents or checking document details press Close 3 37 Basic Operation User Privileges When user login administration is enabled accessibility to the Document Box components will vary depending on the given user privilege Accessibilities vary depending on user privilege as follows Accessibility Operation Access level Creating a box Administrator Changing box owner Deleting a box Others Owner Box information Changing box number Others Owner Renaming a box Others Owner Changing the password to a box Others Owner Overwriting the password to a box Others Owner Adjusting the box capacity Others Owner Changing the owner Others Owner Changing the permission Changing the period of using a box Restricting the Accessibility to a Box The accessibility to a Custom Box differs depending on the level of privileges as follows Others Owner Others Owner Administrator An administrator can gain access and manipulate all boxes User A user can gain access and manipulate his her own boxes and the shared boxes 3 38 Basic Operation Password Entry Requirement When user login administration is enabled requirement of a password differs depending on the level of privileges as follows Administrat
110. 10 10 2008 09 45 10 10 2008 09 50 10 10 2008 09 55 10 10 2008 10 00 08 08 2009 10 10 6 Specify the number of prints as desired 7 Press Start Print to start printing 6 14 Document Box Deleting a Document You can delete documents stored in the Quick Copy Proof and Hold box Use the procedure below to delete a document 1 Press the Document Box key 2 Press Job Box Quick Copy Proof and Hold then Open 3 Select the creator of the document and press Open Quick Copy Proof and Hold ser Name Eile 08 08 2009 10 10 4 Select the document to delete and press Delete The delete confirmation screen appears LJ B 2File 10 10 2008 09 45 30 MB CJ 3File 10 10 2008 09 50 36 MB 5 B 4File 10 10 2008 09 55 21 MB LJ 5File 10 10 2008 10 00 30 MB 08 08 2009 10 10 ol Press Yes The document is deleted Repeat Copy Box Setting the Number of Stored Jobs To maintain free space on the hard disk you can set the maximum number of stored jobs Use the procedure below to specify the maximum number of stored jobs 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Document Box Removable Memory Next of Job Box Change of Repeat Copy Job Retention Document Box Document Box Removable Memory Repeat Copy Job Retention 3 Use th e and ke ys or th e n u m e ric keys to Set the maximum number of repeat copy jobs to retain e nter th e maximum num b
111. 2 22 Preparation before Use NOTE Paper sizes are indicated on the cassettes To change between inch size and metric size A B sizes follow the steps below to adjust the size switch 2 1 Holding the paper width adjusting tab move the paper width guide to a position other than that of the paper 2 Turn the size switch A 90 0 3 Move the size lever B up C or down I C metric size centimeters A B sizes l inch size 4 Turn the size switch 90 o lock it 6 4 Align the paper flush against the left side of the cassette IMPORTANT e Before loading the paper be sure that it is not curled or folded Paper that is curled or folded may cause paper jams e Ensure that the loaded paper does not exceed the level indicator see illustration below e When loading the paper keep the side that was closest the package seal facing up The paper length and width guides must be adjusted to the paper size Loading the paper without adjusting these guides may cause skewed feeding and paper jams e Be sure that the paper length and width guides rest securely against the paper If there is a gap readjust the guides to fit the paper 2 23 Preparation before Use 5 Insert the appropriate paper size card in the slot to indicate the size of the paper inside 6 Gently push the cassette back in NOTE If the machine will not be used for a prolonged period pro
112. 3 5 Letter Letter R Statement R A3 B4 A4 A4 R B5 B5 R A5 R Folio 8K 16K 16K R Supported Paper Dimensions W x D x H Paper weight 60 120 g m Media types standard recycled color 22 7 16 x 24 3 8 x 12 3 16 570 x 619 x 309 mm Weight Approx 55 Ibs Approx 25 kg Appendix 24 Appendix Document Finisher option Item Description Number of Trays 1 tray Paper Size Non stapling Ledger Legal Oficio Il 8 5x13 5 A3 B4 8K 500 sheets Letter Letter R A4 A4 R B5 B5 R 16K 16K R 1 000 sheets Supported Paper Weight Stapling 90 g m or less Maximum Sheets for Stapling Ledger Legal Oficio Il 8 5x13 5 A3 B4 8K 25 sheets Letter Letter R A4 A4 R 16K 50 sheets Paper weight 90 g m or less Dimensions W x D x H 25 x 20 63 64 x 40 5 16 634 9 x 533 x 1013 5 mm Weight Approx 58 42 lbs Approx 26 5 kg Job Separator option Item Description Number of Trays 1 tray Maximum Sheets 100 sheets 80 g m Paper Size Ledger Legal Oficio Il 8 5x13 5 Letter Letter R Executive R Statement R 8K 16K 16K R A3 B4 A4 A4 R B5 B5 R A5 R Folio Paper Type Paper weight 45 90 g m Paper type plain recycled color thin Dimensions W x D x H 21 716 x 17 44 46 2 3 4 545 x 450 x 70 mm 3 3 Ibs or less 1 5 kg or less Appendix 25 Appendix
113. 6 Sending Functions WSD Scan WSD Scan saves images of originals scanned on this machine as files on a WSD compatible computer NOTE To use WSD Scan confirm that the computer used for WSD scanning and the machine is network connected and WSD Scan Setup page 8 68 is set to On in the network settings For information on operating the computer refer to the computer s help or the operation guide of your software Installing Driver Software for Windows Vista Procedure Using this machine 1 2 Click Start and then Network in the computer Right click the machine s icon and then click Install 5 NOTE If the User Account Control window appears click Continue If the Found New Hardware window appears click Cancel 3 During the installation double click the icon shown on the task bar to display the Driver Software Installation screen When Your devices are ready to use is displayed on the Driver Software Installation screen the installation is completed Press the Send Key Displays the screen for sending NOTE Depending on the settings the address book screen may appear In this event press Cancel to display the screen for sending 2 Place the originals in the document processor or on the platen Press WSD Scan Press From Operation Panel and press Next 5 27 Sending Functions 5 Select the destination computer and press OK WSD Scan Selecting Com
114. 6 box information the box name the box password the x Name ange sage Restriction i i h fil i n n h V rwri e Chang Usage Restrict a the auto file deletion and the overwrite Box Password Change Permission Change eeeeeeed gt Private gt Auto File Deletion Change Overwiite Setting Change 30 day s gt Permit gt Free Space Delete after Printed Change 30 GB Off 2 Cc 08 08 2009 10 10 NOTE Itis assumed that a custom Document Box has already been created and registered For information on creating registering Document Boxes refer to Creating a New Custom Box on page 6 2 3 39 Basic Operation Canceling Jobs Follow the steps below to cancel any print or send job being executed Canceling Jobs You can also cancel jobs by pressing the Stop key Printing jobs 1 Press the Stop key Cancelling job screen appears The current print job is temporarily interrupted 2 Select the job you wish to cancel and press Cancel And then press Yes in the confirmation screen Sending jobs 1 Press the Stop key Job Cancel appears NOTE Pressing the Stop key will not temporarily stop a job that you have already started sending 2 To cancel printing select Cancel and then press Yes in the confirmation screen Copying NOTE Ean arene snes If Reserve Next Priority refer to page 8 26 is set to canner Setting rinter ng Scanned Pages Copies Off 2 L 2 24
115. 8095050 InProcess 000002 10 10 09 55 doci0102008095510 Waiting 000003 10 10 10 00 doc10102008091000 Waiting Pause All Vance Priority Move Up Detail Print Jobs Override A Printing Jobs end bs Storing Jobs Device Pa pplies 2s ae een ee 08 08 2009 10 10 3 When resuming the printing of jobs that have been paused press Resume All Print Jobs Canceling of Jobs For more information on canceling jobs refer to the Canceling Jobs on page 3 40 7 13 Status Job Cancel Priority Override for Waiting Jobs Priority Override function suspends the current job and prints the job in waiting first The procedure for using Priority Override is explained below 1 Press the Status Job Cancel key 2 Press Printing Jobs 3 Select the job to be given priority and press E Log l Priority Override Job Type All y JobNo End Date Type Job Name Result 000001 10 10 09 50 doci0102008095050 InProcess 000002 10 10 09 55 doc10102008095510 Waiting 000003 10 10 10 00 docl0102008091000 Waiting Pause All Cancel Move Up Detail Print Jobs Rees Printing Jobs end bs Storing Jobs Device P ies J 08 08 2009 10 10 4 Press Yes in the confirmation screen The current job in printing is suspended and the job for override printing starts 5 When the Priority Override is completed the printing job that has been suspended will be resumed Reord
116. Destination 4 Press Standard Sizes 1 Standard Sizes 2 S Ready to send e 1 Others or Size Entry to select original size Original Size Standard Auto Ledger O Letter a Sizes 1 a r Letter Legal Af Statement Standard Sizes 2 i Statement Af 11x15 8 5x13 5 a Others OficioII a Size Entry Original Zoom Send 08 08 2009 10 10 a Ready to send Destination When you have selected Size Entry press or Place original 1 to set the sizes of X horizontal and Y vertical 5 Ee n By pressing Keys you can use the numeric Standard 2 00 2200 t Sizes 1 17 keys Place original Standard pen 5 Press OK Others Z keys L 2 00 11 69 Original i Zoom Send 08 08 2009 10 10 6 Specify the destination and press the Start key to start sending Sending Size Selection Select the sending size the size of image to be sent The table below lists the sizes Detail Standard Select from Same Inch models Same as Original Size Ledger Sizes 1 as Original Size or Legal Letter Statement 8 5x13 5 Oficio Il Standard Size 11x15 Metric models Same as Original Size A3 B4 A4 B5 A5 B6 A6 Folio Standard Select from Inch models A3 B4 A4 B5 A5 B6 A6 Folio Sizes 2 standard size 8K 16K t Standard OM Metric models Ledger Legal Letter Statement Sizes 1
117. Document Processor 10 25 Duplex Unit 10 21 Duplex Unit and Cassette 1 10 22 Inside the Left Covers 1 2 and 3 10 20 Jam Location Indicators 10 15 Multi Purpose Tray 10 19 Precaution 10 16 Paper Length Guide 2 22 Paper Selection 4 4 Cassette 4 4 Multi Purpose Tray 4 5 Paper Width Guides 2 22 Part Names 1 1 Platen 1 4 Placing Originals 2 32 POP3 Appendix 29 POP3 E mail RX Protocol Detail 8 66 PostScript Appendix 29 Power Cable Connecting 2 6 Power Off 2 8 Power On 2 7 Power Supply xi PPM Appendix 29 Precautions for Use xii Preparation 2 1 Preparing Cables 2 4 Print Job Reordering 3 41 Printed Document Guard Kit Appendix 9 Printer Setup 8 33 Printer Driver Appendix 29 Printer Settings 8 33 Copies 8 35 CR Action 8 37 Duplex 8 35 EcoPrint 8 34 Emulation 8 33 Form Feed Timeout 8 36 LF Action 8 36 Orientation 8 35 Override A4 Letter 8 34 Paper Feed Mode 8 37 Printing 3 19 Printing from Applications 3 19 Printing Reports Sending Notice 8 38 Font List 8 38 Network Status Page 8 39 Service Status Page 8 39 Status Page 8 38 Transmission Result Reports 8 39 Priority Override 4 35 7 14 Product Library 2 2 Programmed Copying 3 44 Editing and Deleting 3 45 Recalling 3 44 Registering 3 44 Q Quick No Search key 3 3 Quick Setup Screen 3 41 Changing Registration 3 42 8 27 8 28 8 31 R RA Stateless Appendix 29 Raw Port Protocol Detail 8 67 Receive Indicator 1 4 Repeat Copy 4 36 Maximum
118. E CGT AOU dassies ein nae ieies 5 11 SFr Filial ae E 5 12 s File SeparallOMissiesineisn insine nne ap iaaa 5 13 PDF BCH ONION PUNCHONS tg ccteosticc un cbseriasticatiaiicuincctesigenteininassulnneis 5 14 Ee QUAY irsini eie iniii een 5 16 PVCU SEG SMS iY sinire E 5 17 e Scan SSO MON oh ccreciinecsanasicaceanciensacaniennsixtrunigawieensnaninensiaanivenioratiaiautas 5 18 SIRS SS a EE E E E E 5 19 e Background Density Adjustment cccceeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeees 5 20 e Color Grayscale Black and White Selection ccccccececeeeeees 5 21 s aM Mi inner anea iA Eaa EERE aaa 5 22 e Border al f ee ere r rai oioi 5 23 e Enter Document Name File Name cccccceeesecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 25 Enter E mail Subject and Body scccccceshis ecicrcancttnastaantcnonsmeeteeseaencee 5 26 s WSD SCA essermi enia in ipo engis 5 27 Jop FNSH NOTCE osne Eia 5 29 s Send and Printsess eni iniae eei enr irinna 5 30 amp SENndand SIOE sonken Eria 5 30 FIP Encrypted TX extra tar nccis eeShcace a aac aise nen cenncenestdapeneniacteantenmagancelaians 5 31 ONO er cateastrteie anit eh 5 31 ADOUL GOO PICMG Sarisrrsnninnrn eaan iane riei nigis 5 32 5 1 Sending Functions Original Size Selection Select the size of originals that will serve as the basis for scanning Be sure to select the original size when using originals of nonstandard sizes Choose the original size from the following groups of origin
119. E Caled a oad Xx Precautions for USE irira aE EIET I tenn tenets xii Laser Safety Europe a tdas aeaaaee a a a a aa aa a a e aaa da a a a S XV Safety Instructions Regarding the Disconnection of Power Europe 2 5 xvi Legal Restriction on Copying Scanning 00 cece eet eee xvii Legal and Safety Information 0 0 0 c cee tenets xix 1 Part Names Operation Panel syes eraisketa esin Pee eh ee ee ee doses Sed ea dese Needed beads 1 2 IVI AGING ogc LEI a apace tea ences tba EE ate ep ae A are ace Saree Manan E E 1 4 2 Preparation before Use Check the AcCessorieS ai eae hi ibe peed eee Dae ea ee ee ee Ye ee eal Wea 2 2 Determining the Connection Method and Preparing Cables 00200 ea eeee 2 3 Connecting Cables sre ai saeia aiaia aiaa hee es eee eed eke ea eed eee eee eee eee A 2 5 Power OMO 2 marni ce eae een bee doe ee epee eed EE E AE ee oe eee See ees 2 7 Low Power Mode and Auto Low Power Mode 00 c eee eee eee teas 2 9 Sleep and Auto Sleep 2 2 2 ce eee 2 10 Adjusting the Operation Panel Angle 0 00 c cee eet eee 2 11 Switching the Language for Display Language 000 cece eee eee 2 11 Setting Date and Time 0 teens 2 12 Network Setup LAN Cable Connection 000 cece eee eee 2 14 Installing Software saa iied aara ii ara tee one a a shea ewe ve ceded dee a toed nen 2 17 Embedded Web Server Settings for E mail 000 cece
120. E OpenSSL PROJECT AS IS AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE xxii Original SSLeay License Copyright C 1995 1998 Eric Young eay cryptsoft com All rights reserved This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young eay cryptsoft com The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL This library is free for commercial and non commercial use as long as the following conditions are aheared to The following conditions apply to all code found in this distribution be it the RC4 RSA lhash DES etc code not just the SSL code The SSL documentation included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson tjh cryptsoft com Copyright remains Eric Young s and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to b
121. Edge Top Original Orientation 08 08 2009 10 10 1 2 3 4 Press the Copy key Place the originals on the platen Press Layout Edit and then Combine Press 2 in 1 or 4in 1 and choose the page layout of Layout Press Border Line to choose the type of the lines to indicate page boundaries Press OK Press Original Orientation to choose orientation of the originals either Top Edge Top or Top Edge Left Then press OK Press OK Press the Start key Copying begins If the original is placed on the platen replace the original and press the Start key After scanning all originals press Finish Scan to start copying 4 14 Copying Functions Margin Centering Mode Shift the original image to make space on the copy for binding on the left right or top bottom side When you copy onto paper different from the original size you can center the original image on the paper The following margin widths are available Inch Models 0 75 to 0 75 in 0 01 increments Metric Models 18 mm to 18 mm in 1 mm increments Margin on the Back Side When duplex copying you can also specify the margin on the back side Auto When Auto is selected an appropriate margin is applied automatically on the rear page depending on a margin specified for the front page and a binding orientation Separate Front Back Margins Enables you to specify the front and back settings sep
122. Entry You can view information on the notification E A destination by pressing Detail 08 08 2009 10 10 5 Specify the destination to send the finish notice and press OK NOTE For the procedure to select the destination from the Address Book refer Specifying Destination on page 3 28 6 Todirectly enter the address press Address Entry and then E mail Address Destination Ready to send Place original Ei Job Finish Notice off B Address Book Cancel hel 08 08 2009 10 10 Add Shortcut Enter the E mail address and press OK Press OK Specify the destination and press the Start key to start sending When the sending is completed the finish notice is sent to the specified E mail address 5 29 Sending Functions Send and Print When you send originals this feature allows you to print a copy of the document being sent The procedure for using Send and Print is explained below Send and Store 1 O oa A WOW N Press the Send key Place the originals on the platen Press Advanced Setup and then Send and Print Press On Press OK Specify the destination and press the Start key Transmission begins and a copy of the transmitted document is printed When you send originals this feature allows you to store a copy of the document being sent in a Custom Box The procedure for using Send and Store is explained below Destination R
123. Erase k Border Erase a Sheet sg Border Erase jj f u Book yy Individual order Erase iy Border Erase m Sheet 0 75 0 75 0 25 Copies 0 75 0 75 e 0 00 2 00 B EE aee ea CEJ Erase ral Individual Border Erase Original Zoom Paper Teme Same as Front Page Back Page 08 08 2009 10 10 Copies Same as Front Page Back Page Top Edge Top 1 2 3 4 Press the Copy key Place the originals on the platen Press Layout Edit and then Border Erase Select Border Erase Sheet to erase borders for an individual sheet or Border Erase Book to erase borders for a book Use or to enter the width in Border or Gutter Press Keys to use the numeric keys for entry Press Individual Border Erase to select the individual border erase Use or to enter the width in Top Bottom Left or Right Press Keys to use the numeric keys for entry Press Original Orientation to select the original orientation from either Top Edge Top or Top Edge Left Then press OK For 2 sided originals press Back Page and then press Same as Front Page or Do Not Erase Press OK Press the Start key to start copying 4 18 Copying Functions Booklet from Sheets The Booklet copying option allows you to copy sheet originals and produce booklets such as small brochu
124. For a user with administrator rights who logs in User properties can be changed and users can be deleted The items which can be added are all able to be changed Use the procedure below to change the user properties 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press User Login Job Accounting 3 If user login administration is disabled the user authentication screen appears Enter your login user name and password and then press Login For this you need to login with administrator privileges Refer to Adding a User on page 11 5 for the default login user name and password 4 Press Next of User Login Setting and Register Edit of Local User List 5 Select the user whose properties you wish to change NOTE Select Name and Login Name from the Sort pull down menu to sort the user list Press Search Name or Search Login to search by name or login user name The procedure differs depending on the details to be edited Changing user information 1 Press Detail 2 Refer to steps 6 to 17 of Adding a User to User Name Cae change a user property 01 User Login User Name Change gt Login Password Change 3 Press Registe r s Press Yes in the registration confirmation 2 Access Level Change Account Name Change x 7 e n p screen The user information is changed E mail Address Change IC Card Information Change abcd efg com gt Empty F Cancel l Register 08 08 2009 10
125. IC Card Login Check Counter Cancel fel Login 08 08 2009 10 10 2 Enter the login user name and press OK NOTE Refer to the Character Entry Method on Appendix 10 for details on entering characters 3 Press Login Password Press Keys to enter the login data using the numeric keys 4 Enter the password and press OK 5 Check the login user name and password are correct and press Login NOTE If Network Authentication is selected as the user authentication method either Local or Network can be selected as the authentication destination Logout To logout from the machine press the Logout key to return to the login user name password entry screen Basic Operation Enter key and Quick No Search key This section explains how to use the Enter key and Quick No Search key on the operation panel Using the Enter lt key The Enter key works in the same way as keys displayed on the touch panel such as OK and Close e g The Enter symbol is displayed next to the keys whose operations are carried out by the Enter key OK 7 Close The operation of the Enter key is explained below using copy paper selection as an example For details of the procedure refer to Paper Selection on page 4 4 Ready to copy Copies 1 Inthe paper selection screen press the key for the z cassette containing the required paper size Paper Selection The Enter 1 symbol appears
126. Image Shortcut 1 zi Shortcut 2 z Place original Shortcut 3 iE Auto 100 Normal 0 r Z Shortcut 4 Paper Zoom Density Original a Selectii 7 sl 0 Shortcut 5 Zoom pee 2 sided 2in1 one sided Je ae a Setup ww 10 10 3 The machine starts scanning the original When scanning is completed the preview image appears on the panel O Copies 4 To change the quality or the layout press Cancel FE Pres Canc cage sos or the Stop key Change the settings and press pam i Preview again to see a preview image with the 9 srona 2 new settings g F Shortcut 3 fue ane Nomaro NOTE If you scan a multi page original only the first Original a4 ieee Zoom peel eamat page is previewed Zoom Pape 2 sided 2in1 gt gt 2 sided Quick Setup Tayout Edit 08 ww 10 10 5 If there is no problem with the preview image press the Start key Copying begins Basic Operation Copying Follow the steps as below for basic copying Copies 1 Shortcut 1 g Place original Shortcut 2 Shortcut 3 g ji Auto 100 Normal 0 f Shortcut 4 ES Paper Zoom Density ES Original Selection Shortcut 5 t 2 sided 2in1 off gt gt 2 sided me Quick Setup Org Paper Color Layout Edit Advanced Finishing Image Qualit Setup 08 08 2009 10 10 1 Press the Copy key when the Copy key indicator is off NOTE If t
127. L encryption After changing the setting restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON again For detailed information on restarting the system refer to Restarting the System on page 8 63 The following Secure Protocol settings are available e SSL Setup 8 69 e IPP Security Setup 8 69 e HTTP Security Setup 8 69 e LDAP Security Setup 8 70 SSL Setup Select whether or not to use SSL The default setting is On Use the procedure below 1 Press the System Menu key Press System Next of Network Next of Secure Protocol and then Next of SSL Press OK GE 2 3 Press On or Off 4 5 After changing the setting restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON again For detailed information on restarting the system refer to Restarting the System on page 8 63 IPP Security Setup Select the IPP security level This setup is available when SSL is On The default setting is PP over SSL Only NOTE IPP must be set to On in Protocol Detail on page 8 66 Use the procedure below 1 Press the System Menu key Press System Next of Network Next of Secure Protocol and then Change of PP Security Press IPP over SSL Only or IPP or IPP over SSL Press OK a fF W N After changing the setting restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON again For detailed information on restarting the system refer to Restarting the System on page 8 63 HTTP Security Se
128. MB Host Name E SS Path r NOTE Connected appears when connection to the CE destination is correctly established If Cannot connect parie li Specify the folder on the destination Pes Connection To specify another destination go to the step 6 To specify only one destination go to step 7 Add to Addr Book Next Dest Cancel lel OK 08 08 2009 10 10 appears review the entry 6 Press Next Dest and repeat steps 3 to 5 to specify the destination You can specify a combined total of up to 10 FTP and SMB destination folders NOTE When Add to Addr Book is displayed the entry is registered in the Address Book 7 Press OK to register the entry in the destination list 3 25 Basic Operation A Ready ike send Destination 3 Place original I Detail aj Address abcd efg com Book 10 200 188 120 a ja ae v Giai a Folder Pats Entry On Hook J Direct J Chain Detail Edit Recall J ie FAX No Entry 0001 0002 0003 0004 0005 No a jo ne Entry 0006 E 0007 E 0008 E 0009 F 0010 1 100 co Destination Quick Setup prona ndog Color Image Quality B 10 10 8 Check the destination list Select a destination and press Detail Edit to check and edit it Edit it if necessary referring to steps 3 to 5 Select a destination and press Delete to remove the destination from the list NOTE When Onis selected in FTP Encry
129. MO nianna aae a EEN cree SORES nT ONS s PAON OVOMdE cogio a in MC My roereiers inei aeien EEE a EErEE e Ee 4 1 Copying Functions Original Size Specify the size of originals being scanned Be sure to specify the original size when copying non standard sizes The following options are available Standard Sizes 1 How to Select Have the size of original detected automatically or select from the standard sizes Inch models Auto Ledger Legal Letter Letter R Statement Statement R 8 5x13 5 Oficio Il and 11x15 Metric models Auto A3 B4 A4 A4 R B5 B5 R A5 A5 R B6 B6 R A6 R and Folio Standard Sizes 2 Select from the standard sizes not included in the Standard Sizes 1 Inch models A3 B4 A4 A4 R B5 B5 R A5 A5 R B6 B6 R A6 R Folio 8K 16K and 16K R Metric models Ledger Legal Letter Letter R Statement Statement R 8 5x13 5 Oficio Il 11x15 8K 16K and 16K R Select from envelope postcard or the custom sized originals Hagaki Oufuku Hagaki Custom 1 to 4 Size Entry Enter the size not included in the standard sizes 1 and 2 Inch models Horizontal 2 to 17 in 0 01 increments Vertical 2 to 11 69 in 0 01 increments Metric models Horizontal 50 to 432 mm in 1 mm increments Vertical 50 to 297 mm in 1 mm increments For instructions on how to specify the custom original sizes Custom 1 to 4 refer to Custom Orig
130. Media Type To print on preprinted or prepunched paper or on letterhead refer to Special Paper Action on page 8 10 NOTE To change to a media type other than Plain refer to Paper Weight on page 8 7 Default Setting System Menu Use the procedure below to select the paper size and media type for manual paper feed 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Common Settings Next of Original Paper Settings Next of MP Tray Setting and then Change of Paper Size 3 To detect paper size automatically press Auto and select Metric or Inch for Paper Size To select paper size press Standard Sizes 1 Standard Sizes 2 Others or Size Entry for Paper Size If you select Size Entry press to enter X horizontal and Y vertical dimensions Press Keys to enter the paper size using the numeric keys 4 Press OK The previous screen reappears 5 Press Change of Media Type to select the media type and press OK Paper Weight Select weight for each media type The options for media type and weight of paper are as follows Paper types and weights Y Available N Not available Paper Weight Normal 1 Normal 2 Normal 3 Weight g m 64 g m 171 g m Transpar Media type or less and more encies Plain Y Y default N Transparency N N Y default Rough Y Y Y default N Vellum Y default Y Y N Labels Y Y Y Y default Recycled Y default Y N Preprinted
131. N Press the System Menu key Press Copy and Change of Paper Selection Press Auto or Default Paper Source Press OK Move to the copy screen and press the Reset key Auto Paper Selection If Auto is selected for Paper Selection set the paper size selection method when the zoom changes The table below shows the available settings a a Most Suitable Size Select paper based on the current zoom and the size of the original Same as Original Size Select paper that matches the size of the original regardless the zoom 8 25 Default Setting System Menu Use the procedure below to specify the action performed for Auto Paper Selection 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Copy and Change of Auto Paper Selection 3 Press Most Suitable Size or Same as Original Size 4 Press OK 5 Move to the copy screen and press the Reset key Auto Priority When a paper source of different size from the original is selected select whether automatic zoom reduce zoom is performed The table below shows the available settings e ee No zoom performed copied in original size Automatic zoom performed as appropriate Use the procedure below to specify the automatic zoom priority 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Copy and Change of Auto Priority 3 Select the default for Off or On 4 Press OK 5 Move to the copy screen and press the Reset key Reserve Next Priority
132. NetWare 3 Press On 4 Press the key for the frame type you want to use 8 67 Default Setting System Menu 5 Press OK 6 After changing the setting restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON again For detailed information on restarting the system refer to Restarting the System on page 8 63 AppleTalk Setup Select the Apple Talk network connection Refer to Apple Talk Setup on page 2 16 about the procedures WSD Scan Setup Select whether or not to use WSD Scan The default setting is On Use the procedure below 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press System Next of Network and then Change of WSD Scan 3 Press On or Off 4 Press OK 5 After changing the setting restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON again For detailed information on restarting the system refer to Restarting the System on page 8 63 WSD Print Setup Select whether or not to use WSD Print The default setting is On Use the procedure below ok Press the System Menu key 2 Press System Next of Network and then Change of WSD Print 3 Press On or Off 4 Press OK 5 After changing the setting restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON again For detailed information on restarting the system refer to Restarting the System on page 8 63 8 68 Default Setting System Menu Secure Protocol Encrypt the communication between your PC and the machine using the SS
133. On y using HTTPS SSL must be set to On in SSL Setup on page 8 69 IPP Select whether or not to communicate Off Y using IPP When selecting On set the IPP default Port Number Use the IPP Port 631 default port 631 IPP over SSL Select whether or not to use IPP over Off Y SSL SSL must be set to On in SSL Setup on page 8 69 Raw Port Select whether or not to receive On Y documents using Raw Port Y The machine must be restarted after the setting is changed N The machine does not need to be restarted after the setting is changed Use the procedure below The following procedure is an example for specifying the SMTP E mail TX settings 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press System and then Next of Network to display the network settings screen 3 Display the item you want to set and press Change for that item In this example press Change of SMTP E mail TX Press On or Off Press OK After changing the setting restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON again For detailed information on restarting the system refer to Restarting the System on page 8 63 NetWare Setup Select the NetWare network connection After that select frame types for NetWare network from Auto Ethernet ll 802 3 802 2 or SNAP The default settings are On Frame Type Auto Use the procedure below 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press System Next of Network and then Change of
134. Operating Environment Temperature 10 to 32 5 C 50 to 90 5 F Humidity 15 to 80 Altitude 2 500 m 8 202 ft maximum Brightness 1 500 lux maximum Dimension W x D x H 22 7 16 x 24 13 16 x 30 3 16 Main unit only 570 x 630 x 767 mm Weight without toner container and waste toner box Space Required W x D 165 lb 75 kg 28 9 16 x 24 13 16 Using multi purpose tray 725 x 630 mm Power Source 120 V AC 60 Hz 11 8A 220 to 240 V AC 50 60 Hz 6 5A Options Document processor Paper feeder Document finisher Job separator Built in finisher Key counter FAX kit Expansion memory Data Security Kit Printed Document Guard Kit Appendix 22 Appendix Printer Item Description Same as Copying Speed Printing Speed First Print Time A4 feed from Cassette 5 8 seconds or less Resolution 600 dpi Operating System Windows 2000 Service Pack 2 or later Windows XP Windows Server 2003 Windows Vista Apple Macintosh OS 10 x Interface Standard USB Interface Connector 1 USB Hi Speed Network interface 1 10 BASE T 100 BASE TX Page Description Language Scanner PRESCRIBE Item Description Operating System Windows 2000 Service Pack 2 or later Windows XP Windows Vista System requirements CPU 600MHz or higher RAM 128MB or more Resolution 600 dpi 400 dpi 300 dpi 200 dpi 200 x 100
135. Press the System Menu key 2 Press Common Settings and then Change of Default Screen 3 Select the screen to be displayed as the default screen NOTE The application names appear if the applications are installed and officially licensed on 4 Press OK Sound Set options for buzzer sound during the machine operations The table below lists the buzzer types and their settings and details Description Volume 0 Mute 1 Minimum to Set the buzzer volume level 5 Maximum Key Confirmation Off On Emit a sound when the control panel and touch panel keys are pressed Job Finish Off On Emit a sound when a print job is normally completed Ready Off On Emit a sound when the warm up is completed Warning Off On Emit a sound when errors occur Default Setting System Menu Use the procedure below to set the sound options 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Common Settings Next of Sound and then Next of Buzzer 3 Press Change of Volume Key Confirmation Job Finish Ready or Warning 4 Select the buzzer volume level or other sound options Original Paper Settings Register additional types and sizes of originals and paper Custom Original Size Setup Set up frequently used custom original sizes The custom size options are displayed on the screen to select original size The dimensions available are as follows The table below lists the sizes that can be registered
136. SERSTRAHLUNG WENN ABDECKUNG GEOFFNE NICHT DEM STRAHL AUSSETZEN ATTENZIONE CLASSE 3B RADIAZIONE LASER IN CASO DI APERTURA EVITARE L ESPOSIZIONE AL FASCIO PRECAUCION CLASSE 3B RADIACIONE LASER CUANDO SE ABRE EVITAR EXPONERSE AL RAYO VARO AVATTAESSA OLET ALTTIINA LUOKAN 3B LASERSATEILYLLE ALA KATSO SATEESEEN BF mABKRT a HART RS AAA MERA RAR ERS METERA RHM WRAKI CLASS 3B 7 AHA JH HAAL CORH lt ESSA8BL V ETRE E LeBRARD MNEWT lt RAL The label shown below is attached on the right side of the machine CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT KLASSE 1 LASER PRODUKT XV Safety Instructions Regarding the Disconnection of Power Europe Caution The power plug is the main isolation device Other switches on the equipment are only functional switches and are not suitable for isolating the equipment from the power source VORSICHT Der Netzstecker ist die Hauptisoliervorrichtung Die anderen Schalter auf dem Ger t sind nur Funktionsschalter und k nnen nicht verwendet werden um den StromfluB im Ger t zu unterbrechen DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY TO 2004 108 EC 2006 95 EEC 93 68 EEC 1999 5 EC and 2005 32 EC We declare under our sole responsibility that the product to which this declaration relates is in conformity with the following specifications EN55024 EN55022 Class B EN61000 3 2 EN61000 3 3 EN60950 1 EN60825 1 EN300 330 1 EN300 330 2 EN62301 Radio Frequency Transmitter Europe
137. Search Title bar Displays the page title OFFICE RETAL BUSINESS Close Closes the Internet browser and returns you to the application list screen Scroll bars These allow you to scroll the displayed page up down left and right by pressing A v lt Jor gt orby moving one of the slide bars with your finger Security lock icon Displayed when you are viewing a protected page InserireURL Cerca Menu 4 lt gt Cl tia Q x S a aay 2009 10 10 Loader Progress bar a Shows the status of page loading When the browser is loading a web page the loader changes to an animated display Menu Displays the browser setup menu You can use this menu to specify the browser s display magnification set the text encoding scheme and check the server certificate Search Search Internet Retrieval in page Enter URL Displays a search menu in which you can select Retrieval Use this display a desired web in page or an Internet search site page by entering the URL for Search Internet Use the selected search site to search that page with the entered keyword Retrieval in page Search from the entered keyword in the currently displayed page You can continue your search by pressing SearchUp or SearchDown Home page Displays your specified home page You can set your home page in the Browser Preferences on page 8 58 Reload Updates the page Back Forward Displays the pr
138. Selection 3 Select the default color mode 4 Press OK File Format Select the default file type to send the scanned originals The available default settings are shown below Item Description PDF Send files in PDF format TIFF Send files in TIFF format JPEG Send files in JPEG format XPS Send files in XPS format High Comp PDF Send files in High Comp PDF format refer to page 5 14 NOTE Refer to page 5 12 for file formats Use the procedure below to select the default file format 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Common Settings v Next of Function Defaults and then Change of File Format 3 Select the default file format 4 Press OK File Separation Select the default file separation setting The available default settings are shown below Lee ee Off No file separation performed all the pages are compiled in one file Each Page Each scanned page is created into a separate file NOTE Refer to page 5 13 for file separation Use the procedure below to select the default file separation 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Common Settings v Next of Function Defaults and then Change of File Separation 3 Select the default for Off or Each Page Press OK 8 17 Default Setting System Menu Density Set the default density The available default settings are shown below a re Manual Normal 0 Set to Normal 0 in th
139. TNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED INNO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or derivative of this code cannot be changed i e this code cannot simply be copied and put under another distribution licence including the GNU Public Licence xxiii Monotype Imaging License Agreement 1 2 11 12 Software shall mean the digitally encoded machine readable scalable outline data as encoded ina special format as well as the UFST Software You agree to accept a non exclusive license to use the Software to reproduce and display weights styles and versions of letters numerals characters and symbols Typefaces solely for your own customary business or personal purposes at the address stated on the registration card you return to Monotype Imaging Under the terms of this License Agreement you have the right to use the Fonts on up to three printers If you need to have access to the fonts on more than t
140. To ch Panel Display acne scr ce tact erica deeniagte ee chiceniiciee ce ebaeteeeeiece 3 4 amp AO all CVS agea nate binsneneeta sen caedeminn uteanieebncanantrn ease 3 5 e GODIN Orea a a paaa 3 6 Printing Printing fron Applications sssrini naniniecimentasninactenmnets 3 19 E e e E E E E A A A E TE E T tte 3 21 amp OPECIN Destinato senine Aea 3 28 s Using Document BOX isriiicisimisisriismasnsineareninoridiniie pinansin 3 31 e Basic Operation for Document BOX ssssssseeesssssereeeessrrrrnserererreeene 3 33 ANNO CNN JODS seseris Ere E E Eda EEE EEES 3 40 AU less OW SEEEN ire aE 3 41 e Program Copying and Sending ccctisss lt actesccstectacrsseteesinenteentcsntertnnads 3 44 e Registering Shortcuts Copy Send and Document Box Settings 3 44 e Using the Internet Browser oi ccscwcs cid cscs ewinegdcnsseseretdiinesieedi ed nkentes 3 47 3 1 Basic Operation Login Logout If user login administration is enabled it is necessary to enter the login user name and password to use the machine NOTE You will be unable to login if you forget your login user name or login password In this event login with administrator privileges and change your login user name or login password Login 1 If the screen shown appears during operations Enter login user name and password press Login User Name aa y Press Keys to enter the login data using the name _ pst numeric keys Keys oli pree
141. able for metric models only on page 8 9 A3 B4 A4 B5 W EN B4 A4 R B5 IS Q I a e Folio A4 R B5 R 5 8 Sending Functions Use the procedure below to send mixed sized originals as a batch 1 Press the Send key 2 Place the original into the document processor IMPORTANT When you place originals of different width place the top edge of originals to align with the width guide at the backside If the originals are placed unevenly they may not be scanned correctly 3 Press Original Sending Data Format and then Mixed Sized Originals a Ready to send Destination 4 Select the combination of originals from dia 1 Same Width and Different Width Scan all sheets in the document processor 5 P ress O K even if differently sized then send Up to 30 sheets can be placed in the document processor for mixed size originals BE Off Same Width f Different Width Cancel 4l OK 08 08 2009 10 10 6 Specify the destination and press the Start key to start sending Sending Functions 1 sided 2 sided Selection Select the type and binding of original depending on the original The table below lists the binding directions for each original type Original 1 sided Sheet Original 1 sided Binding
142. acing originals on the optional document processor Original Top Edge Top Top Edge Left NOTE To change the default setting for the original orientation refer to Original Orientation on page 8 15 4 10 Copying Functions Use the procedure below to select the orientation when placing the originals on the platen 1 Press the Copy key 2 Place the originals on the platen 3 Press Org Paper Finishing and then Original Orientation Ready to copy ae 4 Select Top Edge Top or Top Edge Left as the way the original is oriented Ga 4 Select the orientation of the i original document s top edge 5 P ress O K Place original Top Edge Top Top Edge Left i Sha ax 08 08 2009 10 10 6 Press the Start key to start copying Copying Functions Output Destination You can use the procedure below to select an output destination such as the optional document finisher for your copies NOTE Optional output destinations include the job separator built in finisher and document finisher The table below shows the available output destinations Destination Description Top tray Top tray of the machine where copies are stored Finisher Tray Tray of the optional built in finisher or document finisher Job Separator Tray Optional job separator Copy output orientation can be
143. aining documents Copy functions Prints the documents in blank from the position that the machine detected the document guard pattern Document Box functions Send functions Does not store the documents in the hard disk Cancels the job FAX functions Does not send the documents Sends the documents that are scanned before the document guard pattern is detected if you have selected File Separation If not every documents will not to be sent 8 73 Default Setting System Menu Limitations Scanning speed will be limited to the speed of scanning 600 dpi image Printing speed will not be limited FAX transmission will be limited to the memory transmission Note The Printed Document Guard Kit should not fully prevents a leak of information We do not guarantee any loss incurred while using this feature or when malfunction occurred with this feature The guard pattern printed on the colored paper or paper that is decorated with special design may not be detected We do not guarantee the integrity of the detection If the malfunction occurs contact your service representative Use the procedure below to specify the Document Guard setting 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press System and then Next of Optional Function NOTE If user login administration is disabled the user authentication screen appears Enter your login user name and password and then press Login
144. al size Standard Sizes 1 Detail Select from automatic detection and standard sizes Inch models Auto Ledger Legal Letter Letter R Statement Statement R 8 5x13 5 Oficio Il R 11x15 Metric models Auto A3 B4 A4 A4 R B5 B5 R A5 A5 R B6 B6 R A6 R Folio Standard Sizes 2 Select from standard sizes except Standard Sizes 1 Inch models A3 B4 A4 A4 R B5 B5 R A5 A5 R B6 B6 R A6 R Folio 8K 16 K 16K R Metric models Ledger Legal Letter Letter R Statement Statement R 8 5x13 5 Oficio II R 11x15 8K 16K 16K R Others Select from Hagaki and Custom Original Size Hagaki Oufuku Hagaki Custom 1 to 4 Size Entry Enter the size that is not indicated in Standard Sizes 1 and 2 Inch models Horizontal 2 to 17 in 0 01 increments Vertical 2 to 11 69 in 0 01 increments Metric models Horizontal 50 to 432 mm in 1 mm increments Vertical 50 to 297 mm in 1 mm increments i Regarding the setting method of Custom Original Size Custom 1 to 4 refer to Custom Original Size Setup on page 8 4 i The input units can be changed in the System menu Refer to Switching Unit of Measurement on page 8 11 Use the procedure below to select the original size when sending scanned images 1 Press the Send key 2 Place the originals on the platen 3 Press Original Sending Data Format and then Original Size Sending Functions
145. ality Custom 1 to 8 Paper Size Cassette 1 2 Maximum 11 x 17 A3 Duplex 11 x 17 A3 Minimum 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 A5R Duplex 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 A5 R Multi Purpose Tray Maximum 11 x 17 A3 Minimum 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 A6 R Zoom Level Manual mode 25 to 400 1 increments Auto mode Preset Zoom Printing Speed A4 Letter 30 sheets min A4 R Letter R 22 sheets min A3 Ledger 15 sheets min B4 Legal 15 sheets min B5 30 sheets min B5 R 20 sheets min A5 R A6 R 14 sheets min First Print Time A4 feed from Cassette 5 1 seconds or less 29 seconds or less 10 seconds or less Warm up Power on Time 22 C 71 6 F 60 Low Power Sleep 15 seconds or less Appendix 21 Item Description Paper Capacity Cassette 500 sheets 80 g m Multi Purpose Tray 200 sheets 80 g m Output Tray Capacity Top tray 250 sheets 80 g m with built in finisher 100 sheets 80 g m with optional job separator 150 sheets 80 g m Continuous Copying 1 to 999 sheets Image Write System Semiconductor laser and electrophotography Main Memory Standard 2048 MB Maximum 2048 MB Hard Disk 160 GB Interface Standard USB Interface Connector 1 USB Hi Speed USB memory slot 2 Full Speed USB Network interface 1 10 BASE T 100 BASE TX Option KUIO W slot 2 Resolution 600 x 600 dpi
146. all destinations at one time 3 30 Basic Operation Using Document Box What is Document Box Document Box is an area in the hard disk in which you can save documents for later retrieval or sharing among multiple users Document Box contains four types of component boxes which provide the following functions Custom Box page 6 2 Custom Box is a component box which you can create within the Document Box and store data for later retrieval You can create or delete a Custom Box and manipulate data in various ways as described below e Creating a box page 6 2 e Storing Documents in a Custom Box page 6 4 e Printing a Document in a Custom Box page 6 5 Sending a Document from a Custom Box page 6 6 e Moving Copying Joining Documents in a Custom Box page 6 8 e Deleting Documents in a Custom Box page 6 11 Job Box Job Box holds temporary or permanent print data for use with job options including Private Print Stored Job Quick Copy Proof and Hold Repeat copy and Form Overlay which will be discussed later Four individual Job Boxes corresponding to these job options are already provided in the Document Box These Job Boxes cannot be created or deleted by a user NOTE You can set up the machine so that temporary documents in job boxes are automatically deleted For details refer to Automatic Delete Setting for Temporary Documents on page 6 17 Private Print Stored Job Box page 6 12 In Private Prin
147. alled You can set this function up so that destination types are selected when the address book is displayed For more information refer to Narrow Down Settings on page 8 57 The procedures for using the different search modes are explained below Search by name Press Search Name and enter the required name Search by address number Press Search No and enter the address number you wish to search Advanced search by initial letter Press the key for the required initial letter Advanced search by destination Press any of E mail Folder FAX i F AX or Group The destinations registered by that type are displayed 3 29 Basic Operation Choosing by One Touch Key a Ready to send Destination Select the destination using the One Touch Keys Place original Destination l ptal Address In the basic screen for sendin ress the One Touch ABCD abcd efg com A E 9 p oug SET Keys where the destination is registered Heap Path A Bi NOTE If the One Touch Keys for the desired 001 0002 0003 0004 0005 No pote destination is hidden on the touch panel press v or gt Al hadr Enty A to scroll and view next or previous One Touch 0006 0007 0008 0009 0010 al 100 g ws Scan Key S al x This procedure assumes that One Touch Keys have ol ae already been registered Refer to Adding a Destination on One Touch Key on page 8 55 for more information on adding One
148. alue 4 Press OK Low Power Timer You can specify the amount of time to wait before Low Power Mode Specify a value from 1 240 minutes 1 minute increments For more information on Low Power Mode refer to the Low Power Mode and Auto Low Power Mode on page 2 9 Use the procedure below to set the Low Power Mode 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press x Date Timer and then Low Power Timer 3 Press or the numeric keys to enter the time until Low Power Mode is turned on 4 Press OK Auto Sleep If no job runs for a certain period of time automatically enter Sleep Mode Refer to Sleep and Auto Sleep on page 2 10 for Sleep Auto Sleep ON OFF Select whether to use Auto Sleep or not NOTE Time remaining before Auto Sleep can be modified as necessary Use the procedure below to specify the auto sleep setting 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press x Date Timer and then Change of Auto Sleep 3 Press Off or On 4 Press OK 8 48 Default Setting System Menu Sleep Timer Set the amount of time to wait before Auto Sleep Options are between 1 and 240 minutes every one minute NOTE If you select Off for Auto Sleep the time display does not appear Use the procedure below to set the Auto Sleep time 1 2 3 4 Press the System Menu key Press v Date Timer and then Change of Sleep Timer Press and or the numeric keys to enter the time until Aut
149. and then Change of Language Press the key for the language you want to use Press OK The touch panel language will be changed Select the screen appearing right after start up default screen The options are as follows The table below lists the available screens Copy Item Description The Copy screen the screen shown when the Copy key is pressed appears Send The Send screen the screen shown when the Send key is pressed appears Status The Status Job Cancel screen the screen shown when the Status Job Cancel key is pressed appears 8 2 Default Setting System Menu Item Description Document Box The Document Box screen the screen shown when the Document Box key is pressed appears Program The Program screen the screen shown when the Program key is pressed appears Application The Application selecting screen the screen shown when the Application key is pressed appears Accessibility Copy The Accessibility Copy screen the screen shown when the Accessibility Display key is pressed in the Copy screen appears Accessibility Send The Accessibility Send screen the screen shown when the Accessibility Display key is pressed in the Send screen appears Application name Each application is activated and the initial screen appears Maximum 6 applications For example nternet Browser Use the procedure below to select the default startup screen 1
150. arately NOTE You can set the default margin width Refer to Margin Default on page 8 20 for details Use the procedure below to make copies with margins Press the Copy key Place the originals on the platen Press Layout Edit and then Margin Centering Ready to copy Copies Press Margin to select the copy with margin Margin Centering Use or to enter the margins for Left Right and Left Right 18 18 Hi op Top Bottom Press Keys to use the numeric keys for entry Jato Keys For duplex copying press Back Page and select Top Bottom 0 75 0 75 Back Page E of is Auto or Manual Top Edge Top E Original Keys Orientation 08 08 2009 10 10 4 15 Copying Functions Ready to copy Margin Centering Back Page 0 75 0 75 Place original Place original Copies 08 08 2009 10 10 Copies Top Edge Top Original Orientation a 08 08 2009 10 10 If you selected Auto press OK If you pressed Manual enter the margins in the displayed screen and then press OK Press Centering to center the original image on the paper Press Original Orientation to choose orientation of the originals either Top Edge Top or Top Edge Left Then press OK Press OK Press the Start key to start copying 4 16 Copying Functions Border Erase Use Border Erase to remove black shadows tha
151. at a time Highlighting a document to Selecting documents by display its details with Detail checking checkboxes O E 0404200710574511 10 10 2008 09 50 21 MB 0003 Wf H 0404200710574521 10 10 2008 10 00 21 MB Detail Preview pee Previews the selected Join Move Copy Delete i Store File doc ume nt et Close Print Send Status 10 10 Thumbnail Switches between list display N and thumbnail display SearchiName Selecting more than one document at a time Prints sends joins moves copies or deletes the selected documents Highlighting a document A to display its details with OF Detail f aa E Seen r Saves the document in the z open box 08 08 2009 10 10 Selecting documents by checking checkboxes NOTE You can select multiple documents by pressing the respective document checkboxes However note that you cannot select multiple documents when you are sending documents 3 35 Basic Operation Viewing Editing Box Details You can check and modify box information Use the procedure below 1 Press Register Edit Box in the box list screen ee ee 2 Highlight the box whose details you wish to check or edit and press Detail Edit ANa la nama Owner Search NOTE If a custom box is protected by a password 7 enter the correct password
152. atic detection Use the procedure below to set automatic detection of originals 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Common Settings Next of Original Paper Settings and then Change of Original Auto Detect 3 Select A6 or Hagaki of A6 Hagaki Select Off to disable automatic detection or On to enable automatic detection of Folio and 11x15 respectively 4 Press OK Media for Auto Selection Select a default media type for auto paper selection when Auto is selected of Paper Selection If Plain is selected the paper source with plain paper loaded in the specific size is selected Select All Media Types for the paper source with any kind of paper loaded in the specific size Use the procedure below to select the paper size and media type used by Auto Selection 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Common Settings Next of Original Paper Settings and then Change of Media for Auto B amp W 8 9 Default Setting System Menu 3 Select All Media Types or any media type for paper selection 4 Press OK Paper Source for Cover Paper Select paper source for cover paper from Cassette 1 4 or Multi Purpose Tray Cover is used for Booklet see page 4 19 and Cover see page 4 21 modes NOTE Cassette 3 and Cassette 4 are displayed when the optional paper feeder is installed Use the procedure below to select the paper source for the cover 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Pre
153. ation for Document Box This section explains basic operations for document boxes using examples where tasks are carried out with custom boxes NOTE In the following explanation it is assumed that user login administration is enabled For details on User Logon privileges refer to User Privileges on page 3 38 The basic procedure for using document boxes is explained below 1 Press the Document Box key The default document box screen appears csa Bo 2 Press Custom Box Job Box or Removable Memory to select the type of document box you No fa Name lA Owner fused Area a want to work with SALES Anonymous sizz Search Name _ Searchino _ In this example press Custom Box Register Edit i The box list screen appears You can use this screen for tasks such as registering and editing boxes For more information Te on using the box list refer to Custom Box List on aa page 3 34 08 08 2009 10 10 Store File pe NOTE For more information on registering boxes refer to Creating a New Custom Box on page 6 2 You cannot access boxes if you forget your password In this event access the machine using administrator privileges and overwrite your box password 3 Select the box containing the document you want to work with and press Open iF Custom Box 0001 ss 0001 Box The document list screen appears 0002 0002 Box 0003 30003 Box o You can use this
154. atus Job Cancel Checking the Detailed Information of Jobs Check the detailed information of each job Use the procedure below to check a job s information 1 Press the Status Job Cancel key 2 Press Printing Jobs Sending Jobs or Storing Jobs To check the scheduled transmission press Sending Jobs and then Scheduled Job 3 Select the job whose details you wish to check from j Status I Sheaweazoo ft the list and press Detail Ty lt a Taz Detailed information of the selected job is displayed Printing Jobs Sending Jobs Storing Jobs Device _ Paper Supplies E me eee icati mee Status RR 08 08 2009 10 10 E Use v or A to see the next or previous page of Job No Status Destination information 000080 Processing Job Type Destination Sending Job E mail ABCDE User Name User1 Job Name doc20070404115151 Accepted Time 10 10 10 08 08 2009 10 10 a In Sending Jobs you can check the destination by Job No Status Destination pressing Detail in Status Destination 000080 Processing Job Type Destination Sending Job E mail ABCDE User Name User1 Job Name doc20070404115151 Accepted Time 10 10 10 08 08 2009 10 10 7 7 Status Job Cancel Detail Job No 000081 Job Type Type Destination doc20070404131415 Status Sending Waiting 08 08 2009 10 10 Status Destination
155. ault output tray for printing from the copy or Document Box screen printing from the PC and printing of the received fax data There is a paper indicator in the front of the machine that shows whether there is paper in the Job Separator CAUTION Note that some paper types have a tendency to curl and may jam in the paper eject unit If the ejected paper slips or stacks unevenly turn the paper in the cassette over and try again NOTE e To ensure that paper is delivered to the Job Separator select the output destination or change the default setting For details refer to the Paper Output on page 8 13 e When removing paper from the Job Separator pull it out at an angle Key Counter Use the key counter to monitor machine usage The key counter offers a convenient solution for centralized management of copy volume for different departments in a large company Inserting the Key Counter Insert the key counter securely into the key counter slot NOTE When the key counter function is activated copies can only be made when a key counter is inserted If the key counter is not inserted Insert key counter will be displayed Appenadix 8 Appendix FAX Kit By installing the FAX kit fax send receive is enabled Also it is possible to use it as a network fax by using it with a computer When two FAX kits are installe
156. between 25 and 400 The procedure for using zoom copying is explained below 1 Press the Copy key 2 Place the originals on the platen 3 Set the original on the platen and press Layout Edit gt Zoom Ready O Cy Copies 4 Press Standard Zoom to use Auto Zoom Press or to change the displayed magnification as desired You can also enter the 7 al magnification directly using the numeric keys by 2 STMT am Ledger pressing Keys gt gt Ledger gt gt Legal 25 400 64 Ledger 2 etter When using Preset Zoom select the key of desired magnification 121 Legal gt gt Ledger When using XY Zoom press XY Zoom 08 08 2009 10 10 Press or to change the displayed magnifications of X horizontal and Y vertical You can also enter the magnification directly using the numeric keys by pressing Keys 1 Copies Press Original Orientation to select orientation of Ready t iy Aare the originals either Top Edge Top or Top Edge Left Then press OK 25 400 a sandara Meam Pl iginal Pg XY Zoom lace origina g 25 400 100 pmf Top Edge Top Keys 08 08 2009 10 10 5 Press OK 6 Press the Start key Copying begins Basic Operation Duplex Copying Produce two sided copies The following duplex options are available You can also create single sided copies from two sided originals or originals wi
157. ble as keyboard layouts the same as a PC keyboard Press the System Menu key Common Settings and then Change of Keyboard Layout to choose desired layout QWERTY layout is used here as an example You may use another layout following the same steps Entry Screens Lower case Leiter Entry Screen Use the keyboard to enter Limit 128 characters Input 0 characte Backspace AOAN annann BE o oe pee ioc ceoeen cancel a ok 08 08 2009 10 10 Display Key Description Display Displays entered characters Limit Display Displays maximum number of characters Cursor Key Press to move the cursor on the display Backspace Press to delete a character to the left of the cursor Keyboard Press a character to enter Upper case Press to use upper case letters Lower case Press to use lower case letters No Symbol Press to enter numbers and symbols Space Press to insert a space Appendix 10 Appendix Display Key Description Cancel Press to cancel entered characters and return to the screen before the entry OK Press to finalize entry and return to the screen before the entry Upper case Letter Entry Screen Use the keyboard to enter Limit 128 characters Input Ocharacters WIIG IIRC IIS ange S ee Bec R oOo a eee Sooeooooeeo Lower case No Symbol Space cancel a OK 08 08 2009 10 10 Numbe
158. box 10 10 2008 09 40 21 MB Search Name _ The document is marked with a checkmark 001 BY 0404200710574511 10 10 2008 09 50 21 MB oof 94 JE 0404200710574521 10 10 2008 10 00 21 MB You can join up to 10 documents Detail Preview NOTE To deselect press the checkbox again and Vv m ne remove the checkmark Ga Delete Store File Py Close 08 08 2009 10 10 4 Press Join 6 9 Document Box i Confirm the order of documents to combine File Name Date and Time 2008101010574501 10 10 2008 09 40 2008101010574511 10 10 2008 09 50 2008101010574521 10 10 2008 10 10 Size 21MB 21MB 21MB 08 08 2009 10 10 5 Arrange the documents into the order in which they are to be joined Highlight the document you want to rearrange and press Up or Down to move it to the correct place in the sequence 6 Press Next 7 Press File Name enter the file name for the joined document and press OK NOTE Enter up to 32 characters as the file name 8 Press Join and then press Yes in the confirmation screen The documents are joined NOTE After joining the original documents are left unchanged Delete the documents if they are no longer needed 6 10 Document Box Deleting Documents The procedure for deleting documents in a custom box is explained below 1 Press the Document Box key 2 Press Custom Box select the box c
159. can Resolution EI Ready to send Destination 4 Select the resolution Place original Scan Resolution 5 Press O K il Select fineness of scanning resolution The larger the number the better the i i image resolution Place original al 600x600dpi 400x400dpi 300x300dpi Ultra Fine dl ail F i p 200x400dpi 200x200dpi 200x100dpi Super Fine Fine Normal Add Shortcut Cancel aA K 08 08 2009 10 10 6 Specify the destination and press the Start key to start sending 5 18 Sending Functions Sharpness Select the sharpness of the image outline The table below shows the available settings item Detail Sharpen Emphasize the image outline Make letters and lines appear sharper Unsharpen Blur the image outline Can weaken a Moire effect grids appearing as wavelike patterns when scanning printed photos Use the procedure below to set the sharpness when sending scanned images 1 Press the Send key 2 Place the originals on the platen 3 Press Color Image Quality and then Sharpness 4 ral Ready o ard A Press 3 to 3 Unsharpen Sharpen to adjust Place original 1 the sharpness 5 Press OK Unsharpen Sharpen eae ae Ie ae ee ais nd 5 Add Shortcut Cancel 4l 08 08 2009 10 10 6 Specify the destination and press the Start key to start sending 5 19 Sending Functions Background Density Adjustment Lightens the
160. ccurred from the use of paper that does not conform to our specifications Choosing the Appropriate Paper This section describes guidelines for choosing paper Condition Avoid using paper with bent corners or that is curled dirty or torn Do not use paper that has a rough surface or paper fiber lint or that is especially delicate Use of paper in any of these conditions will not only deliver poor copies but may also cause jams and shorten the useful life of the machine Choose paper with a smooth and even surface however avoid paper with a treated surface as it may damage the drum or fusing unit Ingredient Do not use paper such as paper that has been surface treated or paper that contains plastic or carbon These paper may produce harmful fumes from the heat of printing and may damage the drum Be sure to use the standard paper that contains at least 80 pulp i e not more than 20 of the total paper content consists of cotton or other fibers Appendix 14 Appendix Supported Paper Sizes Paper of the following sizes is supported by the machine Measurements in the table take into account a 0 7 mm dimensional accuracy for length and width Corner angles must be 90 0 2 Cassette or Multi Multi Purpose Tray Purpose Tray A6 R 105 x 148 mm A3 297 x 420 mm B6 R 128 x 182 mm B4 257 x 364 mm Hagaki 100x148mm A4 297 x 210 mm Oufuku Hagaki 148 x 200 mm A4 R 210 x 297 mm Executive
161. cedure below to set the destination check before send 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Send and then Change of Entry Check for New Dest 3 Select Off or On 4 Press OK Setting the Default Send Screen Use this procedure to set the default screen displayed when you press the Send key The table below shows the available settings ltem Detail Destination Displays the destination screen when the Send key is pressed screen for sending Address Book Displays the address book when the Send key is pressed Use the procedure below to set the default send screen 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Send and then Change of Default Screen 3 Press Destination or Address Book 4 Press OK 8 30 Default Setting System Menu Document Box Settings The following settings are available for Document Box e Registering Editing Box 8 31 e Default Setting 8 31 e Job Box 8 31 e Quick Setup Registration 8 31 Registering Editing Box Creates a new box edits a box or checks details of a box in the custom box or deletes a box from the custom box For details refer to Using a Custom Box on page 6 2 Default Setting Sets the time at which documents in the custom box are automatically deleted For details refer to Setting the document deletion time on page 6 3 Job Box The following three operations can be done For details refer to each page shown below GE e Qu
162. chine starts scanning the originals When the current print job ends the reserved copy job is printed 3 15 Basic Operation Interrupt Copy This function allows you to pause the current jobs in progress when you need to make copies immediately When interruption copy ends the machine resumes the paused print jobs NOTE You can change the delay until interrupt copying is cancelled Change the delay as required For more information refer to nterrupt Clear Timer on page 8 50 Ready for interrupt copy cosy 1 Press the Interrupt key Shortcut 1 Ready for interrupt copy is displayed ve ariel The current print job is temporarily interrupted i z 2 sided 2in1 gt gt 2 sided Duplex Combine Staple gt Shortcut 6 Quick Setup Org Paper Image Quality Tayout Edit Savane Finishing SuD Status 08 08 2009 10 10 j Auto 100 Normal 0 r Shortcut 4 Paper Zoom Density selection 9 Shortcut 5 i off i j 2 Place the originals onto the machine for interrupt copy and configure the copy settings Press the Start key to start interrupt copying 4 When interrupt copying ends press the Interrupt key The machine resumes the paused print jobs 3 16 Basic Operation Staple Use this feature to staple your finished copies NOTE Stapling requires the optional built in finisher or document finisher The following stapling options and orientations are available Original Or
163. ck in place and close the front cover 11 Press the specified position to close left cover 1 Optional Document Processor Follow the steps below to clear paper jams in the optional document processor 1 Remove any paper from the original tray 2 Open the document processor top cover 10 25 Troubleshooting Optional Document Finisher Remove any paper If the original tears remove every loose scrap from inside the machine Lift up reverse unit Remove the paper If the original tears remove every loose scrap from inside the machine Remove the original by turning the dial C as shown in the figure Put reverse unit back in its original place and close the document processor top cover Reload the originals on the document processor tray If a misfeed occurs in the optional document finisher refer to the respective Operation Guides to clear the jam Troubleshooting Built in Finisher Follow the steps below to clear paper jams in the optional built in finisher 1 Remove any paper in the output section If the paper tears remove every loose scrap from inside the machine 2 Remove the output tray 3 Lift up the handle on left cover 1 and open left cover 1 10 27 Troubleshooting 4 Remove any paper If the paper tears remove every loose scrap from inside the machine 5 Press the indicated position to close left cover 1 6 Re attach the output tray
164. cument processor or on the platen 3 Press Layout Edit and then Page Ready to copy ape 4 Select the numbering format from 1 P 1 or 1 1 n ae 5 Select the page numbering position Auto 6 Tostart page numbering from a page other than the Tea i first page press or of 1st Page and select the 1 q pe starting page You can also enter the number with ca E the numeric keys after pressing Keys Keys Keys Orientation Cancel 4l OK 08 08 2009 10 10 7 Tostart the numbering with a number other than 1 press or of Start Number and enter the starting number You can also enter the number with the numeric keys after pressing Keys 8 If you do not want page numbering through to the last page press Last Page Select Manual and use or to enter the final page to be numbered a negative number of pages counting backwards from the last page Then press OK You can seta value up to 10 You can also enter the number with the numeric keys after pressing Keys 4 23 Copying Functions 10 11 12 The total number of pages n in the format 1 n can be changed manually Press Denominator and select Manual Press or to enter the total number of pages and press OK You can also enter the number with the numeric keys after pressing Keys Press Original Orientation to choose orientation of the originals either Top Edge Top o
165. d the units can be connected to two different telephone lines which will enable quicker message transmission to a number of recipients If one of the lines is dedicated to receiving the busy line time can be reduced For further details refer to Fax Kit Operation Guide Expansion Memory Image storage memory 128 MB that allows the machine to receive more pages of incoming faxed originals Expansion memory should only be installed or removed by the service representative Data Security Kit The Data Security Kit overwrites all unnecessary data in the storage area of the hard disk so that it cannot be retrieved The Data Security Kit encrypts data before storing it in the hard disk It guarantees higher security because no data cannot be decoded by ordinary output or operations Printed Document Guard Kit This prevents the unauthorized copying and or transmission of documents that contain important confidential or personal information When a document is printed from a computer this feature imprints a special pattern on the document When anyone attempts to copy or send that document on this machine the machine detects the pattern and protects the information by printing the document in blank prohibiting transmission Appendix 9 Appendix Character Entry Method To enter characters for a name use the on display keyboard in the touch panel following the steps as explained below NOTE QWERTY QWERTZ and AZERTY are availa
166. d Web Server Failed to send via FTP Select On of the FTP settings on the Embedded Web Server 2 19 Failed to send i FAX Select On of the i FAX settings on the Embedded Web Server FAX System S Operation Guide Chapter 8 Internet Faxing i FAX Option Failed to send the e mail Failed to send i FAX Check the sender address of SMTP on the Embedded Web Server 2 19 Failed to send via FTP Select On of the secure protocol settings on the Embedded Web Server 2 19 Failed to send via FTP Check the followings of the FTP server Is FTPS available Is the encryption available Failed to send via SMB Failed to send via FTP Check the network and SMB settings Check the network and FTP settings The network cable is connected The hub is not operating properly The server is not operating properly Host name and IP address Port number Failed to send the e mail Failed to send i FAX Check the network and Embedded Web Server The network cable is connected The hub is not operating properly POP3 server name of the POP3 user SMTP server name 10 12 Troubleshooting Error Message Failed to send via FTP Failed to send the e mail Failed to send i FAX Corrective Actions Check the followings of the FTP server ls FTP available The server is not operating properly Check the network
167. d press OK Login User Name Login Password 0099 f IK K feos Let ota Nees NOTE Refer to the Character Entry Method on a gzaccount Appendix 10 for details on entering characters E mail Address IC Card Information abcd efg com gt Empty 8 Enter the login user name and E mail address following 6 and 7 above l Register 08 08 2009 10 10 9 Press Change of Login Password and then Password 10 Enter the login password and press OK 11 Press Confirm Password 12 Enter the same login password to confirm and press OK 13 Press OK 14 Press Change of Access Level 15 Select the user access privilege and press OK 16 Press Change of Account Name 17 Select the account and press OK User Account Name i Select account to which this user will be attached DEE lt NOTE Select Name and ID from the Sort pull down 01 Account 00001000 menu to sort the account list Search Name Search ID Press Search Name or Search ID to search by aan account name or account ID 02 Account 00002000 03 Account 00003000 04 Account 00004000 05 Account 00005000 08 08 2009 10 10 18 Press Register to add a new user on the local user list 11 6 Management Changing User Properties User properties can be changed Types of user properties that could be changed may be different depending on user access privilege
168. ding options are available Original Binding Left Originals with facing pages are copied from left to right Binding Right Originals with facing pages are copied from right to left NOTE The following sizes of originals and paper are supported in Two sided to One sided and Book to One sided Original Ledger Letter R A3 B4 A4 R B5 R A5 R and 8K Paper Letter A4 B5 and 16K You may change paper size and reduce or enlarge copy to match that size Book to Two sided Facing pages Facing pages Produces two sided copies from an open book original gt Two sided gt Facing pages with facing pages E gt J gt NOTE The following sizes of originals and paper are supported in Book to Two sided mode Original Ledger Letter R A3 B4 A4 R B5 R A5 R and 8K Paper Letter A4 and B5 ltt N Original The procedure for using two sided duplex copying is explained below 1 Press the Copy key Place the originals on the platen Select the desired Duplex option 2 3 Press Layout Edit and then Duplex Ready to copy saad 4 5 If you choose 1 sided gt gt 2 sided or 2 sided gt gt 2 sided select the binding edge of the Place orginal finished copies of Finishing eee r If you choose Book gt gt 2 sided press Book gt gt 2 oo sided or Book gt gt
169. dress of the PC to receive the data Up to 64 characters Path Path to the receiving folder such as follows Up to 128 For example User ScanData characters Login User Name User name to access the PC Up to 64 For example abcdnet james smith characters Login Password Password to access the PC Up to 64 characters i To specify a port number different from the default 139 enter using the format host name port number e g SMBhostname 140 To enter the IPv6 address enclose the address in brackets e g Bae3 9a0 cd05 b1d2 28a 1fc0 a1 10ae 140 3 24 Basic Operation For send to folder FTP Max Data to be entered characters Host Name Host name or IP address of FTP server Up to 64 characters Path Path to the receiving folder Up to 128 For example User ScanData characters Otherwise the data will be saved in the home directory Login User Name FTP server login user name Up to 64 characters Login Password FTP server login password Up to 64 characters A To specify a port number different from the default 21 enter using the format host name port number e g FTPhostname 140 To enter the IPv6 address enclose the address in brackets e g Bae3 9a0 cd05 b1d2 28a 1fc0 a1 10ae 140 Aa Ready to send Destination 5 Upon completion of all entries press Connection Pace original 1 Test to check the connection Folder Path Entry S
170. during removal be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the machine Scraps of paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming e Discard paper that has jammed in the optional document finisher A page affected by a paper jam will be printed again CAUTION The fixing unit is extremely hot Take sufficient care when working in this area as there is A a danger of getting burned Cassette 1 Follow the steps below to clear paper jams in cassette 1 1 Pull up left cover 1 lever and open the left cover 1 2 Remove any paper 3 Pull out cassette 1 10 16 Troubleshooting 4 Remove the paper If the paper tears remove every loose scrap from inside the machine 5 Push cassette 1 back in place securely 6 Press the specified position to close left cover 1 Cassette 2 Follow the steps below to clear paper jams in cassette 2 1 Open left cover 2 2 Remove any paper 10 17 Troubleshooting 3 Pull out cassette 2 4 Remove the paper If the paper tears remove every loose scrap from inside the machine 5 Push cassette 2 back in place securely 6 Close left cover 2 Optional Cassettes 3 and 4 Follow the steps below to clear paper jams in cassettes 3 or 4 when using the optional paper feeder 1 Open left cover 3 Ai WAY S 2 Remove any paper Vv If the pap
171. e Manual density Auto Set to Auto density Use the procedure below to select the default density 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Common Settings v Next of Function Defaults v and then Change of Density 3 Select the default density 4 Press OK Zoom Select the enlarged reduced default when paper size sending size changed after the originals set The available default settings are shown below Item Description Copy send save at actual size 100 Automatically reduce or enlarge the originals to match paper size sending size Use the procedure below to select the default zoom setting 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Common Settings v Next of Function Defaults v and then Change of Zoom 3 Select the default zoom setting 4 Press OK File Name Entry Set an automatically entered name default for jobs Additional information such as Date and Time and Job No can also be set NOTE Refer to page 4 35 and page 5 25 for name entry Use the procedure below to set the default file name 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Common Settings v Next of Function Defaults v and then Change of File Name Entry 3 Press File Name to enter the file name in not more than 32 characters 8 18 Default Setting System Menu NOTE Refer to the Character Entry Method on page Appendix 10 for details on entering characters Press OK Press
172. e heat of printing up to 200 C or 392 F Preprinted Paper Preprinted paper must conform to the specifications listed on the page 2 of the Appendix The colored ink must be able to withstand the heat of printing It must be resistant to silicone oil as well Do not use paper with a treated surface such as glossy paper used for calendars Recycled Paper Recycled paper must conform to the specifications listed on the page 2 of the Appendix however its whiteness may be considered separately NOTE Before purchasing recycled paper in volume try testing a sample to ensure that the print quality Appendix 20 Appendix Specifications NOTE Specifications are subject to change without notice Machine Item Description Type Desktop Printing Method Electrophotography by semiconductor laser Supported Original Types Sheet Book 3 dimensional objects maximum original size 11 x 17 A3 Original Feed System Fixed Paper Cassette 1 2 60 to 120 g m Weight Multi Purpose Tray 45 to 200 g m Paper Type Cassette 1 2 Plain Rough Vellum Recycled Preprinted Bond Color Colour Prepunched Thick Letterhead High Quality Custom 1 to 8 Duplex Same as Simplex Multi Purpose Tray Plain Transparency OHP film Rough Vellum Labels Recycled Preprinted Bond Cardstock Hagaki Color Colour Prepunched Thick Letterhead Thick Envelope High Qu
173. e in the location you are from GMT Use the procedure below to set the time difference 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Date Timer and then Change of Time Zone 3 Select the location NOTE Press A or v to select the location 4 Press Off or On of Summer Time and press OK NOTE If you select a region that does not utilize summer time the summer time setting screen will not appear Auto Panel Reset If no jobs are run for a certain period of time automatically reset settings and return to the default setting gi NOTE Refer to page 8 14 for the default settings Auto Panel Reset ON OFF Select to use Auto Panel Reset or not Use the procedure below to specify the auto panel reset setting 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press x Date Timer and then Change of Auto Panel Reset 3 Press Off or On 4 Press OK 8 47 Default Setting System Menu Panel Reset Timer If you select On for Auto Panel Reset set the amount of time to wait before Auto Panel Reset Options are between 5 and 495 seconds every five seconds NOTE If you select Off for Auto Panel Reset the time display does not appear Use the procedure below to set the reset time 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press x Date Timer and then Change of Panel Reset Timer 3 Press or to enter the time until Auto Panel Reset is turned on You cannot use the numeric keys to enter this v
174. e in the sequence of the page numbers 5 Click Properties button The Properties dialog box appears 3 19 Basic Operation FERIE 6 Select the Basic tab and click Page Size button to select the paper size Basic Layout Finishing Imaging Publishing Job Advanced Paper Pin size panoa e Source Auto source selection Media type Auto media selection x Destination Printer defa Orientation Sec To print on the special paper such as thick paper or transparency click the Media Type menu and select the media type la fal fa l4 j Portrait F Rotated a Landscape Copies a a Number of copies 1 ay Collate T Print on both sides e eo r 4 KYOCERA Restore Defaults About Profile 7 Click Source and select the paper source NOTE If you choose Auto Select paper is supplied automatically from the paper source loaded with paper of optimum size and type To print on special paper such as envelope or thick paper place it on the multi purpose tray and select MP Tray 8 Select paper orientation either Portrait or Landscape to match the orientation of the document Selecting Rotate 180 will print the document rotated 180 9 Click OK button to return to the Print dialog box 10 Click OK button to start printing 3 20 Basic Operation Sending This machine can send a scanned image as an attachment to an E mail message or to a PC linked to the ne
175. e procedure below to adjust the density when scanning the originals The table below shows the available settings Manual Adjust density using 7 or 13 levels Auto Optimum density is selected according to the density of the original The procedure for adjusting the density is explained below Press the Send key 2 Place the originals on the platen 3 Press Color Image Quality and then Density 4 El Ready to send Destination When selecting manual density adjustment press Place original 1 3 to 3 Lighter Darker to adjust density i When selecting auto density adjustment press Auto Place original Lighter Normal Darker 5 Press OK TE FE E RE E Cancel l 08 08 2009 10 10 6 Specify the destination and press the Start key to start sending 5 17 Sending Functions Scan Resolution Select the fineness of scanning resolution The finer the scanning becomes the larger the number becomes the better the image quality becomes However better resolution also results in larger file size file capacity and longer scanning and sending times The selectable resolution is 200x100dpi Normal 200x200dpi Fine 200x400dpi Super Fine 300x300dpi 400x400dpi Ultra Fine or 600x600dpi The procedure for adjusting the scanning resolution when sending a scanned image is explained below 1 Press the Send key 2 Place the originals on the platen 3 Press Color Image Quality and then S
176. e removed If this package is used in a product Eric Young should be given attribution as the author of the parts of the library used This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in documentation online or textual provided with the package Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young eay cryptsoft com The word cryptographic can be left out if the rouines from the library being used are not cryptographic related 4 Ifyou include any Windows specific code or a derivative thereof from the apps directory application code you must include an acknowledgment This product includes software written by Tim Hudson tjh cryptsoft com THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FI
177. e setting restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON again For detailed information on restarting the system refer to Restarting the System on page 8 63 GE RA Stateless Settings Select whether or not to use RA Stateless The RA Stateless settings are available when selecting On for TCP IP IPv6 The default setting is On Use the procedure below 1 Press the System Menu key Press System Next of Network and then Next of TCP IP Setting Press Next of Pv6 2 3 4 Press Change of RA Stateless 5 Press On or Off of RA Stateless When selecting On IP Address 1 to 5 Stateless appears 6 Press OK 7 After changing the setting restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON again For detailed information on restarting the system refer to Restarting the System on page 8 63 DHCP IPv6 Settings Select whether or not to use the DHCP IPv6 server The DHCP IPv6 Settings are available when selecting On for TCP IP IPv6 The default setting is On Use the procedure below 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press System Next of Network and then Next of TCP IP Setting 3 Press Next of IPv6 4 Press Change of DHCP 8 65 Default Setting System Menu 5 Press On or Off of DHCP When selecting On IP Address Stateful appears 6 Press OK 7 After changing the setting restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON again For detailed information on r
178. e the originals on the platen Press Org Paper Finishing and then Staple Select the staple position Press Original Orientation to choose orientation of the originals either Top Edge Top or Top Edge Left Then press OK Press OK Press the Start key Copying begins Basic Operation Printing Printing from Applications Follow the steps below to print documents from applications NOTE To print the document from applications install the printer driver on your computer from the supplied CD ROM Product Library 1 Create a document using an application 2 Click File and select Print in the application The Print dialog box appears 3 Click the W button next to the Name field and select PAS this machine from the list Nome Properties Status Ready I Reverse pages Type Kyocera SM he J Print as image Where I Print to file Print Range Copies and Adjustments C All J Number of copies 1 C Curent page W Collate C Pages from f1 to 9 IV Shrink oversized pages to paper size Print Even and Odd Pages I Expand small pages to paper size IV Auto rotate and center pages IV Comments Preview K 8 264 r 11 68 A r Color Managed On printer Units Inches Zoom 100 0 Printing Tips Cancel 4 Enter the desired print quantity in the Number of copies box Enter any number up to 999 When there is more than one document select Collate to print out one by on
179. eady to send Place original t Send and Store 0006 06 BOX001 0007 07 BOX002 0008 08 BOX003 0009 09 BOX004 0010 10 BOX005 Add Shortcut 08 08 2009 10 10 1 Press the Send key Place the originals on the platen Press Advanced Setup vv and then Send and Store Press On Select the Custom Box in which the copy is to be stored If a password entry screen for the Custom Box appears enter the password You can view information on the selected Custom Box by pressing Detail Press OK Specify the destination and press the Start key Transmission begins and a copy of the transmitted document is stored in the specified Custom Box 5 30 Sending Functions FTP Encrypted TX This allows you to encrypt documents when you send them If you select On in this option you can then select the encryption method in the basic send screen Use the procedure below to scan and send originals as encrypted files 1 Press the Send Key 2 Place the originals in the document processor or on the platen 3 Press Advanced Setup v and then FTP Encrypted TX 4 Press On 5 Press OK NOTE Click Advanced gt Secure Protocols in the Embedded Web Server Be sure that SSL of Secure Protocol Settings is On and one or more effective encryption are selected in Clientside Settings For details refer to the Embedded Web Server Operation Guide Color
180. ect Metric or Inch for paper size Standard Available options are as follows Sizes 1 Inch models Ledger Legal Letter Letter R Statement R 8 5x13 5 Oficio Il Executive Metric models A3 B4 A4 A4 R B5 B5 R A5 R B6 R A6 R Folio Standard Select a standard size except that selected in Standard Sizes 1 Sizes 2 Inch models A3 B4 A4 A4 R B5 B5 R A5 R B6 R A6 R Folio 8K 16K 16K R Metric models Ledger Legal Letter Letter R Statement R 8 5x13 5 Oficio Ill Executive 8K 16K 16K R Others Select special standard sizes or custom sizes ISO B5 Envelope 10 Commercial 10 Envelope 9 Commercial 9 Envelope 6 Commercial 6 3 4 Envelope Monarch Envelope DL Envelope C5 Envelope C4 Hagaki Oufuku Hagaki Youkei 4 Youkei 2 Enter a size not displayed in the standard sizes Inch models H 5 83 to 17 in 0 01 increments V 3 86 to 11 69 in 0 01 increments Metric models V 98 to 297 mm in 1 mm increments H 148 to 432 mm in 1 mm increments Media Type Plain 105 g m or less Transparency Rough Vellum 64 g m or less Labels Recycled Preprint Bond Cardstock Color Prepunched Letterhead Envelope Thick 106 g m and more High Quality Custom 1 8 Refer to Adding a Custom Size and Media Type for Paper to Print on page 8 4 for selecting Custom 1 4 for Custom Paper Size Refer to Paper Weight on page 8 7 for selecting Custom 1 8 from
181. ed for faxing This is displayed when two optional FAX kits are installed 11 18 Management Total selected for Copier Printer Count ltem Detail Print Restriction Total Limits the total number of sheets used for copying and printing Scan Restriction Others Limits the number of sheets scanned excludes copying FAX TX Restriction Limits the number of sheets sent by fax This is displayed when the optional fax kit is installed FAX Port Restriction Restricts the ports used for faxing This is displayed when two optional FAX kits are installed Applying Restriction Restriction can be applied in two modes as follows Item Description Off No restriction given Counter Limit Restricts the print counter in one page increments up to 9 999 999 copies Reject Usage Restriction is applied Select Off Use Port 1 Only or Use Port 2 Only as the FAX Port Restriction setting Use the procedure below to select a restriction method 1 Follow steps 1 to 4 of Adding an Account on page 11 16 2 Press Change for the item to be restricted 3 Select the restriction mode ij Restrict use of the functions If Counter Limit is selected press or numeric keys to select the number of pages 4 9999999 Reject Usage Ba Cancel J 4 08 08 2009 10 10 4 Press OK 5 Repeat steps 2 to 4 for other accounts to be restricted 6 Press Reg
182. ed on the touch panel Add staples Has any of the document finisher run out of staples If the staples are depleted the machine will stop and the location of staple depletion will be indicated on the touch panel Leave the machine on and follow the instruction to replace the staple case Press Continue to print without stapling Press Cancel to cancel the job Add toner Replace the toner container Box is not found This job is canceled because the specified box cannot be found Press End Box limit exceeded Document box is full and no further storage is available Job is canceled Press End Repeat Copy box is full and no further repeat copy is available Press Continue to print scanned pages Press Cancel to cancel the job Cannot connect to Authentication Server An error has occurred when connecting to the authentication server Refer to Responding to Authentication Server Connection Error for the error message and corrective actions 10 6 Troubleshooting Error Message Cannot duplex print on this paper Checkpoints Did you select a paper size media type that cannot be duplex printed Corrective Actions Select the available paper type Press Continue to print without using Duplex Reference Page Cannot execute this job This job is canceled because it is restricted by Job Accounting Press End Cannot o
183. ee de ed dpa e eae of teeta Pe ee eee EA 4 2 Contents Paper Selection iii i hcg bar obs beaded dai ed mad ote ee eed pati eee 4 4 Mixed Sized OriginalS 0000 c teens 4 7 Original Orientations es asiaani eRe ee ee eek Wied eae woe a ee Bei ah a ek 4 10 Output Destination 0 0 teen eee 4 12 Combine Mode secs cede rGe ny ai ma aa arin a tte eke eee ede e ee abe ae donde bs 4 13 Margin Centering Mode 0000 e een tenes 4 15 Border Erase iAcviia gaia da evita ete a whieh ada aged TEA dee 4 17 Booklet from Sheets 0 00 t eee e ete eee 4 19 Cover Mode creais ete erage ed eed deed RE KORE eRe eee a teed ey deeb eae ees 4 21 Form Overlay 00 ccc tenets 4 22 Page Number rsd sraa eda eed ied ee ee oa ee idee de Wooded a dais 4 23 Memo Modo 4 iaite eerie amp alte aceuace gt ERITI E AE OARE I ORERE E bt aa atennet ovis 4 25 Image Repeat Double Copy 0 6 00 c ete eee 4 27 ECORI era a recs cota cotanen eee E T uate ies EE ececr ane 4 29 Sharpness Adjust v1 28 05 ov sie eee devia adda oH a BEEP ale a ee Dede eb a eee 4 30 Continuous SCAN isc2 2si4s 2eae tides Ca oug ghd tea E a betes haere ste tae es 4 31 Auto Image Rotation 203 2 20404 rakasa a tees a A se eee eee et eehe Gee e aS ees 4 32 Negative Mago sari reanna a eed een ed were be wed Vy al EIA EA Pe Gee ee wee ee 4 32 Miror Image s disaa aie dies Yad bide ela eae eae de ee Ve bd baa ee i 4 33 Job Finish NOVCI rs sc lt ut4uee dawn iSi
184. eeled from the carrier sheet Adhesives that stick to the drum or rollers and peeled labels remaining in the machine may cause a failure When printing onto labels you must be liable for the print quality and possible trouble Labels consist of three layers as shown in the illustration The adhesive layer contains materials that are easily affected by the force applied in the machine Top sheet The carrier sheet bears the top sheet until the label is IE Aahesive layer used This composition of labels may cause more i problems Carrier sheet The label surface must be covered completely with the top sheet Gaps between labels may cause peeling of labels resulting in a serious failure Some label paper has large margins on the top sheet When using such paper do not peel these margins from the carrier sheet before completing output Allowed Not allowed a Top sheet Carrier sheet Use label paper that conforms to the following specifications Item Specifications Top sheet weight 44 to 74 g m Basis weight 104 to 151 g m overall paper weight Top sheet thickness 0 086 to 0 107 mm Appendix 19 Appendix Overall paper thickness 0 115 to 0 145 mm Moisture content 4 to 6 composite Colored Paper Colored paper must conform to the specifications listed on the page 2 of the Appendix In addition the pigments in the paper must be able to withstand th
185. en Next of TCP IP Setting Press Change of TCP IP Press On and then press OK Press Change of Pv4 Press DHCP i Set TCP IP IPv4 pm ai Subnet Mask 0 0 0 0 Default Gateway 0 0 0 0 on On Off DHCP Bonjour Auto IP Cancel J amp OK 08 08 2009 10 10 7 Press Off of DHCP and then press OK 8 Press Bonjour 2 14 Preparation before Use DHCP Seitings 11 12 13 14 Press Off of Bonjour and then press OK Press IP Address and enter the address using the numeric keys Press Subnet Mask and enter the address using the numeric keys Press Default Gateway and enter the address using the numeric keys Check if all the address entries are correct and press OK After changing the setting restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON again For detailed information on restarting the system refer to Restarting the System on page 8 63 Select whether or not to use the DHCP server The default setting is On Use the procedure below Bonjour Settings O N O O Aa OW Press the System Menu key Press System Next of Network and then Next of TCP IP Setting Press Change of TCP IP Press On and then press OK Press Change of IPv4 Press DHCP Press On or Off of DHCP and then press OK After changing the setting restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON again Fo
186. eparation before Use Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Multi Purpose Tray To fix the type of paper to be used in the multi purpose tray specify the paper size When using other than a plain paper specify the media type Item Description Auto Paper size is automatically detected and selected Select whether the paper is in Metric size or in Inch size Standard Sizes 1 Select from the standard sizes Selectable paper sizes are as follows Inch size Ledger Letter R Letter Legal Statement R Executive 8 5x13 5 and Oficio II Metric size A3 A4 R A4 A5 R A6 R B4 R B5 R B5 B6 R and Folio Standard Sizes 2 Select from the standard sizes not included in Standard Sizes 1 Selectable paper sizes are as follows Inch size A3 A4 R A4 A5 R A6 R B4 R B5 R B5 B6 R Folio 8K 16K R and 16K Metric size Ledger Letter R Letter Legal Statement R Executive 8 5x13 5 Oficio Il 8K 16K R and 16K Others Select from special standard sizes and custom sizes Selectable paper sizes are as follows ISO B5 Envelope 10 Commercial 10 Envelope 9 Commercial 9 Envelope 6 Commercial 6 3 4 Envelope Monarch Envelope DL Envelope C5 Envelope C4 Hagaki Oufuku Hagaki Youkei 4 Youkei 2 Enter the size not included in the standard size Selectable paper sizes are as follows Inch size X Horizontal 5 83 17 in 0 01 increments Y Vertical 3 86 11 69 in 0 01
187. er is selected in Compatibility i Only displayed when Acrobat 4 0 and later is selected in Compatibility 13 From Copying of Text Images Others select Disable or Enable 5 15 Sending Functions The table below shows the available settings Disable Prohibit the copying of text and objects on the PDF file Enable Can copy text and objects on the PDF file 14 Press OK three times to return to Original Sending Data Format 15 Specify the destination and press the Start key to start sending Image Quality Select image quality suitable to the type of original The table below shows the quality options ltem Detail Text Photo Text and photos together Photo For photos taken with a camera Text Only text no photos for OCR For documents to be read by OCR This function is only available for black and white mode Use the procedure below to select the quality when sending scanned originals 1 Press the Send key 2 Place the originals on the platen 3 Press Color Image Quality and then Original Image ral a oe A 4 Select the original image Place original Original Image 5 Press OK Select original image type for best results for OCR For documents to be read by OCR mS Cancel jel OK 08 08 2009 10 10 6 Specify the destination and press the Start key to start sending 5 16 Sending Functions Adjusting Density Use th
188. er of sto red jobs Use or the numeric keys to enter a number Set this number to 0 to not retain any jobs You can enter any number between 0 and 50 NOTE If you enter a value of 0 zero no jobs are stored 4 Press OK The maximum number of stored jobs is Cancel a OK set 08 08 2009 10 10 Printing a Document You can print the documents stored in the Repeat Copy box Use the procedure below to print a document Press the Document Box key Press Job Box Select Repeat Copy box and press Open Select the document to print and press Print Repeat Copy 08 08 2009 10 10 5 If the document is protected by a password enter the password using the numeric keys 6 Press Start Print to start printing The Repeat Copy box job will be deleted when the main power switch is turned off 6 16 Document Box Automatic Delete Setting for Temporary Documents This setting specifies that documents such as Private Printing Quick Copying or Proof and Hold Printing saved temporarily in the job box are automatically deleted after they have been saved for a set time The table below shows the available settings ltem Detail Temporary documents are not automatically deleted However the temporary documents will be deleted when the power is turned off 1 hour Documents are deleted after 1 hour 4 hours Documents are deleted after 4 hours 1 day Documents a
189. er tears remove every loose scrap from inside the machine a 10 18 Troubleshooting 3 Pull out the cassette in use 4 Remove the paper 5 Push the cassette back in place securely 6 Close left cover 3 Multi Purpose Tray Follow the steps below to clear paper jams in the multi purpose tray 1 Remove the paper from the multi purpose tray 2 If paper is jammed inside pull the paper toward you to remove 10 19 Troubleshooting Inside the Left Covers 1 2 and 3 Follow the steps below to clear paper jams inside left cover 1 2 or 3 when using the optional paper feeder 1 Pull up left cover 1 lever and open the left cover 1 2 Remove the paper If the paper tears remove every loose scrap from inside the machine 3 Remove any paper in the output section If the paper tears remove every loose scrap from inside the machine 4 Press the specified position to close left cover 1 10 20 Troubleshooting Duplex Unit Follow the steps below to clear paper jams in the duplex unit 1 Pull up left cover 1 lever and open the left cover 2 Remove the paper If the paper tears remove every loose scrap from inside the machine 3 Lift up the duplex unit and remove the paper 4 Press the specified position to close left cover 1 10 21 Troubleshooting Du
190. er the name for a copy job and press OK Ready to copy File Name Entry i Add a fie name To add date and time press Date and Time To Additional information such as Job No and Date and Time can also be set add job number Job No Added information is ECD displayed in Additional Info Additional Info Job No NOTE The maximum length of the file name is Job No Date and Time Add Shortcut is 08 08 2009 10 10 5 Press OK 6 Press the Start key to start copying Priority Override Suspends a current job and gives the selected job priority for copying The suspended job resumes after Priority Override copying is finished NOTE The current job that is selected as Priority Override cannot be suspended The procedure for using Priority Override is explained below 1 Press the Copy key 2 Place the originals on the platen 3 Press Advanced Setup and then Priority Override 4 Press On to select Priority Override 5 Press OK 6 Press the Start key The current copy job is suspended and the copy job selected in Priority Override starts The suspended job resumes after Priority Override copying is finished 4 35 Copying Functions Repeat Copy Enable additional copies in the desired quantity as necessary after a copy job is completed For confidential documents you can set up a pass code for the use of Repeat Copy In such a case the correct pass c
191. eration Procedure In this Operation Guide continuous operation of the keys on the touch panel is as follows Description in this Operation Guide Actual procedure Press Copy Press Copy Next of Quick v Setup v twice and then Press Next of Quick Setup Change of Original Image v Press v twice Press Change of Original Image xxvii Originals and Paper Sizes This section explains the notation used in this guide when referring to sizes of originals or paper sizes As with A4 B5 and Letter which may be used either in the horizontal or vertical direction horizontal direction is indicated by an additional letter R in order to indicate the orientation of the original paper Placement direction Vertical direction oa Original Paper For the originals paper dimension A is longer than B Indicated size A4 B5 A5 B6 A6 16K Letter Statement Horizontal direction fa i z Original Paper For the originals paper dimension A is shorter than B A4 R B5 R A5 R B6 R A6 R 16K R Letter R Statement R i The size of the original paper that can be used depends on the function and source tray For further details refer to the page detailing that function or source tray Icons on the Touch Panel The following icons are used to indicate originals and paper p
192. ering Print Jobs This function allows you to select a queued print job and raise its output priority The procedure for reordering print jobs is explained below 1 Press the Status Cancel key 2 Press the Printing Jobs 3 Select the job to be assigned a higher priority and press Move Up pide x The priority of the selected job is increased by 1 doc10102008095050 InProcess To further raise the job s priority press Move Up 000002 10 10 09 55 doc10102008095510 Waiting j i 7 again Each time you press Move Up the priority 000003 10 10 10 00 doc10102008091000 Waiting increases by 1 Pause All Cancel Priority Moveup 9 m Detail Print Jobs Override Printing Jobs Storing Jobs a Mia 08 08 2009 10 10 7 14 Status Job Cancel Checking the Remaining Amount of Toner and Paper Check the remaining amount of toner paper and staples on the touch panel Use the procedure below to check the remaining amounts 1 Press the Status Job Cancel key 2 Press Paper Supplies Check the remaining amount of toner and the status of a waste toner box in Toner Information and the remaining amount of paper in each paper source in Paper g Plain Staple A OK g Plain L Plain g Plain L Plain Sending Jobs Storing Jobs ice Status 08 08 200 The items you can check are described below Remaining amount of toner You can check the remaining amount of each color toner as
193. es NetWare Novell s network management software that is able to run on a variety of operating systems POP3 Post Office Protocol 3 A standard protocol to receive E mail from the server in which the mail is stored on the Internet or an intranet PostScript A page description language developed by Adobe Systems It enables flexible font functions and highly functional graphics allowing higher quality printing The first version called Level 1 was launched in 1985 followed by Level 2 that enabled color printing and two byte languages e g Japanese in 1990 In 1996 Level 3 was released as an update for the Internet access and PDF format as well as gradual improvements in implementation technologies PPM prints per minute This indicates the number of A4 size printouts made in one minute Printer Driver The software to enable you to print data created on any application software The printer driver for the machine is contained in the CD ROM enclosed in the package Install the printer driver on the computer connected to the machine RA Siateless The IPv6 router communicates transmits information such as the global address prefix using ICMPv 6 This information is the Router Advertisement RA ICMPv 6 stands for Internet Control Message Protocol and is a IPv6 standard defined in the RFC 2463 Internet Control Message Protocol ICMPv6 for the Internet Protocol Version 6 IPv6 Specification Appendix 29 Ap
194. ess or numeric keys to enter a particular Address Number 1 2500 To have the number assigned automatically enter 0000 NOTE Address Number is an ID for a destination You can select any available number out of 2 500 numbers for contacts and 500 numbers for groups If you specify an address number that is already in use an error message appears when you press Register and the number cannot be registered If you set 0000 as the address number the address is registered under the lowest available number 5 Press OK The screen shown in step 3 reappears 6 Press Change of Name 7 Enter the destination name up to 32 characters to be displayed on the Address Book and press OK The screen shown in step 3 reappears NOTE Refer to the Character Entry Method on page Appendix 10 for details on entering characters 8 Press E mail to add an e mail address SMB to add a folder on the computer or FTP to add an FTP folder The procedure differs depending on the transmission method selected 8 51 Default Setting System Menu E mail Address Press Change of E mail Address enter the E mail address and press OK The table below explains the items to be entered NOTE Refer to the Character Entry Method on page Appendix 10 for details on entering characters The Folder FTP Address Press Change of Host Name Path Login User Name and Login Password enter the information f
195. ess Keys and enter the port number To set a proxy server HTTPS 1 Press Keyboard of Proxy Server HTTPS enter the proxy address and press OK 2 Press Keys and enter the port number To set domains for which no proxy is used 1 Press Keyboard of Do Not Use Proxy for Following Domains enter the domain name and press OK NOTE Refer to the Character Entry Method on page Appendix 10 for details on entering characters 4 Press OK 8 59 Default Setting System Menu Applications You can install and use applications that will make your day to day use of this machine more efficient Installing Applications You can install new applications Use the procedure below to install an application 1 Insert the USB memory containing the application to be installed into the USB memory slot A1 NOTE If Removable Memory is recognized Displaying files appears press No 2 Press the System Menu key 3 Press v and then Application NOTE If user login administration is disabled the user authentication screen appears Enter your login user name and password and then press Login For this you need to login with administrator privileges Refer to Adding a User on page 11 5 for the default login user name and password Press Add Select the application to be installed and press Install You can view detailed information on the selected application by pressing Detail 6 When
196. essreneranra aekin 2 12 e Network Setup LAN Cable Connection ccccccccccececeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 14 nstaling Sonwa nre 2 17 e Embedded Web Server Settings for E mail eeeeeeeeeeees 2 18 Oding E Mala E 2 19 s Loading Fapa osisssa eirinen iei 2 21 a Loading Onginal Saes re neiniudecuiatiesnninsatdennaiisimieapoenieindsaninaatucheined 2 32 2 1 Preparation before Use Check the Accessories Check that the following accessories are included e Operation Guide This Guide e CD ROM Product Library Documents Contained in the Included CD ROM The following documents are contained in the included CD ROM Product Library Refer to them as necessary Documents Embedded Web Server Operation Guide Printer Driver User Guide Network FAX Driver Operation Guide TWAIN WIA Driver Operation Guide Network Print Monitor for Direct Printing Operation Guide Network Tool Viewer User Guide Scan to SMB PC Setup Guide PRESCRIBE Commands Technical Reference PRESCRIBE Commands Command Reference Data Security Kit E Operation Guide FAX System S Operation Guide 2 2 Preparation before Use Determining the Connection Method and Preparing Cables Check the method to connect the equipment to a PC or network and prepare the necessary cables Connection Example Determine the method to connect the equipment to a PC or network by referring to the illustration below Connecting a scanner to your PC network wi
197. estarting the system refer to Restarting the System on page 8 63 Protocol Detail The table below lists the network related function settings The network related functions are available when TCP IP is On Deseiation Default Restarting the P Setting System NetBEUI Selects whether or not to receive documents using NetBEUI LPD Select whether or not to receive documents using LPD as the network protocol SMTP Select whether or not to send e mail E mail TX using SMTP POP3 Select whether or not to receive e mail E mail RX using POP3 FTP Client Select whether or not to send On Transmission documents using FTP When selecting On set the FTP Port Number Use Port 21 the FTP default port 21 FTP Server Select whether or not to receive On Reception documents using FTP SMB Client Select whether or not to send On Transmission documents using SMB When selecting On set the SMB default Port Number Use the SMB default port Port 139 139 For Windows Vista use 445 i FAX Select whether or not to use i FAX LDAP Select whether or not to use LDAP SNMP Select whether or not to communicate using SNMP SNMPv3 Select whether or not to communicate using SNMPv3 HTTP Select whether or not to communicate using HTTP 8 66 Default Setting System Menu Description Default Restarting the Setting System HTTPS Select whether or not to communicate
198. etterhead Thick Envelope High Quality Custom 1 8 NOTE Refer to Paper Weight on page 8 7 for Custom 1 8 for media type Use the procedure below to select a custom paper size and media type Press the System Menu key Press Common Settings Next of Original Paper Settings and then Next of Custom Paper Size Press Change of any one of Custom 1 to Custom 4 on which you want to register the size Press On and then press or numeric keys to enter X horizontal and Y vertical dimensions Press Media Type to select the type of paper and press OK if necessary Press OK Nn o oO fF WN Move to the copy or document box screen and press the Reset key gg Paper Size and Media Type Setup for Cassettes Select paper size and media type for Cassette 1 2 and optional paper feeders Cassette 3 and 4 The available paper sizes and media types are shown in the table below Item Description Auto Automatically detect paper size Select Metric or Inch for paper size Standard Available options are as follows Sizes 1 Inch models Ledger Legal Letter Letter R Statement R 8 5x 13 5 Oficio II Metric models A3 B4 A4 A4 R B5 B5 R A5 R Folio Standard Select a standard size except that selected in Standard Sizes 1 Sizes 2 Inch models A3 B4 A4 A4 R A5 R B5 B5 R Folio 8K 16K 16K R Metric models Ledger Legal Letter Letter R Statement R 8 5x13 5 Oficio Il 8K 16K 16K R
199. ettes and the multi purpose tray A paper feeder is also available as an option refer to Optional Equipment on Appendix 2 Before Loading Paper When you open a new package of paper fan the sheets to separate them slightly prior to loading in the following steps 1 Bend the whole set of sheets to swell them in the middle 2 Hold the stack at both ends and stretch it while keeping the entire stack risen 3 Raise the right and left hands alternately to create a gap and feed air between the paper 4 Finally align the paper on a level flat table If the paper is curled or folded straighten it before loading Paper that is curled or folded may cause a jam CAUTION If you copy onto used paper paper already used for copying do not use paper that is stapled or clipped together This may damage the machine or cause poor image quality NOTE If printouts are curled or not neatly stapled turn the stack in the cassette upside down Avoid exposing opened paper to high temperatures and high humidity as dampness can be a cause of problems Seal any remaining paper after loading in the multi purpose tray or cassettes back in the paper storage bag If the machine will not be used for a prolonged period protect all paper from humidity by removing it from the cassettes and sealing it in the paper storage bag NOTE If you use special paper such as letterhead paper with holes or paper with pre prints like logo
200. ettings the address book screen may appear 5 Set the destination NOTE For more information on selecting destinations refer to Specifying Destination on page 3 28 6 Press the Start key Sending of the selected document begins Document Box Form Overlay from Custom Boxes This function allows you to retrieve images image files overlay them into documents stored in custom boxes and then print the results Use the procedure below 1 Press the Document Box key 2 Press Custom Box select the box containing the document you want to overlay the image into and print and then press Open NOTE If a custom box is protected by a password enter the correct password 3 Select the document you wish to print by checking the checkbox Search Name The document is marked with a checkmark 10 10 2008 09 50 21 MB 10 10 2008 10 00 21 MB NOTE To deselect press the checkbox again and p remove the checkmark Preview 2 a Join pE ig Fae o 4 Press Print Py Close 08 08 2009 10 10 ie Ready to store in Box One 5 Press Functions Form Overlay Select Stored File Name Form and then Select Form Form Overlay NOTE You can change the form density setting through 10 levels from 10 to 100 Press the or buttons in Density Add Shortcut Cancel 08 08 2009 10 10 6 In Form Overlay Select Form select the image file to be
201. etup Set up TCP IP IPv6 to connect to the network The default settings are TCP IP Protocol On TCP IP IPv6 Off Use the procedure below Ss O ON OO BR WO ND Press the System Menu key Press System Next of Network and then Next of TCP IP Setting Press Change of TCP IP Press On and then press OK Press Next of IPv6 Press Change of Pv6 Press On I P Address Link Local appears Press OK After changing the setting restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON again For detailed information on restarting the system refer to Restarting the System on page 8 63 8 64 Default Setting System Menu Manual Setting IPv6 Manually specify the IP address prefix length and gateway address of TCP IP IPv6 The manual setting is available when selecting On for TCP IP IPv6 Use the procedure below 1 Press the System Menu key Press System Next of Network and then Next of TCP IP Setting Press Next of Pv6 Press Next of Manual Setting a fF W N Press IP Address Manual to enter IP address The format of the IPv6 address is a sequence of numbers 128 bit in total separated by colons e g 2001 db8 3c4d 15 1a2c 1alf 6 Press OK Press Keys of Prefix Length 0 128 to enter the prefix length using the numeric keys Press Default Gateway to enter the default gateway Check that all the entries are correct and Press OK 9 After changing th
202. evious page or the next page NOTE Pressing the Reset key while the Internet browser is displayed will exit the browser and return you to the application list screen without displaying the browser exit 3 48 4 Copying Functions This chapter explains the functions available for copying S ONNA S Z O eee een ere Serve ener es eee eee me ee eee TS I tect as gc cee cng oe awe ses ectermetemte desde Mixed Sized OnginalS sssvonsiniins ena i OMe MIWA NOG essais ae eiae aaen ieia UCT SSC OM cececre ee eaeincimeracn ne earareeaaaie erase eewree e Combine he ete cise tics pnctea haces ne cieencstnd cat etat decane ones Margin Gentering Mode sistssunirensneisss neinir s BOOP EA Cession anrai E a E arene tre amp I BOOKEL NOM ONGC 1S a xre on meciaiceten ce bawieriead ca tenanaunsbaieeeer s GOVO MOJE ace catenin atest scestepewst cedars seaincunee eiei nnig a ON SY erie E Eai s Page PION seisis ieee ieia eia Memo Mod errant PETC a E oreey emer eer e Image Repeat Double Copy ccceceeseeceeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeenesenaeeeeees BIN crror engon sit a teameiceaa tienes upehaiteeneaeminesductpiete Sm 2169 c ap 26 e ee ere ne E err MOUS SCA en ce baci deat a anata ee Auto Image Rotation ia cccnicsatectancdcnsidentdatrendcrnicnntacamneucinaniaendiantuencaid a Negative Imag a paiieiikeocidsncee cn emoninsmteisieciniaininebosakami A EEEE SMO MINIS sceicco Eae nesi acsearle gy MS MNOGO dienaa ete ee eee eaeiee s PIS NA
203. ey on the operation panel to enter Sleep Other precautions Return the exhausted toner container and waste toner box to your dealer or service representative The collected toner container and waste toner box will be recycled or disposed in accordance with the relevant regulations Store the machine while avoiding exposure to direct sunlight Store the machine in a place where the temperature stays below 40 C while avoiding sharp changes of temperature and humidity If the machine will not be used for an extended period of time remove the paper from the cassette and the Multi Purpose MP Tray return it to its original package and reseal it XIV Laser Safety Europe Laser radiation could be hazardous to the human body For this reason laser radiation emitted inside this machine is hermetically sealed within the protective housing and external cover In the normal operation of the product by user no radiation can leak from the machine This machine is classified as Class 1 laser product under IEC 60825 Caution Performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation exposure These labels are attached to the laser scanner unit inside the machine and are not in a user access area DANGER CLASS 3B LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN AVOID DIRECT EXPOSURE TO BEAM ATTENTION CLASE 3B RAYONNEMENT LASER EN GAS D OUVERTURE EXPOSITION DANGEREUSE AU FAISCEAU VORSICHT KLASSE 3B LA
204. f an FTP server page 3 23 Send to Document Box Sends a document stored in a document box on this machine page 6 6 e Image Data Scanning with TWAIN WIA Loads the document data stored in a Custom Box to a PC Refer to the TWAIN WIA Driver Operation Guide NOTE Different sending options can be specified in combination Refer to Sending to Different Types of Destinations Multi Sending on page 3 30 3 21 Basic Operation Send as E mail Sends a scanned original image as an E mail attachment NOTE e You must have a network environment in which this machine can connect to a mail server It is recommended that the machine be used in an environment in which it can connect to the mail server at any time over a LAN Access the Embedded Web Server beforehand and specify the settings required for sending e mail For details see Embedded Web Server Settings for E mail on page 2 18 1 Press the Send key Displays the screen for sending NOTE Depending on the settings the address book screen may appear In this event press Cancel to display the screen for sending al EA Destination 2 Press E mail Addr Entry and then E mail Place original 0 Add re ss E mail Address Entry fares NOTE Destination can be specified using the Address Book or the One Touch Keys Refer to Specifying Destination on page 3 28 r Add a new e mail destination i Press E mail Address then enter
205. f multiple print job and holds printing of the remaining copies Printing a multiple print job in Proof and Hold using the printer driver allows only a single copy to be printed while maintaining the document data in the Job Box To continue to print the remaining copies use the operation panel You can change the number of copies to print Repeat Copy Box page 6 15 Repeat Copy feature stores the copied original document data in the Job Box and allows you to print additional copies later By default up to 32 documents can be stored When power is turned off the original data will be deleted NOTE Repeat Copy function is not available when the optional Data Security Kit is installed Form for Form Overlay Box page 6 17 Image Overlay feature copies the original document overlaid with a form or image This Job Box is used to store the forms or images for overlaying Removable Memory Box A USB memory inserted into the USB memory slot A1 of the machine is also recognizable as a Job Box This allows printing of the PDF data stored in the USB memory You can print PDF data directly from the USB memory without a PC Image files scanned using this machine can also be saved to USB memory in the PDF TIFF JPEG XPS or high compression PDF format Scan to USB Fax Box Fax Box stores the fax data received For details refer to the Operation Guide supplied with the fax kit 3 32 Basic Operation Basic Oper
206. f the screen refer to Details of the Status Screens on page 7 3 Paper Supplies 08 08 2009 10 10 7 2 Status Job Cancel Details of the Status Screens The items and keys displayed on the status screens are as follows For information on how to display the Status screen see Displaying Status Screens on page 7 2 Printing Jobs Status Screen Status Status Log l Job Tye a Fi Z JobNo End Date Type Job Name Result 000001 10 10 09 50 amp doc10102008095050 InProcess 000002 10 10 09 55 doc10102008095510 Waiting 000003 10 10 10 00 doc10102008091000 Waiting Pause All Print Jobs Printing Jobs di bs Storing Jobs Device Pal upplies 08 08 2009 10 10 Item Key Job No Acceptance No of job Accepted Time Accepted Time of job Type Icons that indicate the job type mCopy job AS Printer job te FAX reception eS gi FAX reception E mail reception Job from Document Box ie Report List mData from Removable Memory 3 Job Name Job Name or file name User Name User Name for the executed job Status Status of job InProcess The status before starting to print Printing Printing Waiting Print Waiting Pause Pausing print job or error Canceling Canceling the job Status Job Cancel Item Key y of Job Type Detail Sorts by specific type of job Pause All Print Jobs Pauses all the printing jobs By press
207. ffset this paper Did you select a paper size media type that cannot be offset Select the available paper size type Press Continue to print without using Offset Cannot print the specified number of copies Only one copy is available due to processing too many jobs in parallel Press Continue to continue printing Press Cancel to cancel the job Cannot staple at the specified position Have you selected a position that cannot be stapled Select a position that can be stapled Press Continue to print without using Staple Cannot staple this paper Did you select a paper size type that cannot be stapled Select the available paper size type Press Continue to print without using Staple Check the cover Is there any cover which is open Close the cover indicated on the touch panel Check the document processor Is the document processor open Close the document processor Is the top cover of the document processor open Close the top cover of the document processor Check the finisher Check the toner container Is the document finisher set correctly Is the toner container clogged with the toner Set the document finisher correctly For details refer to the respective Operation Guides Shake the toner container well and reinstall it Clean the slit glass Clean the slit glass using the cleaning cloth supplied with the document pr
208. formatting overwriting for erasure and error occurrence is displayed 7 16 Status Job Cancel Configuring the Devices Scanner Hard Disk Removable Memory Not connected Format Remove FAX Port 1 1 i FAX Port 2 Bir Check New FAX Printing Jobs Sending Jobs Storing Jobs Device _ Paper Supplies Communication Status 08 08 2009 10 10 Line off Manuais J Detailed information on controlling devices is given below Removable Memory USB Memory The usage and capacity of the external media connected to this machine are displayed e Press Format to format external media e Press Remove to safely remove the external media For details refer to Removing the USB Memory in the next section FAX Port 1 FAX Port 2 e The information such as sending receiving and dialing is displayed e Press Line Off to cancel a fax in sending receiving For details refer to Canceling FAX Communication on page 7 18 in the section afterwards e Press Manual RX to start a fax Use this function when you want to talk to the sender before receiving the fax originals For details refer to the Operation Guide of FAX kit e Press Log to display the fax transmission history For details refer to the Operation Guide of FAX kit Removing the USB Memory There is a way to remove the USB memory safely Use the procedure below to remove the USB memory 1 Press the Status Job Cancel key 2 Press Device Communication g
209. g Trade AMOS ccc cniccssescacesaicicacdnonaciassean noecediatsenmniaarcecsctaes xxi Energy Saving Control PUNCHON deissnstcccuseisceiaisspiesedacecneeiseyexaueceiared XXV e Automatic 2 Sided Copy Function cccceeeeeeesseeecceeeeeeeesseeeeeeees XXV eet REC tN aoue E adams anecatenaueses XXV e Energy Star ENERGY STAR Program eeeeecccceeeeeeseeeeeeeeees XXV Abou tthis Operation Guideen annie xxvi xix Legal Information Copying or other reproduction of all or part of this guide without the prior written consent of Olivetti is prohibited XX Regarding Trade Names e PRESCRIBE and ECOSYS are trademarks of Kyocera Corporation e KPDL is a trademark of Kyocera Corporation e Microsoft MS DOS Windows Windows NT and Internet Explorer are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U S A and or other countries e Windows Me Windows XP and Windows Vista are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation e PCL is a trademark of Hewlett Packard Company e Adobe Acrobat Adobe Reader and PostScript are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated e Ethernet is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation e Novell and NetWare are registered trademarks of Novell Inc IBM and IBM PC AT are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation e Power PC is a trademark of IBM in the U S A and or other countries e AppleTalk is a registered trademark of Apple Computer Inc e This mac
210. gs are available for configuring the defaults to customize the machine e Emulation 8 33 e EcoPrint 8 34 e Override A4 Letter 8 34 e Duplex 8 35 e Copies 8 35 e Orientation 8 35 Form Feed Timeout 8 36 e LF Action 8 36 e CR Action 8 37 e Paper Feed Mode 8 37 NOTE If user login administration is enabled you can only change the settings by logging in with administrator privileges Emulation Select the emulation for operating this machine by commands oriented to other types of printers Selection of emulation The printer can emulate PCL 6 KPDL and KPDL Auto Use the procedure below to select the emulation 1 Press the System Menu Key 2 Press Printer gt Change of Emulation 3 Select the desired emulation NOTE If you selected KPDL Auto set Alternative Emulation too Refer to page 8 33 When you have selected KPDL or KPDL Auto set KPDL Error Report too Refer to page 8 34 4 Press OK Setting of Alternative Emulation When you have selected KPDL Auto as emulation mode you can switch between KPDL and another emulation mode alternative emulation automatically according to the data to print The alternative emulation you can set is PCL6 Use the procedure below to select the alternative emulation 1 Press the System Menu Key 8 33 Default Setting System Menu 2 Press Printer gt Change of Emulation gt KPDL Auto gt Alt Emula
211. hange of AppleTalk Press On or Off 2 16 Preparation before Use 4 Press OK 5 After changing the setting restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON again For detailed information on restarting the system refer to Restarting the System on page 8 63 Installing Software Install appropriate software on your PC from the included Product Library CD ROM Product Library if you want to use the printer function of this machine or perform TWAIN WIA transmission or FAX transmission from your PC NOTE Installation on Windows XP Windows 2000 Server 2003 and Windows Vista must be done by a user logged on with administrator privileges Plug and Play is disabled on this device when in Sleep Wake the device from Sleep before continuing See Sleep and Auto Sleep on page 2 10 2 17 Preparation before Use Embedded Web Server Settings for E mail Embedded Web Server is a tool used for tasks such as verifying the operating status of the machine and changing the settings for security network printing E mail transmission and advanced networking NOTE Here information on the FAX settings has been omitted For more information on using the FAX refer to the Fax Kit Operation Guide The procedure for accessing Embedded Web Server is explained below 1 2 Launch your Web browser In the Address or Location bar enter the machine s IP address E g http 192 168 48 21 The
212. he job is permitted to be printed Use the procedure below to process jobs sent from unknown users 1 2 Press the System Menu key Press User Login Job Accounting If user login administration is disabled the user authentication screen appears Enter your login user name and password and then press Login For this you need to login with administrator privileges Refer to Adding a User on page 11 5 for the default login user name and password Press Change of Unknown ID Job Press Reject or Permit Press OK 11 9 Management Group Authorization Settings Set restrictions of the machine usage by each individual group registered in the authentication server NOTE To use the group authorization settings Network Authentication must be selected for the authentication method in Enabling Disabling User Login Administration on page 11 2 Select On for LDAP in Protocol Detail on page 8 66 Group Authorization Use the group authorization Use the procedure below Group List Press the System Menu key Press User Login Job Accounting If user login administration is disabled the user authentication screen appears Enter your login user name and password and then press Login For this you need to login with administrator privileges Refer to Adding a User on page 11 5 for the default login user name and password Press Next of User Login Setting Next of Group Authorization Set
213. he main power switch off Restarting the System Restart the CPU without turning the main power switch off Use this to deal with any unstable operation by the machine Same as the computer restart Use the procedure below to restart the system 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press System and Execute of Restart NOTE If user login administration is disabled the user authentication screen appears Enter a login user name and password and press Login For this you need to login with administrator privileges Refer to Adding a User on page 11 5 for the default login user name and password 3 When the confirmation screen appears press Yes The system is restarted 8 63 Default Setting System Menu Network Setup The following network settings are available Checking Host Name 8 64 TCP IP IPv4 Setup 8 64 TCP IP IPv6 Setup 8 64 Protocol Detail 8 66 NetWare Setup 8 67 AppleTalk Setup 8 68 WSD Scan Setup 8 68 WSD Print Setup 8 68 Secure Protocol 8 69 IPSec Setting 8 71 LAN Interface Setup 8 71 Checking Host Name Check the host name of the machine Use the procedure below 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press System Next of Network Check the host name displayed under Host Name TCP IP IPv4 Setup Set up TCP IP to connect to the Windows network Refer to TCP IP IPv4 Setup by Entering IP Addresses on page 2 14 about the procedures TCP IP IPv6 S
214. he same size paper Use the procedure below to copy mixed size originals 1 Press the Copy key 2 Place originals on the document processor IMPORTANT When placing originals of different widths be sure to flush them against the document width guide toward the back of the machine 3 Press Org Paper Finishing and then Mixed Size Originals Ready to copy me 4 Select Mixed Size Copies or Same Size Copies as finish size TEE eS 5 Select the combination of originals from Same gptngt See pan Width and Different Width me wiat When Same Size Copies is selected select Long DRA Edge Left or Short Edge Left as the first original m ry orientation il 6 Press ok Add Shortcut 08 08 2009 10 10 7 Press the Start key to start copying Copying Functions Original Orientation Select the original orientation to use the following functions Zoom XY Zoom Duplex Margin Centering originals Border erase Combine mode Memo mode Page numbering Booklets Stapling optional feature If On is selected as the Orientation Confirmation on page 8 14 setting in the System Menu the selection screen for original orientation appears when you select any of the above functions When placing originals on the platen Original Top Edge Top Top Edge Left When pl
215. he touch panel is turned off press the Energy Saver key or the Power key and wait for the machine to warm up 2 Place the originals on the platen or in the optional document processor NOTE For loading instructions refer to Loading Originals on page 2 32 3 Check that Auto is selected of Paper Selection on the touch panel Paper that matches the size of the original will be selected automatically To change the paper size press Org Paper Finishing Paper Selection and select the desired paper source NOTE Select paper size manually if necessary instead of using automatic paper selection 4 Use the numeric keys to enter the copy quantity Specify the desired number up to 999 5 Press the Start key to start copying 6 Remove the finished copies from the top tray Basic Operation Adjusting Density Use this procedure to adjust the density when copying Density Adjustment Option Description Manual Adjust density using 7 or 13 levels Auto Optimum density is selected according to the density of the original NOTE You may choose Auto mode as the default setting refer to Density on page 8 18 The procedure for adjusting the density of copies is explained below 1 Press the Copy key 2 Place the originals on the platen 3 Set the original on the platen and press Image Quality gt Density Ready to copy Copies 4 Adjust density manually pressing 3 Lighter
216. hine has been developed using embedded real time operating system Tornado by Wind River Systems Inc e TrueType is a registered trademark of Apple Computer Inc e TypeBankG B TypeBankM M and Typebank OCR are trademarks of TypeBank All European language fonts installed in this machine are used under licensing agreement with Monotype Imaging Inc e Helvetica Palatino and Times are registered trademarks of Linotype Hell AG e ITC Avant Garde Gothic ITC Bookman ITC ZapfChancery and ITC ZapfDingbats are registered trademarks of International Type face Corporation e UFST MicroType fonts by Monotype Imaging Inc are installed in this machine e This machine contains the NF module developed by ACCESS Co Ltd e This machine contains the software having modules developed by Independent JPEG Group e This product contains NetFront Browser of ACCESS CO LTD e ACCESS ACCESS logo and NetFront are trademarks or registered trademarks of ACCESS CO LTD in the United States Japan and other countries 2009 ACCESS CO LTD All rights reserved e This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group ACESS NetFront Browser All other brands and product names are registered trademarks or trademarks of their respective companies The designations and will not be used in this Operation Guide XXxi GPL Firmware of this machine is using in part the GPL applied codes www fsf org copyleft
217. hite Place original Fh ah Auto Color Auto Color Color Gray Color B amp W Fl Tal f e Grayscale FA Cancel l 08 08 2009 10 10 6 Specify the destination and press the Start key to start sending 5 21 Sending Functions Continuous Scan When the multi page originals cannot be placed in the document processor at one time the originals can be scanned in separate batches and then sent as one job With this function originals can be scanned one after another until you press Scan Finish Any of the following settings can be changed during scanning e Original Size selection e Original Orientation e 1 sided 2 sided selection Scan density e Image quality Scan resolution e Color selection e Sending Size selection e Zoom e Border Erase The procedure for using continuous scanning when sending scanned images is explained below Ready to send Place original 4 i Scan a large number of originals in separate batches and then produce as one job Settings can be changed during scanning Ello coun Cancel l 08 08 2009 10 10 Press the Send key Press Advanced Setup and then Continuous Scan Press On Continuous Scan is selected Press OK Specify the destination Place the original and press the Start key When the scanning is completed change the settings as necessary Place the next original and pre
218. hree printers you need to acquire a multi user license agreement which can be obtained from Monotype Imaging Monotype Imaging retains all rights title and interest to the Software and Typefaces and no rights are granted to you other than a License to use the Software on the terms expressly set forth in this Agreement To protect proprietary rights of Monotype Imaging you agree to maintain the Software and other proprietary information concerning the Typefaces in strict confidence and to establish reasonable procedures regulating access to and use of the Software and Typefaces You agree not to duplicate or copy the Software or Typefaces except that you may make one backup copy You agree that any such copy shall contain the same proprietary notices as those appearing on the original This License shall continue until the last use of the Software and Typefaces unless sooner terminated This License may be terminated by Monotype Imaging if you fail to comply with the terms of this License and such failure is not remedied within thirty 30 days after notice from Monotype Imaging When this License expires or is terminated you shall either return to Monotype Imaging or destroy all copies of the Software and Typefaces and documentation as requested You agree that you will not modify alter disassemble decrypt reverse engineer or decompile the Software Monotype Imaging warrants that for ninety 90 days after delivery the Software will perf
219. ick Copy Proof and Hold Print Box page 6 13 e Repeat Copy Box page 6 15 e Deleting a Form Stored page 6 18 Quick Setup Registration Select the Storing in Box Sending from Box Printing from Box functions to be registered for Quick Setup Six keys of the Quick Setup screen are allocated to typical functions but can be changed as necessary The options are as follows Store File Quick Setup Color Selection Storing Size Density 2 sided Book Original Resolution Zoom Original Orientation Original Size Original Image Continuous Scan Print Quick Setup Paper Selection Collate Offset Staple Duplex Combine Delete after Printed Send Quick Setup Sending Size FAX TX Resolution File Format Delete after Transmitted 8 31 Default Setting System Menu Use the procedure below to register the Quick Setup functions 1 2 3 4 5 6 Press the System Menu key Press Document Box Removable Memory and Next of Quick Setup Registration Press Next of Store File Print or Send Press Change of the function to be registered in Quick Setup Select a key 1 6 allocated on the Quick Setup screen Press Off to delete a key from the Quick Setup Press OK If you overwrite the setting a confirmation screen appears Press Yes 8 32 Default Setting System Menu Printer Settings Printing from computers settings are generally made on the application software screen However the following settin
220. idee wioawedie ehh ek cee dere eae eee a ees 7 14 Checking the Remaining Amount of Toner and Paper 0 000 e eee eens 7 15 Device Communication 0 06 c ete 7 16 Default Setting System Menu Common SettingS 0 060 ete eee 8 2 Copy Settings i EnA asda civdis whens wii bode UN ee ee Na EY ee be 8 25 Sending Setting S asirai eiaa a E a i tte eee 8 28 Document Box SettingS 0 2 0 0 te eee 8 31 Printer Settings 0 0 0 ttt eens 8 33 Printing Reports Sending Notice 000 cee eee 8 38 Adjustment Maintenance 0 0 00 tees 8 41 Data TIMEN sessar fides a ceee ee Mees bee ee ad eda ee ete ees 8 46 Editing Destination Address Book Adding One Touch Keys 000000ee eee 8 51 Internet Browser Setup 0 2 0 2 0 cc tte nee eee 8 58 Applications sa2c200pi eOeeaeie IREKE EREE ae seeks ee os EEEE IRAR ERARE 8 60 System Initialization 22064 sean aaia ea dee dee aa wee e A ede ee ee abe eat a bs 8 63 Restarting the System 1 2 0 ete tees 8 63 Network Setups sie aipu maad eae evel sa ene ee aig Whee a ED aa es He eee ad eee 8 64 Secure ProtoCOlligs cies Se thas dt oy Peek eee ORGS ea eed eee been eee Re 8 69 Interface Block Setting 0 tte 8 72 Security Level Security Level setting 000 cece eee ete eee 8 73 Document Guard Setting 0000 ete 8 73 Optional Functions 0 0 0 0 ccc ete 8 75 Accessibility Display Enlarged Touch Panel Display
221. idtauntscaenoubacseacccecinercdenasanadsocinas 8 58 FPO Scotts acess case sida petted ea pea cence ad saa edaneenee diac sedeiais 8 60 s Byler IMMA 2A sete nccccteedieiteetecie tein nieces 8 63 Restaning te Sy Sten iicia dace a 8 63 s NetWork I acsteecape werent anes ecediene a aerated cep seetacle 8 64 a DCCS LOGON aisim EE EA OS 8 69 interface BIGOK Setting srisisssisssisiiisrisiroisisissriisiasiensisanrisi enini 8 72 e Security Level Security Level setting ccssssccceeeeeeseeeeeeeeees 8 73 e Document Guard Setting a cceciicci canssenrsamcesecasanstedeatenencicavbaamacaanncteicas 8 73 Optional PUNCHONSceninnbssrnn e REN 8 75 e Accessibility Display Enlarged Touch Panel Display 0 8 76 8 1 Default Setting System Menu Common Settings Common settings include Switching the Language for Display Language 8 2 Default Screen 8 2 Sound 8 3 Original Paper Settings 8 4 Switching Unit of Measurement 8 11 Error Handling 8 12 Paper Output 8 13 Orientation Confirmation 8 14 Function Defaults 8 14 NOTE If user login administration is enabled you can only change the settings by logging in with administrator privileges Switching the Language for Display Language Select the language displayed on the touch panel Use the procedure below to select the language 1 2 3 4 Default Screen Press the System Menu key Press Common Settings
222. ientation Original Orientation Left Top Edge Left top Left Top Edge Left top Original Orientation Original Orientation Top Edge Back Edge Top Edge Back Edge corner corner A vill P lt lt Document Finisher Za g p Za Cassette Paper Load A A N A A fe __ Direction A A SS A A A A a A e Document Finisher PA A WN A Cassette Paper Load e A A A Direction 2 i A A A IA A _ Built in Finisher Z Fr Cassette Paper Load A A Direction Built in Finisher Cassette Paper Load Direction S gt Mi ll N A 3 17 Basic Operation Use the procedure below to produce stapled copies Copies Ready to copy Staple Top 2 staples Left S Top 5 Top Zi 2 staples Right Zif Right El 2 staples 2 Left Place original Original Hiss Zoom 100 Paper ES Top Edge Top Original Orientation Add Shortcut 08 08 2009 10 10 a fF W N Press the Copy key Plac
223. iginal Size Selection Send 5 2 Original SSLeay License xxiii Originals Automatic Detection 8 9 Copy 4 2 Custom 8 4 Setup 8 4 Size Selection 4 2 5 2 One Touch Key Changing the Registered Information 8 56 Deleting the Registered Information 8 56 Editing 8 56 Open SSL xxii Operation Panel 1 2 1 4 Option 3 000 sheet paper feeder Appendix 4 Data Security Kit Appendix 9 Document Finisher Appendix 4 Document Processor Appendix 4 Expansion Memory Appendix 9 FAX Kit Appendix 9 Job Separator Appendix 8 Key Counter Appendix 8 Overview Appendix 2 Paper Feeder Appendix 4 Option Interface Slot 1 6 Optional Functions 8 75 Orientation Confirmation 8 14 Original Loading in the Document Processor 2 34 Placing on the Platen 2 32 Size xxviii Output Destination 4 12 Output Tray 8 13 P Page Numbering 4 23 Paper Appropriate Paper Appendix 14 Auto Selection 8 9 Before Loading 2 21 Cassette 8 5 Checking the Remaining Amount of Paper 7 15 Custom 8 4 Default Paper Source 8 9 Loading Envelopes 2 26 Loading in the Cassettes 2 22 Loading in the Multi Purpose Tray 2 24 Multi Purpose Tray 8 6 Paper Source for Cover Paper 8 10 Setup 8 4 Size and Media 2 28 Appendix 13 Special Paper 8 10 Appendix 17 Specifications Appendix 13 Weight 8 7 Paper Feed Unit 1 5 Paper Feeder Appendix 4 Index 5 Index Paper Jam 10 15 Cassette 1 10 16 Cassette 2 10 17 Cassettes 3 and 4 10 18 Document Finisher 10 26
224. inal Size Setup on page 8 4 kk The input units can be changed in the System menu Refer to Switching Unit of Measurement on page 8 11 Use the procedure below to select the original size 1 Press the Copy key 2 Place the originals on the platen 3 Press Org Paper Finishing and then Original Size 4 2 Copying Functions Ready to copy Original Size Standard Sizes 1 igi Standard Place original Others Original Size Entry zoom 100 Paper p Preview Original Hss Zoom 100 Paper c Add Shortcut Status Keys Copies 08 08 2009 10 10 Copies 08 08 2009 10 10 4 Press Standard Sizes 1 Standard Sizes 2 Others or Size Entry to select the original size If Size Entry is selected press or to specify the horizontal size X and the vertical size Y Press Keys to enter the size directly using the numeric keys Press OK 6 Press the Start key to start copying 4 3 Copying Functions Paper Selection Select the paper source that contains the required paper size NOTE Specify in advance the size and type of the paper loaded in the cassette refer to Original Paper Settings on page 8 4 Selecting the Cassette Use the procedure below to select the paper supply cassette 1 Press the Copy key 2 Place the originals on the platen 3 Press Org Paper Finishing and then Paper Selection Ready to c
225. ine into Low Power Mode Puts the machine into Sleep Mode Recovers from Sleep if in Sleep Mode QMemory Attention Interrupt Logout Few GED 9 i 0 J Sel i amp w Litwhen the machine s gt a Clear 8 Enter _ n ee S ca ace Starts copying and scanning operations and processing for setting operations Returns settings to their default states Cancels or pauses the printing job in progress J Finalizes numeric key entry and finalizes screen during setting of functions Operates linked with the on screen OK Recalls already registered destinations and programs for sending Clears entered numbers and characters Numeric keys Enter numbers and symbols Part Names Machine 1 Original Cover Option 2 Original Size Indicator Plates 3 Clip Holder 4 Slit Glass 5 Attention Indicator Lights or blinks when an error occurs and a job is stopped 6 Receive Indicator Blinks while data is received 7 Left Cover 1 8 Left Cover 1 Lever 9 Left Cover 2 10 Left cover 2 Handle 11 Platen 12 Operation Panel 13 Cassette 1 14 Cassette 2 15 Duplex Unit Part Names 22 23 21 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 Toner Container Stopper Toner Container Waste Toner Box Pape
226. ing and then Change of USB Device 3 Press Block 4 Press OK Optional interface Optional interface card setting This locks and protects the optional interface slots OPT1 or OPT2 The default setting is Unblock Use the procedure below to specify the optional interface setting 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press System Next of Interface Block Setting and then Change of Optional Interface 1 or Optional Interface 2 3 Press Block Press OK 8 72 Default Setting System Menu Security Level Security Level setting The Security Level setting is primarily a menu option used by service personnel for maintenance work There is no need for customers to use this menu Document Guard Setting When the optional Printed Document Guard Kit is installed the machine prevents the unauthorized copying and or transmission of documents that contain important confidential or personal information Use the Security Watermark of Advanced in KX DRIVER to embed the guard pattern in a document Refer to the Printer Driver User Guide for details We suggest you to confirm how the machine performs this function on your environment Print the guard pattern using KX DRIVER gt Canceled send or fax Machine Operation after Detecting the Document Guard Pattern Common operation Description Displays the message that indicates the machine detected the document guard pattern and stops scanning the rem
227. ing the original on the platen Original Top Edge Top Top Edge Left When placing the original on the optional document processor Original Top Edge Top Top Edge Left Use the procedure below to select the orientation when placing the originals on the platen for sending 1 Press the Send key 2 Place the originals on the platen 3 Press Original Sending Data Format and then Original Orientation 5 11 Sending Functions Ready to send Place original 4 Original Orientation Destination 4 Select the orientation of the 5 original document s top edge f Top Edge Top File Format A Top Edge Left Cancel tel 08 08 2009 10 10 Select the file format of the image to send The table below lists the file formats and their details File Format Adjustable range of image quality 1 Low Quality High Comp to 5 High Quality Low Comp 1 Low Quality High Comp to 5 High Quality Low Comp Select original orientation from Top Edge Top and Top Edge Left Press OK Specify the destination and press the Start key to start sending Color mode Auto Color Color Grayscale Auto Color Color Black and White Full Color Grayscale Black and White Auto Color
228. ing this key again the printing jobs will be resumed Cancel Select the job to be canceled from the list and press this key Priority Override Select the job to be overridden and press this key Refer to Priority Override for Waiting Jobs on page 7 14 Move Up In the list select the job that you want to move up the job queue and press this key Refer to Reordering Print Jobs on page 7 14 Detail Select the job for displaying detailed information from the list and press this key Refer to Checking the Detailed Information of Histories on page 7 10 7 4 Status Job Cancel Sending Jobs Status screen Status Scheduled Job i Job No 7 Accepted Storing Jobs Device Paper Supplies ae 08 08 2009 10 10 Item Key Job No Acceptance No of job Accepted Time Accepted Time of job Icons that indicate the job type ESending Job FAX Ne mSending Job i FAX Sending Job PC SMB FTP E ESending Job E mail Sending Job Application m ESending Job Multiple Destination Destination Either destination name FAX number E mail address or server name User Name User Name for the executed job Status Status of job InProcess The status before starting sending such as during scanning originals Sending Sending Waiting Sending Waiting Canceling Canceling the job Pause Pausing the job yw of Job Type Only selected type of jobs is dis
229. ion network address and protocol Network Status Page MFP Firmware Version Service Status Page More detailed information is available than on the Status Page Service personnel usually print the service status pages for maintenance purpose Use the procedure below to print a report 1 Press the System Menu key GE 2 Press Report and Next of Print Report 3 Press Print for the report you want to print Printing starts A confirmation screen appears Press Yes Send Result Report Automatically print a report of transmission result when a transmission is complete The table below shows the available settings Description No result report printed Result report automatically printed Transmitted images can also be attached to the FAX result report Error Only Result report printed only when a transmission ends in an error If two or more destinations are registered the reports are printed only for the destinations with the errors Transmitted images can also be attached to the FAX result report Press the System Menu key 2 Press Report Next of Result Report Setting Next of Send Result Report and then Change of E mail Folder Press Off On or Error Only Press OK 8 39 Default Setting System Menu Report for Job Canceled before Sending Print a send result report when the job is canceled before being sent 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Rep
230. is On For details refer to the Embedded Web Server Operation Guide 1 Press the Send key Displays the screen for sending NOTE Depending on the settings the address book screen may appear In this event press Cancel to display the screen for sending 2 Press Folder Path Entry and then SMB or FTP NOTE Destination can be specified using the Address Book or the One Touch Keys For details refer to Specifying Destination on page 3 28 3 23 Basic Operation Al Ready to send Destination 3 Enter host name path login user name and login Place original 1 password Press the key of each item to first Folder display the entry screen Host Name Path Login User Name Login Password lt rifu thg l_cnarifu thf Connection Tes Test Add to Addr Book Next Dest Cancel tel OK 08 08 2009 10 10 4 Enter the destination data and press OK Use the keyboard to enter Lifhit 128 characters Irfut Ocharacters HEIL AES a Bao Ooo ee BER oO oe ei Pper case Lower case No Symbol Space cancel a ok 08 08 2009 10 10 Data to be entered are as follows NOTE You will be unable to send the data if you forget your login user name or login password Contact your administrator and check your login user name or login password For send to folder SMB Max Data to be entered characters Host Name Host name or IP ad
231. is displayed when address is selected Press Detail to display the list Press v or A select a destination and press Detail Information on the selected job is displayed for checking 4 To exit from the detailed information press Close 7 8 Status Job Cancel Checking Job History Check the history of completed jobs NOTE Job history is also available by Embedded Web Server or Network Print Monitor from the computer Available Job History Screens The job histories are displayed separately in three screens Printing Jobs Sending Jobs and Storing Jobs The following job histories are available Screen Job histories to be displayed Printing Jobs e Copy e Printer FAX reception i FAX reception e E mail reception Printing from Document Box Job Report List e Printing data from removable memory Sending Jobs FAX j FAX e PC SMB FTP E mail e Application e Multiple destination Storing Jobs e Scan e FAX e j FAX e Printer e Join Box Document e Copy Box Document Displaying Job History Screen The procedure for displaying Job History Screen is explained below 1 Press the Status Job Cancel key Status 2 Press either of Printing Jobs Sending Jobs or sas CO Storing Jobs to check the log and press Log Job Type All yj Job No End Date Type Job Name Result 000080 01 25 14 14 doc20070225141427 Completed 000081 01 25 14
232. is status is referred to as Sleep If print data is received during Sleep the print job is performed while the touch panel remains unlit When using the optional fax received fax data is printed out while the operation panel also remains unlit To resume press the Power key The machine will be ready within 15 seconds Note that ambient environmental conditions such as ventilation may cause the machine to respond more slowly Auto Sleep automatically switches the machine into Sleep if left idle for a preset time The default preset time is 15 minutes 2 10 Preparation before Use Adjusting the Operation Panel Angle Adjust the angle of the operation panel in two as shown by releasing the operation panel lock lever Ga Switching the Language for Display Language Select the language displayed on the touch panel Use the procedure below to select the language 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Common Settings and then Change of Language 3 Press the key for the language you want to use Common Settings Language ij Set the language to use for the touch panel display ee Deutsch Fran ais Espa ol Italiano Nederlands Pycckniit Portugu s 08 08 2009 10 10 4 Press OK The touch panel language will be changed 2 11 Preparation before Use Setting Date and Time Follow the steps below to set the local date and time at the place of installation When you
233. ister The restricted account is added 11 19 Management Applying Limit of Restriction This specifies how the machine behaves when the counter has reached the limit of restriction The table below describes the action taken Immediately Job stops when the counter reaches its limit Subsequently Printing scanning of the job continues but the subsequent job will be rejected Alert Only Job continues while displaying an alert message The next job will be prohibited in sending or in storing in the box Use the procedure below to apply the restriction limit 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press User Login Job Accounting 3 If user login administration is disabled the user authentication screen appears Enter your login user name and password and then press Login For this you need to login with administrator privileges Refer to Adding a User on page 11 5 for the default login user name and password 4 Press Next of Job Accounting Setting Next of Default Setting and then Change of Apply Limit 5 Select Immediately Subsequently or Alert Only 6 Press OK 11 20 Management Default Counter Limit When you add a new account you can change the default restrictions on the number of sheets used You can set any number from 1 to 9 999 999 in 1 sheet increments The items that can be set differ depending on whether Split or Total is selected for Managing the Copier Printe
234. istory print by using or the numeric keys a You can enter any number between 1 and 1500 4 Press OK 1 1500 100 TH Cancel J 08 08 2009 10 10 Manual Job Log History Transmission You can also send the job log history to the specified destinations manually Use the procedure below to send the job log history manually 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Report Next of Sending Job Log History and then Execute of Send Job Log History When the confirmation screen appears press Yes The job log history is sent Setting E mail Subject Set the subject automatically entered when sending job log histories by e mail Use the procedure below to set the subject 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Report Next of Sending Job Log History and then Change of Subject 3 Enter an e mail subject not more than 60 characters NOTE Refer to the Character Entry Method on Appendix 10 for details on entering characters 4 Check that the entry is correct and press OK 7 12 Status Job Cancel Pause and Resumption of Jobs Pause resume all printing jobs in printing waiting The procedure for pausing and resuming jobs is explained below 1 Press the Status Job Cancel key 2 Press Pause All Print Jobs on the Printing Jobs oe E e Status screen Printing is paused Job Type All y JobNo End Date Type Job Name Result 000001 10 10 09 50 doci010200
235. ith Printing Documents Print specific Stored in Removable settings USB Memory viaa network Connecting Cables Network Setup LAN Cable Connection Install the printer driver on your computer 1 Loading Paper 2 21 Placing Originals on the Platen 2 32 Printing Printing Copying Functions Documents Stored Printing from 4 1 in Removable USB Applications Memory 6 20 dO Operation 1 For more information refer to the Printer Driver User Guide vi Administrator tasks To send documents You can send scanned images via a network Or you can also store scanned images in Tm USB memory It sends Send Send to as Folder E mail SMB Saving Documents to USB Memory Connecting Cables Network Setup LAN Cable Connection Plug the USB memory Create a shared folder on the destination computer Editing Destination Address Book Adding One Touch Keys 8 51 Place the originals on the platen Saving Documents to USB Memory Scan to USB 6 22 Sending 3 21 1 Sending Functions 5 1 1 If the destination is not stored in the address book you can send by entering the address directly vii Administrator tasks As well as sending a FAX via the telephone lines you can also send a FAX via a network To send a FAX It faxes NOTE For more information on setting up and sending a FAX refer to the FAX System S Operation Guide
236. ithout holding the handle otherwise it will drop 9 12 Maintenance 23 Hold the toner container in both hands and slowly remove it 24 Place the used toner container in the provided plastic disposal bag 25 Unwrap a new toner container and hold the new toner container upright and tap the top of the container 5 or more times Then turn the container the other way up and again tap the top of the container 5 or more times 26 Then shake the toner container up and down 5 or more times Turn the toner container over and shake it another 5 or more times 9 13 Maintenance 27 Place the used toner container in the provided plastic disposal bag 28 Hold the new toner container in both hands and gently push it into the machine 29 Using both hands push in the toner container until it is locked 30 Close the front cover NOTE Return the exhausted toner container and waste toner box to your dealer or service representative The collected toner container and waste toner box will be recycled or disposed in accordance with the relevant regulations 9 14 10 Troubleshooting This chapter explains how to solve problems with the machine e Soling BeNOR S cacccacncckt asnectcsndninsdaxgrassussketscontnendeansaadeunesinianadants 10 2 Responding to Error Messages giv ciouiecinccicinin piv epinvetecivensiexinensicemeand 10 6 lt Clearing Paper SANS sii
237. l e Register 08 08 2009 10 10 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press User Login Job Accounting 3 If user login administration is disabled the user authentication screen appears Enter your login user name and password and then press Login For this you need to login with administrator privileges Refer to Adding a User on page 11 5 for the default login user name and password 4 Press Next of Job Accounting Setting and then Register Edit of Accounting List 5 Select an account to change or delete NOTE Select Name or ID from the Sort pull down menu to sort the account names Press Search Name or Search ID to search by account name or account ID The procedure differs depending on the details to be edited Changing account information 1 Press Detail 2 Refer to steps 5 to 7 of Adding an Account and steps 2 to 5 of Restricting Using the Machine to change account information 3 Press Register Press Yes in the registration confirmation screen The account information is changed Deleting an account 1 Press Delete 2 Press Yes To delete the account 11 17 Management Managing the Copier Printer Counts You can select how the copying and printing page counts are shown either the total of both or each of copying and printing individually The selection may influence restriction on the count and count method Refer to Restricting the Use of the Machine on page 11 18
238. l You can either send it manually as needed or have it sent automatically whenever a set number of jobs is reached Setting the destination Set the destination to which job log histories are sent Use the procedure below to set the destination 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Report Next of Sending Job Log History and then Change of Destination 3 To enter a new e mail address press E mail Address Entry Press E mail Address enter the destination e mail address and then press OK 7 4 To set an address from the address book press E mail Address Book Press Address Book Select the destination from the address book and press OK NOTE For information on specifying destinations refer to Specifying Destination on page 3 28 The selected e mail addresses is displayed NOTE You can view information on the selected destinations by pressing Detail 5 Press OK Automatic Job Log History Transmission This function automatically sends the job log history to the specified destinations whenever a set number of jobs has been logged Use the procedure below to set automatic job log history transmission 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Report Next of Sending Job Log History and then Change of Auto Sending Status Job Cancel u 3 Press On and enter the number of jobs in the job ij Send job log history to the specified destination after a set number of jobs log h
239. l eject table 6 Original stopper 7 Opening handle Originals Supported by the Document Processor The document processor supports the following types of originals Weight 45 to 160 g m Size Maximum A3 to Minimum A5 R Maximum Ledger to Minimum Statement R Capacity Plain paper 80 g m Colored paper Recycled paper 75 sheets Mixed sized originals 30 sheets Thick paper 120 g m 49 sheets Thick paper 160 g m 37 sheets Art paper 1 sheet High quality paper 110 g m 54 sheets Originals Not Supported by the Document Processor Do not use the document processor for the following types of originals Soft originals such as vinyl sheets Transparencies such as OHP film Carbon paper Originals with very slippery surfaces Originals with adhesive tape or glue Wet originals Originals with correction fluid which is not dried Irregularly shaped non rectangular originals Originals with cut out sections Crumpled paper Originals with folds Straighten the folds before loading Failure to do so may cause the originals to jam Originals bound with clips or staples Remove the clips or staples and straighten curls wrinkles or creases before loading Failure to do so may cause the originals to jam 2 34 Preparation before Use How to Load Originals IMPORTANT Before loading originals be sure that there are no originals left on the original eject table Originals left on the origina
240. l eject table may cause the new originals to jam 1 Adjust the original width guides to fit the originals 2 Place the originals Put the side to be scanned or the first side of two sided originals face up Slide the leading edge into the document processor as far as it will go The original placement indicator will be lit IMPORTANT Confirm that the original width guides exactly fit the originals If there is a gap readjust the original width guides The gap may cause the originals to jam Ensure that loaded originals do not exceed the level indicator Exceeding the maximum level may cause the originals to jam see the figure Originals with punched holes or perforated lines should be placed in such a way that the holes or perforations will be scanned last not first The original placement indicator is lit or unlit depending on how originals are placed Indications and their status are as follows e Green left indicator lit Original is placed properly Green left indicator blinking Original is not placed properly Remove and place again Red right indicator blinking Original is jammed Remove the jammed original and place it properly 2 35 Preparation before Use 2 36 3 Basic Operation This chapter explains the following operations MN Plats p16 oT 07 9 siansa ia o aiaia 3 2 e Enter key and Quick No Search key saciccccaccrstinis sieeecsceccenienraxincteosinns 3 2
241. lacement directions on the touch panel Placement direction Originals Vertical direction Horizontal direction XXviii 1 Part Names This chapter identifies the machine parts and operation panel keys lt Qperation FN ease actecensaiasadasn cinncteanpasapaangnainaesseasdenanamrencactceatelapsisiattnn e MachihE ani hess octet steps pesans tava nate aed aAA Part Names Operation Panel Displays the Status Job Cancel screen Displays the System Menu Displays number of sheets printed and number of pages scanned Blinks during printing operation Blinks while data is transmitted Blinks while data is received System Ment Counter Bernt ae Sse Receive J Cen Document Box i eSI ee Accessibility Display Displays the Copy screen Displays the screen for sending You can also change this to show the address book screen Switches the touch panel display to enlarged display in the Copy screen or Send screen Displays the Document Box screen Displays help guidance Displays the Application screen Displays the Program screen Part Names Blinks while the machine is accessing the hard disk fax memory or USB memory general purpose item Lights or blinks when an error occurs and a job is stopped Displays the Interrupt Copy screen Ends operation logs out on the Administration screen Puts the mach
242. lanation it is assumed that user login administration is enabled For details on User Logon privileges refer to User Privileges on page 3 38 Creating a New Custom Box Use the procedure below to create a new box in the user box 1 Press the Document Box key lis Custom Box 2 Press Custom Box and then Register Edit Box CRATER QUEL MCE PESTS 0001 SALES Anonymous Search Na F a Search No 1 1 Register Edit Box Vv Store File k fa 08 08 2009 10 10 3 Press Add 4 Press Change for each item enter the information and then press OK The table below lists the items to be set ltem Detail Enter the box number by pressing or number keys The box number can be from 0001 to 1000 A Custom Box should have a unique number If you enter 0000 the smallest number available will be automatically assigned Box Name Enter a box name consisting of up to 32 characters Refer to the Character Entry Method on Appendix 10 for details on entering characters Box Password User access to the box can be restricted by specifying a password to protect the box Entering a password is not mandatory Enter the same password of up to 16 characters in both Password and Confirm Password Document Box item Detail Usage Restriction To preserve the hard disk capacity the storage capacity for a box can be restricted To enable a capacity restriction enter a val
243. lass platen with a soft cloth dampened with alcohol or mild detergent IMPORTANT Do not use thinner or other organic solvents Original Cover SUA F F TE ii Maintenance Slit Glass Dual scanning area JAN Clean the slit glass 1 Open the document processor 2 Clean the surface of the slit glass located on the left side with the supplied dry cloth 3 Close the document processor and press End Note that dirty glass and sheet may cause black streaks to appear in the output If black streaks or dirt appears in copies when using the optional document processor clean the slit glass with the supplied cleaning cloth The message Clean the slit glass may be displayed if the slit glass requires cleaning When using the document processor to allow dual scanning clean the dual scanning unit also IMPORTANT Wipe the slit glasses with the dry accessory cloth Do not use water soap or solvents for cleaning 1 Remove the cloth from the cleaning cloth compartment 2 Open the document processor and wipe the slit glass a 3 Wipe the white guide b on the document processor 4 Close the document processor top cover and return the cleaning cloth to the cleaning cloth compartment 5 Press End Maintenance Separator Clean the separator regularly at least monthly to ensure optimum output quality 1 Open the front cove
244. le Name doc270420051 45608 Job Type Copy 1234 Use the procedure below to enable job finish notification when making copies 1 Press the Copy key Place the originals on the platen 2 3 Press Advanced Setup and then Job Finish Notice 4 Ready to copy Copies To select the destination from the address book press Address Book on the left of the screen and 20 ES NONGS then press Address Book in the next screen Select ra the destination to be notified then press OK Destination Detail You can view information on the notification destination by pressing Detail Fea Address Book 08 08 2009 10 10 Ready to copy Copies To directly enter the E mail address press Address Entry Press E mail Address enter the dob Finish Notice address and press OK Be a 5 Press OK ZE 6 Press the Start key to start copying Upon completion of the job an E mail notice is sent to the selected destination Add Shortcut 08 08 2009 10 10 4 34 Copying Functions File Name Names a copy job Add other information such as date and time or job number as necessary You can check a job history or job status using the job name date and time or job number specified here Use the procedure below to assign a name to your copy job 1 Press the Copy key Place the originals on the platen 2 3 Press Advanced Setup and then File Name Entry 4 Press File Name ent
245. le to withstand the heat of printing Transparencies must meet the following conditions Must withstand at least 190 C Appendix 17 Appendix Thickness 0 100 to 0 110 mm Material Polyester Dimensional accuracy 0 7 mm Squareness of corners 90 0 2 To avoid problems use the multi purpose tray for transparencies and load transparencies with the long side facing the machine If transparencies jam frequently at output try pulling the leading edge of sheets gently as they are ejected Hagaki Before loading Hagaki into the multi purpose tray fan them and align the edges If the Hagaki paper is curled straighten it before loading Printing onto curled Hagaki may cause jams Use unfolded Oufuku Hagaki available at post offices Some Hagaki may still have rough edges developed by a paper cutter on the back side Remove any such rough edges by placing the Hagaki on a flat surface and rubbing the edges gently a few times with a ruler Envelopes Use the multi purpose tray for envelopes Due to the structure of envelopes printing evenly over the entire surface may not be possible in some cases Thin envelopes in particular may be wrinkled by the machine in some cases as they pass through Before purchasing envelopes in volume try testing a sample to ensure the print quality Storing envelopes for a long period may cause them to become wrinkled Thus keep the package sealed until you are ready to u
246. lect the default original image Press OK Scan Resolution Select the default scanning resolution The options are 600x600dpi 400x400dpi Ultra Fine 300x300dpi 200x400dpi Super Fine 200x200dpi Fine 200x100dpi Normal Use the procedure below to select the default resolution setting 1 2 3 4 Press the System Menu key Press Common Settings v Next of Function Defaults and then Change of Scan Resolution Select the default resolution Press OK Color Selection Select the default color mode for scanning documents The available default settings are shown below Color mode Description Auto Color Color Gray Auto Color Color B amp W Automatically recognize whether the document is color or black and white and scan color documents in Full Color and black and white documents in Grayscale Automatically recognize whether the document is color or black and white and scan color documents in Full Color and black and white documents in Black and White Full Color Scan document in full color Grayscale Black amp White Scan document in grayscale for smoother and finer finish Scan document in black and white File size is smaller than Full Color or Grayscale Use the procedure below to select the default color mode 1 Press the System Menu key Default Setting System Menu 2 Press Common Settings v Next of Function Defaults and then Change of Color
247. led correctly Set it correctly Staple jam If a staple jam occurs the machine will stop and the location of the jam will be indicated on the touch panel Leave the machine on and follow the instruction to remove the jammed staple System error System error has occurred Confirm that the Attention indicator is lighting and then turn the main power switch off and on The phone receiver is off the hook Put down the receiver The removable memory is not formatted Is the removable memory formatted by this machine Use the removable memory formatted by this machine Top tray of the machine is full of paper Remove paper from the top tray and press Continue Unknown Toner Installed PC Is the unauthorized product installed Install our genuine product that is specified for this machine Warning low memory Job cannot be started Try again later 10 10 Troubleshooting Responding to Send Error When an error occurs during transmission Send Error appears Check the error code and error message below and follow the corresponding corrective actions Error Message Corrective Actions Reference Page Failed to send the e mail Check the host name of the SMTP Failed to send i FAX server on the Embedded Web Server Failed to send via FTP Check the host name of FTP Failed to send via SMB Check the host name of SMB Failed to send via SMB
248. lly and choose the desired level Is the toner distributed evenly within the toner container Shake the toner container from side to side about several times Is there a message indicating the addition of toner Replace the toner container Is the paper damp Replace the paper with new paper Is the drum dirty Carry out Drum Refresh Is EcoPrint mode enabled Disable EcoPrint mode 10 2 Troubleshooting Symptom Printouts are too dark Checkpoints Is the machine in Auto Density mode Corrective Actions Set the correct density level for auto density Reference Page Is the machine in Manual Density mode Use Image Quality to set the correct density level When changing the default density level adjust the density manually and choose the desired level Copies have a moire pattern dots grouped together in patterns and not aligned uniformly Is the original a printed photograph Set the image quality to Print Photo Printouts are not clear Did you choose appropriate image quality for the original Select appropriate image quality 9 2 Printouts are dirty Is the platen or the document processor dirty Clean the platen or the document processor 9 2 Is the transfer roller dirty Brush the transfer roller clean 9 5 Is the drum dirty Is the Printed Document Guard Kit enabled Carry out
249. mber assigned automatically set 0000 NOTE Address Number is an ID for a group You can select any available number out of 2 000 numbers for contacts and 500 numbers for groups If you specify an address number that is already in use an error message appears when you press Register and the number cannot be registered If you set 0000 as the address number the address is registered under the lowest available number ol Press OK The Add Group screen reappears Press Change of Name Enter the group name displayed on the Address Book not more than 32 characters NOTE Refer to the Character Entry Method on page Appendix 10 for details on entering characters Press Member 9 Press Add 10 Select destinations contacts to add to the group NOTE Destinations can be sorted or searched by destination name or address number Refer to Specifying Destination on page 3 28 for Address List 11 Press OK If you have more destinations to add repeat Steps 9 to 11 12 Check if the selected destination was added to the group and press Register Now the group is added to the Address Book Editing a Destination Edit delete the destinations Contacts you added to the Address Book Use the procedure below to edit a destination 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Edit Destination and then Register Edit of Address Book 3 Select a destination or group to edit NOTE Destinations can be sorted
250. ms and conditions Neither party shall be bound by any statement or representation not contained in this Agreement No change in this Agreement is effective unless written and signed by properly authorized representatives of each party By opening this diskette package you agree to accept the terms and conditions of this Agreement XXIV Energy Saving Control Function The device comes equipped with a Low Power Mode where energy consumption is reduced after a certain amount of time elapses since the device was last used as well as a Sleep where printer and fax functions remain in a waiting state but power consumption is still reduced to a minimum when there is no activity with the device within a set amount of time Low Power Mode The device automatically enters Low Power Mode when 1 minute have passed since the device was last used The amount of time of no activity that must pass before Low Power Mode is activated may be lengthened For more information refer to Low Power Mode and Auto Low Power Mode on page 2 9 Sleep The device automatically enters Sleep when 15 minutes have passed since the device was last used The amount of time of no activity that must pass before Sleep is activated may be lengthened For more information see Sleep and Auto Sleep on page 2 10 Automatic 2 Sided Copy Function This device includes 2 sided copying as a standard function For example by copying two 1 sided originals onto a single sheet of pape
251. n Press Off to delete a key from the Quick Setup 5 Press OK If you overwrite the setting a confirmation screen appears Press Yes 8 27 Default Setting System Menu Sending Settings The sending settings allow you to specify the following sending function options e Quick Setup Registration 8 28 e Destination Check before Send 8 29 e Color Type 8 29 Entry Check for New Destination 8 30 Setting the Default Send Screen 8 30 NOTE If user login administration is enabled you can only change the settings by logging in with administrator privileges Quick Setup Registration Select the sending functions to be registered for Quick Setup Six keys of the Quick Setup screen are allocated to typical functions but can be changed as necessary Six items in the following options are available Original Size 2 sided Book Original Sending Size Original Orientation File Format Density Original Image Scan Resolution FAX TX Resolution Color Selection Zoom Continuous Scan Use the procedure below to register the Quick Setup functions 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Send and Next of Quick Setup Registration 3 Press Change of the function to be registered in Quick Setup 4 Select a key 1 6 allocated on the Quick Setup Registration screen Press Off to delete a key from the Quick Setup 5 Press OK If you overwrite the setting a confirmation screen appears Press Yes
252. n performed Select this item if black streak remains after using On Low The reproduction of the image becomes lower when using On Low NOTE Using Correcting Fine Black Line can impair reproduction of fine characters It is recommended to keep the default Off 8 43 Default Setting System Menu Use the procedure below to specify the setting for correcting fine black lines 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press x Adjustment Maintenance and then Change of Correcting Black Line 3 Press Off On Low or On High 4 Press OK System Initialization Initialize the hard disk mounted on the machine to return to the default mode Refer to System Initialization on page 8 63 about the initialization procedures Display Brightness Set the brightness of the touch panel Use the procedure below to adjust the display brightness 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Adjustment Maintenance and then Change of Display Brightness 3 Press 1 4 Darker Lighter to adjust brightness 4 Press OK Silent Mode Make the machine run more quietly Select this mode when the running noise is uncomfortable Use the procedure below to set Silent mode 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Adjustment Maintenance and then Change of Silent Mode 3 Press Off or On 4 Press OK Auto Color Correction This setting allows you to adjust the detection level used by the machine to dete
253. n the multi purpose tray 2 Adjust the paper width guides to the width of the paper 3 Insert the paper along the paper width guides into the tray until it stops IMPORTANT Keep the side that was closest the package seal facing up Curled paper must be uncurled before use Straighten the top edge if it is curled When loading paper into the multi purpose tray check that there is no paper left over in the tray from a previous job before loading the paper If there is just a small amount of paper left over in the multi purpose tray and you want to add more first remove the left over paper from the tray and include it with the new paper before loading the paper back into the tray 2 25 Preparation before Use Loading Envelopes Up to 20 envelopes may be loaded in the multi purpose tray Acceptable envelope sizes are as follows Acceptable Envelope Size Youkei 2 162x114 mm Youkei 4 235x105 mm Monarch 3 7 8 x7 1 2 Envelope 10 Commercial 10 4 1 8 x9 1 2 Envelope DL 110x220 mm Envelope C5 1 2 162x229 mm Open the multi purpose tray Adjust the paper width guides to the width of the envelope For landscape form envelopes close the flap Insert the envelope all the way along the width guides keeping the printing side face up and the edge with the flap facing towards
254. n the original table or on the original eject table may fall off when the document processor is opened Keep the document processor open if the original is 40 mm 1 5 8 or thicker 2 Place the original Put the scanning side facedown and align it flush against the original size indicator plates with the back left corner as the reference point 2 32 Preparation before Use Original size indicator plates Inch models Letter Lettera Legala Ledger Letter 2 Statement Oficio na 11x156 8 11 13 14 il 17 Metric models Abo B6 ASQ Folio B50 A40 B56 Oficio JB4qf11x150 JB5 A4 3 Close the original cover IMPORTANT Do not push the original cover forcefully when you close it Excessive pressure may crack the platen glass NOTE Shadows may be produced around the edges and in the middle of open faced originals CAUTION Do not leave the document processor open A as there is a danger of personal injury 2 33 Preparation before Use Loading Originals in the Document Processor The optional document processor automatically scans each sheet of multiple originals Both sides of two sided originals are scanned Part Names of the Document Processor Original placement indicator 1 2 Top cover 3 Original width guides 4 Original table 5 Origina
255. nals on the platen Press Advanced Setup and then Auto Image Rotation Press On to select Auto Image Rotation Press OK Press the Start key to start copying NOTE This function is only available for black and white copy mode Use the procedure below to make negative image copies 1 2 Press the Copy key Place the originals on the platen Press Advanced Setup and then Negative Image Press On to select Negative Image Press OK Press the Start key to start copying 4 32 Copying Functions Mirror Image Copies the mirrored image of the original NOTE This function is only available for black and white copy mode Use the procedure below to make mirror image copies Press the Copy key Place the originals on the platen Press Advanced Setup and then Mirror Image Press On to select Mirror Image Press OK O oa A Q N a Press the Start key to start copying 4 33 Copying Functions Job Finish Notice Sends a notice by e mail when a job is completed User can be notified of the completion of a copy job while working at a remote desk saving the time spent waiting beside the machine for copying to finish NOTE PC should be configured in advance so that E mail can be used Example of Job Finish Notice To h_pttr owl net net Subject 1234 Job end report mail Job No 000002 Result OK End Time Wed 27 Apr 2005 14 56 08 Fi
256. nd increments can be set The procedure for setting the interrupt clear timer is explained below 1 2 3 4 Press the System Menu key Press v Date Timer v and then Change of Interrupt Clear Timer Press or to enter the time for the interrupt clear timer Press OK 8 50 Default Setting System Menu Editing Destination Address Book Adding One Touch Keys Save frequently used destinations to Address Book or One Touch Keys The saved destinations can be changed The destinations are available for Send as E mail Send to Folder and Fax Transmission optional Adding a Destination Add a new destination to the Address Book There are two registering methods contacts and groups When adding a group enter the group name and select group members from the Address Book NOTE If user login administration is enabled you can only edit destinations in the Address Book by logging in with administrator privileges Adding a contact A maximum of 1 000 contact addresses can be registered Each address can include the information such as destination name E mail address FTP server folder path computer folder path and FAX No optional Use the procedure below to register a new individual contact 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Edit Destination Register Edit of Address Book Add Contact and then Next GE 3 To specify the address number press Change in Address Number 4 Pr
257. nd press Print NOTE If a password is set for the Custom Box in advance enter the correct password j aame 1U LU ZUU0 U9 49 OU MII C 8 sie 10 10 2008 09 50 36 MB J aie 10 10 2008 09 55 21 MB LJ D 5File 10 10 2008 10 00 08 08 2009 10 10 6 Ifthe document is protected by a password enter the password using the numeric keys 7 Specify the number of copies to print as desired 8 Press Start Print to start printing Upon completion of printing the Private Print job is automatically deleted 6 12 Document Box Deleting a Document You can delete documents stored in a Private Print Stored Job box Use the procedure below to delete a document Press the Document Box key Press Job Box Select Private Print Stored Job and press Open Select the creator of the document and press Open Private Print Stored Job To delete the document select the document and press Delete When the delete confirmation screen appears press Yes Lad 2File 10 10 2008 09 45 LJ are 10 10 2008 09 50 If the document is protected by a password enter L 84i 10 10 2008 09 55 the password using the numeric keys and the Lj a sre ni document is deleted 08 08 2009 10 10 Quick Copy Proof and Hold Print Box Quick Copy Proof and Hold box stores the print data which is printed by using the printer driver as a Quick Copy or Proof and Hold Print job Refer
258. nd retrieval system without permission in writing from the Publisher Introduction Thank you for your purchase of d Copia 3001MF This Operation Guide is intended to help you operate the machine correctly perform routine maintenance and take a simple troubleshooting action as necessary so that you can always use the machine in good condition Please read this Operation Guide before you start using the machine and keep it close to the machine for easy reference We recommend the use of our own brand supplies We will not be liable for any damage caused by the use of third party supplies in this machine In this Operation Guide d Copia 3001MF is referred to as 30 ppm model Included Guides The following guides are supplied with the machine Refer to them as necessary Operation Guide This Guide Describes how to load paper basic copy print and scan operations and troubleshooting Safety Conventions in This Guide The sections of this guide and parts of the machine marked with symbols are safety warnings meant to protect the user other individuals and surrounding objects and ensure correct and safe usage of the machine The symbols and their meanings are indicated below WARNING Indicates that serious injury or even death may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect compliance with the related points CAUTION Indicates that personal injury or mechanical damage A may result from insufficient attention to
259. nding procedure Send again Send again Contact your Service Representative FAX System S Operation Guide Appendix Error Code List 10 14 Troubleshooting Clearing Paper Jams Job No 000021 Job Name doci01020081010 User Name Mike If a paper jam occurs the touch panel will display Paper Jam and the machine will stop Refer to these TERENE procedures to remove the jammed paper 2 Open the fuser cover and remove the jammed paper 3 Close the cover 08 08 2009 10 10 Jam Location Indicators If a paper jam occurs the location of the jam will be displayed as the following figure with a letter corresponding to the affected component in the machine Clearing instructions will also be displayed Job No 000021 Job Name doc101020081010 Paper Jam Location indicaisi Paper Jam Location Reference Page Cassette 1 Cassette 2 Cassette 3 or 4 Option Multi Purpose Tray Inside the left cover 1 2 or 3 Duplex Unit Paper Feed Unit A B C D E F G H Document processor Option Document finisher Option Built in finisher Option Job Separator Option 10 15 Troubleshooting After you remove the jam the machine will warm up again and the error message will be cleared The machine resumes with the page which jam has occurred Precautions with Paper Jams Do not reuse jammed paper e Ifthe paper tears
260. ngs 8 22 Continuous Scan 8 15 Density 8 18 EcoPrint 8 21 E mail Subject Body 8 19 File Format 8 17 File Name 8 18 High Comp PDF Image 8 22 JPEG TIFF Print 8 24 Margin 8 20 Original Image 8 15 Original Orientation 8 15 PDF TIFF JPEG Image 8 22 Repeat Copying 8 23 Scan Resolution 8 16 XPS Fit to Page 8 24 Zoom 8 18 Default Gateway Appendix 27 Default Screen 8 2 Density Adjustment Copy 3 7 Send 5 17 Destination 8 51 Adding 8 51 Adding a contact 8 51 Adding a Group 8 53 Choosing by One Touch Key 3 30 Index 2 Index Choosing by Speed Dial 3 30 Choosing from the Address Book 3 28 Editing 8 54 One Touch Key 8 55 Quick No Search key 3 3 Search 3 29 Sending to Different Types of Destinations Multi Sending 3 30 Device 7 16 Canceling FAX Communication 7 18 Checking Status 7 16 Configuring 7 17 Displaying Screen 7 16 USB Memory 7 17 DHCP Appendix 28 DHCP IPv6 Appendix 28 Document Box 3 31 6 1 Basic Operation 3 33 Custom Box 3 31 6 2 Document deletion time 6 3 Form Overlay 6 7 Job Box 3 31 6 12 Quick Setup Registration 8 31 What is Document Box 3 31 Document Finisher Appendix 4 Appendix 25 Document Guard 8 73 Document Processor Appendix 4 Appendix 24 How to Load Originals 2 35 Loading Originals 2 34 Not Supported Originals 2 34 Part Names 2 34 Supported Originals 2 34 Double Copy 4 27 dpi Appendix 28 Duplex 3 11 8 35 Duplex Unit 1 4 E EcoPrint Mode Appendix 28 Copy 4 13 Print 8 34 E mail
261. nt Logout 4 Enter the login password and press OK NOTE If Job Accounting is enabled you can browse the number of pages printed and the number of pages scanned by pressing Check Counter If Network Authentication is selected as the user authentication method either Local or Network can be selected as the authentication destination 5 Check the login user name and password are correct and press Login To log out the machine press the Logout key to return to the login user name login password entry screen Auto Logout Logout is automatically executed in the following cases When the Power key is pressed to enter the sleep mode When auto sleep is activated e When auto panel reset is activated 11 4 Management Adding a User This adds a new user You can add Up to 1 000 users including the default login user name The table below explains the user information to be registered Item Description User Name Enter the name displayed on the user list up to 32 characters Login User Name Enter the login user name to login up to 64 characters The same login user name cannot be registered Login Password Enter the password to login up to 64 characters Access Level Select Administrator or User for user access privileges Account Name Add an account where the user belongs The user who registered his her account name can login without entering the
262. nt JODS ccccceceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeaeeeeeeeeenanees 7 14 e Checking the Remaining Amount of Toner and Papet 000 7 15 e DEVICE Se CATION cia tece ie sicenscccrnenasenpdecnansdsee ae 7 16 7 1 Status Job Cancel Checking Job Status Check the status of jobs being processed or waiting to be printed Available Status Screens The processing and waiting statuses of jobs are displayed as a list on the touch panel in four different screens Printing Jobs Sending Jobs Sending Jobs Timer waiting and Storing Jobs The following job statuses are available Screen Job statuses to be displayed Printing Jobs Copy Printer FAX reception i FAX reception E mail reception Printing from Document Box Job Report List Printing data from removable memory Sending Jobs FAX transmission i FAX transmission PC SMB FTP transmission E mail Application Multiple destination Sending Job FAX using Delayed transmission Storing Jobs Displaying Status Screens Scan FAX i FAX Printer Join Box Document Copy Box Document Use the procedure below to display the Status screen 1 Press the Status Job Cancel key 2 The Status screen appears Press either of Printing Jobs Sending Jobs or Storing Jobs to check the status To check the scheduled transmission job press Sending Jobs and then Scheduled Job For an explanation o
263. nting setting 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press User Login Job Accounting 3 If user login administration is disabled the user authentication screen appears Enter your login user name and password and then press Login For this you need to login with administrator privileges Refer to Adding a User on page 11 5 for the default login user name and password 4 Press Next of Job Accounting Setting and then Change of Job Accounting 5 Press On To disable job accounting press Off 11 14 Management 6 Press OK NOTE When the display returns to the System Menu default screen logout is automatically executed and the screen to enter the Account ID appears To continue the operation enter the Account ID Login Logout If job accounting is enabled an account ID entry screen appears each time you use this machine Use the procedure below to login and logout Login 1 Inthe screen below enter the account ID using the eee numeric keys and press Login NOTE If you entered a wrong character press the Clear key and enter the account ID again If the entered account ID does not match the registered ID a warning beep will sound and login will fail Enter the correct account ID By pressing Counter Check you can refer to the Ba ick Coren number of pages printed and the number of pages aa 8 scanned When the screen to enter the login user name and password appears If use
264. o Sleep is turned on Press OK Auto Error Clear If an error occurs during printing the print job stops to wait for the next step to be taken by the user In the Auto Error Clear mode automatically clear the error after a set amount of time elapses The following errors are automatically cleared Print overrun Memory is full Auto Error Clear ON OFF Select whether to use Auto Error Clear or not Use the procedure below to specify the auto error clear setting 1 2 3 4 Press the System Menu key Press v Date Timer and then Change of Auto Error Clear Press Off or On Press OK 8 49 Default Setting System Menu Error Clear Timer If you select On for Auto Error Clear set the amount of time to wait before automatically clearing errors Options are between 5 and 495 seconds every five seconds NOTE If you select Off for Auto Error Clear the time display does not appear Use the procedure below to set the automatic error clear delay 1 2 3 4 Press the System Menu key Press v Date Timer v and then Change of Error Clear Timer Press or to enter the time until printing restarts You cannot use the numeric keys to enter this value Press OK Interrupt Clear Timer Set the period after which the machine reverts to Normal mode when it has been set to Interrupt Copy mode and then left unused Any period between 5 and 495 seconds in five seco
265. o and A4 R B4 and B5 IS Y I alll Copying Functions Originals of Different Widths Place all originals of different widths The supported combinations of originals are as follows NOTE When mixing the original sizes as using the following combination Folio A4 R and B5 R make sure to set the System Menu key gt Common Settings gt Original Paper Settings gt Original Auto Detect to On for Folio For more information refer to Automatic Detection of Originals Available for metric models only on page 8 9 A3 B4 A4 and B5 ike D i all B4 A4 R and B5 Folio A4 R and B5 R 4 8 Copying Functions Selecting How to Copy Originals Select whether you wish to create individual copies on different size paper matching the original sizes or to produce all copies on the same size paper NOTE This function is available regardless of whether originals have the same width or not The table below shows the finished document sizes for the different original size options Option Description Mixed Size Copies Originals are detected individually for size and copied to the same size paper as originals Same Size Copies Originals are all copied to t
266. o center then image when sending a scanned image 1 Press the Send key Place the originals on the platen Press Advanced Setup and then Centering Press On Centering is performed Press OK O oa A W N Specify the destination and press the Start key to start sending 5 6 Sending Functions Mixed Sized Originals Using the optional document processor the originals of different sizes can be placed in a batch and sent In this operation up to 30 originals of different sizes can be placed in the document processor at the same time Originals of the Same Width When the original widths are the same the combinations of originals that can be placed are as follows e Ledger and Letter A3 and A4 e Legal and Letter R Folio and A4 R Legal Letter R Letter R Folio A4R A4R p B4andB5 He Y i alll on Sending Functions When the original widths are different The combinations of originals of different sizes that can be placed together are as follows NOTE When mixing the original sizes as using the following combination Folio A4 R and B5 R make sure to set the System Menu key gt Common Settings gt Original Paper Settings gt Original Auto Detect to On for Folio For more information refer to Automatic Detection of Originals Avail
267. o the optional built in finisher or document finisher Job Separator Delivery on the optional job separator Select Face Up print surface up or Face Down print surface down for paper orientation at output NOTE The optional job separator built in finisher or document finisher are required FAX RX data output can be specified when the optional fax kit is installed Use the procedure below to select the output tray 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Common Settings and then Next of Paper Output 3 Press Change of Copy Custom Box Printer or FAX Port 1 or FAX Port 2 NOTE FAX Port 1 appears when the optional fax kit is installed If you have 2 optional fax kits installed Fax Port 2 appears You can specify the output tray for the second kit Dual FAX Default Setting System Menu 4 Select Output Tray For Finisher Tray select Face Up print surface up or Face Down print surface down as the paper orientation at output Press OK When selecting Face Up print surface up as the paper orientation at output press Page Order with Face Up and then select the order of the output pages from Ascending or Descending NOTE Selecting Descending accelerates the starting time of copying 7 When changing the output tray of Copy Custom Box move to the copy or document box screen and press the Reset key Orientation Confirmation Select whether to display a screen f
268. ocessor Confidential document is detected Failed to specify Job Accounting The machine detects the documents guard pattern The scanned document is printed in blank and sending of the document is canceled The job is canceled Press End Failed to store job retention data The job is canceled Press End 10 7 Troubleshooting Error Message FAX box limit exceeded Checkpoints Corrective Actions FAX box is full and no further storage is available The job is canceled Press End Try to perform the job again after printing or deleting data from the FAX box Reference Page Finisher tray is full of paper Is the acceptable storage capacity exceeded for the document finisher tray Remove paper from the document finisher tray If printing can be restarted the touch panel display will prompt you to press Continue Then press Continue Hard Disk error Job is canceled Press End An error has occurred on the hard disk The possible error codes and their descriptions are as follows 01 Initialization error Initialize the hard disk 04 Insufficient space on the hard disk to complete this operation Move or delete data stored on the hard disk to increase available space Incorrect account ID The Account ID does not match Check the registered Account ID Incorrect box password Enter the correct password Incorrect Login U
269. ode must be entered when using Repeat Copy or copies will not be delivered IMPORTANT A Repeat Copy job is cleared when the main power switch is turned off Repeat Copy is not available when the machine is equipped with the optional Data Security Kit Repeat Copy cannot be used when the maximum number of Repeat Copy jobs to retain in the document box is set to zero refer to Maximum Number of Repeat Copy Jobs Retained on page 4 37 You can select Repeat Copy as default setting Refer to Repeat Copying on page 8 23 Giving a file name to a copy job will facilitate identification of the data when copying refer to File Name on page 4 35 Selecting Repeat Copy Use the procedure below to select repeat copying Press the Copy key Place the originals on the platen Press Advanced Setup and then Repeat Copy AA O N a Press On Ready to copy cre To register a password press Keys and enter a 4 digit password Password 4digits IMPORTANT If you forget the pass code Repeat Copy will be unavailable Make a note of the pass code beforehand if necessary 08 08 2009 10 10 5 Press OK 6 Press the Start key to start copying and register this job as a Repeat Copy job 4 36 Copying Functions Outputting Repeat Copy Jobs The Repeat Copy jobs are stored in the Document Box Refer to Job Box on page 3 31 to print out the Repeat Copy jobs Maximum Number of Repeat Copy Jobs Re
270. of Account Name Account Name Change 01 Account 6 Enter the account name and press OK The Account 1D oar Account screen reappears 00001000 ae gt gt Copy Restriction Total Change Off Print Restriction Total Change SSS SS A EE ou a NOTE Refer to the Character Entry Method on Appendix 10 for details on entering characters Ale wy Cancel J l Register 08 08 2009 10 10 7 Follow steps 5 and 6 above to enter the Account ID NOTE Any account ID that has already registered cannot be used Enter any other account ID 8 Activate or deactivate restriction Refer to Restricting the Use of the Machine on page 11 18 9 Press Register to add a new account on the Account List 11 16 Management Managing Accounts This changes the registered account information or deletes the account Use the procedure below to manage accounts User Login Job Accounting Accounting List i Register an account that is permitted to use this machine Maximum 1000 Sort Name y ount 00001000 01 Account 02 Account 00002000 03 Account 00003000 04 Account 00004000 05 Account 00005000 Account xx Account Name 01 Account Account ID 00001000 Detail Delete Change 2 Change gt Copy Restriction Total Off Change gt 08 08 2009 10 10 Print Restriction Total Change off 2 Ale a Cance
271. of Default Setting and then Change of Auto File Deletion Time Document Box eo Sey eee 3 Set the time at which the document is deleted by _ Setthe time to automatically delete stored documents pressing Press Keys to enter the time directly using the numeric keys Hour al Sale T Cancel J OK Status 08 08 2009 10 10 4 Press OK The time for document deletion is set Storing Documents The procedure for storing documents in a custom box is explained below 1 Press the Document Box key 2 Place the originals in the document processor or on the platen Customibon 3 Press Custom Box select the box where the l document will be stored and then press Store File NOTE The Custom Box to store a file needs to be created in advance If a custom box is protected by a password enter the correct password Register Edit Box 08 08 2009 10 10 4 Select the type of originals scanning density etc as necessary 5 Press the Start key The original is scanned and the data is stored in the specified Custom Box NOTE Enter up to 64 characters as the file name 6 4 Document Box Printing Documents The procedure for printing documents in a custom box is explained below 1 Press the Document Box key 2 Press Custom Box select the box containing the document you want to print and press Open NOTE If a custom box is protected by a password
272. oklet to produce a booklet from two sided originals EA an open book original Off Off sue Press Book gt gt Booklet to produce a booklet from Original Orientation 08 08 2009 10 10 5 If you selected 2 sided gt gt Booklet or Book gt gt Booklet choose the binding orientation in Finishing If you selected 1 sided gt gt Booklet choose the binding orientation in Finishing 6 Ifyou choose 1 sided gt gt Booklet 2 sided gt gt Booklet or Book gt gt Booklet you can add the cover Press Cover select Cover and press OK 7 Press Original Orientation to choose orientation of the originals either Top Edge Top or Top Edge Left Then press OK Press OK Platen and press the Start key Copying begins NOTE When using the platen be sure to place the originals in page order If the originals are placed on the platen consecutively replace each original after pressing the Start key After scanning all originals press Finish Scan to start copying 4 20 Copying Functions Cover Mode Add a cover to the finished copies You can copy the first page and or the last page onto colored paper or thick paper fed from the different paper source than the regular one The following two options are available Paper for the cover is supplied from the multi purpose tray To feed the cover paper from the cassette refer to Paper Source for Cover Paper on page
273. on another computer on the same AppleTalk network Auto Form Feed Timeout During data transmission the machine may sometimes have to wait until receiving the next data This is the auto form feed timeout When the preset timeout passes the machine automatically put paper out However no output is performed if the last page has no data to be printed Auto IP Auto IP is a module that enables dynamic IPv4 addresses to be assigned to a device on startup However DHCP requires a DHCP server Auto IP is a server less method of choosing an IP address IP addresses between 169 254 0 0 to 169 254 255 255 are reserved for Auto IP and assinged automatically Auto Paper Selection A function to automatically select paper in the same size as original at printing Auto Sleep A mode designed for electrical power saving activated when the machine is left unused or data transfer for a specific period In Sleep mode power consumption is kept to a minimum Bonjour Bonjour also known as zero configuration networking is a service that automatically detects computers devices and services on an IP network Bonjour because an industry standard IP protocol is used allows devices to automatically recognize each other without an IP address being specified or DNS server being set Bonjour also sends and receives network packets by UDP port 5353 If a firewall is enabled the user must check that UDP port 5353 is left open so that Bonjour will run correctly
274. on filter 4 Press OK 8 57 Default Setting System Menu Internet Browser Setup This procedure sets up the Internet browser application You can specify the following Internet browser settings e Internet Browser Setting e Browser Preferences e Proxy Settings Internet Browser Setting This selects whether or not the Internet browser is used Use the procedure below to specify the Internet browser setting 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press vw and then Internet NOTE If user login administration is disabled the user authentication screen appears Enter your login user name and password and then press Login For this you need to login with administrator privileges Refer to Adding a User on page 11 5 for the default login user name and password 3 Press Change of Internet Browser 4 Press On or Off 5 Press OK Browser Preferences This specifies Internet browser preferences such as your home page setting and how pages are displayed NOTE This is not displayed if you selected Offin Internet Browser Setting page 8 58 Use the procedure below to set your Internet browser preferences 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press w and then Internet NOTE If user login administration is disabled the user authentication screen appears Enter your login user name and password and then press Login For this you need to login with administrator privileges Refer to Adding a Use
275. on screen appears press Yes The application is deleted 8 62 Default Setting System Menu System Initialization Initialize the hard disk mounted on the machine to return to the default mode CAUTION System initialization will erase Custom Document Boxes data stored in Document Box addresses in the Address Book user property account information and settings NOTE This item will not be displayed if the optional Data Security Kit is installed Refer to the Data Security kit E Operation Guide on the bundled CD ROM about the functions added when the Data Security Kit is installed and related procedures Using Network Print Monitor allows you to back up addresses in the Address Book Press the System Menu key Press v Adjustment Maintenance and then Execute of System Initialization If user login administration is disabled the user authentication screen appears Enter your login user name and password and then press Login For this you need to login with administrator privileges Refer to Adding a User on page 11 5 for the default login user name and password 4 When the confirmation screen appears press Yes GE Initialization starts IMPORTANT The Formatting Do not turn off the main power switch message appears during initialization Wait until initialization ends 5 Once the initialization ends the message Task is completed Turn the main power switch off and on appears Turn t
276. on the OK on the Auto touch panel indicating that the Enter key performs im aa the same action as OK Plain Plain a Pain Sea gt 2 To copy using the selected paper press the Enter pain key or OK ECEE CE Using the Quick No Search key Use the Quick No Search keys to perform an action by simply entering a number directly using the numeric keys For example you can specify the speed dial for a transmission destination or recall a stored program by its program number The Quick No Search key performs the same action as the No displayed on the touch panel The use of the Quick No Search key is explained below using an example in which a speed dial number is specified and used to select a destination For more information on speed dialing refer to Specifying Destination on page 3 28 1 Press the Quick No Search key or No in the basic send screen gl Ready to send Destination 2 Inthe number entry screen use the numeric keys to enter the speed dial number Destination Pree A OFFICE 1234567890 _ E mail Addr Entry Enter One Touch key number 1 J using keys Folder Path 1 0001 1000 Entry On Hook Direct _ 0011 C FAX No Entry 0001 3 If you entered speed dial number between 1 and 3 digits long press the Enter key or OK The specified destination appears in the destination list Place original 1 BBB i FAX Addr Entry 009
277. one of 11 levels from 100 to 0 Status of waste toner box You can check the status of waste toner box Paper You can check the size orientation type and remaining amount of paper in each paper source The remaining amount of paper is shown by 11 levels from 100 to 0 however the paper in the multi purpose tray is shown by 2 levels as 100 and 0 Others You can check the status of staples NOTE If the optional built in finisher or document finisher are installed the Others section provides whether or not staples are available 7 15 Status Job Cancel Device Communication Configure the devices lines installed or connected to this machine or check their status You can also control devices depending on their status Displaying Device Communication Screen The procedure for using the Device Communication screen is explained below 1 Press the Status Job Cancel key 2 Press Device Communication The screen to check the status or configure the devices is displayed Check of Device Status Paper Supplies 08 08 2009 10 10 The items you can check are described below Scanner The status of an original scanning in the document processor optional or the error information paper jam opened cover etc is displayed Printer Error information such as paper jam out of toner or out of paper and status such as waiting or printing are displayed Hard Disk The information such as
278. oner box 1 Open the front cover 2 Remove the waste toner box 3 Peel the sticker off the waste toner box and remove the cap 9 7 Maintenance A 4 Fit the cap into the opening in the waste toner box and attach the sticker over the cap 5 Place the used waste toner box in the provided plastic disposal bag CAUTION Do not attempt to incinerate the toner container or the waste toner box Dangerous sparks may cause burns CAUTION Do not attempt to force open or destroy the toner container or the waste toner box 6 Grip the cleaner rod and slowly pull it out as far as it will go Then push it back in Repeat this procedure 2 or 3 times CAUTION Do not pull strongly on the rod or pull it out completely 9 8 Maintenance 7 Shift the main charger to the right and pull it out about 2 5 cm 8 Take the grid cleaner provided out of its bag and remove the cap 9 Align the grid cleaner with the notch and attach it to the machine 10 While gently holding the grid cleaner in place with your left hand pull the main charger out fully and then push it back to a position where the roller A does not quite reach the white pad on the grid cleaner Repeat this procedure 2 or 3 times CAUTION When pushing the main charger back in A take care not to push it all the way in This could result in damage to copies 9 9 Maintenance 11 With the
279. ontaining the document you want to delete and press Open NOTE If a custom box is protected by a password enter the correct password 3 Select the document you wish to delete by checking the checkbox A Date and Time Search name The document is marked with a checkmark Ouus wg EJ V4U42UU 103 4911 1U LU ZUUS U9 3U Z1 MB 0003 vV 2 0404200710574521 10 10 2008 10 00 21 MB NOTE Delete is disabled until a document is pen selected ma To deselect press the checkbox again and remove the Join Move Copy EE File Cc h eckm a rk EE ae en a P Close Sayas aooo iosta 4 Press Delete The delete confirmation screen appears 5 Press Yes The document is deleted 6 11 Document Box Using a Job Box Private Print Stored Job Box Private Print Stored Job Box stores the print data which is printed by using the printer driver as a Private Print Stored Job Refer to the Printer Driver User Guide on how to print a job as Private Print or Stored Job using the printer driver Printing a Document in Private Print Stored Job Box You can print documents stored in a Private Print Stored Job box Use the procedure below to print a document Press the Document Box key Press Job Box Select Private Print Stored Job and press Open fay T Eo Select the creator of the document to print and press Open Private Print Stored Job 5 Select the document a
280. opies as required according to page number If the optional document finisher is not installed when you use offsetting printed copies are produced after rotating each set or page by 90 NOTE You need to load the same sized paper with different orientation in the paper source other than the selected paper source The paper sizes supported in Offset are A4 B5 Letter and 16K Basic Operation With Document Finisher Original Copy each set Ready to copy Copies Collate Offset Collate sar pe Place original fi Says a 08 08 2009 10 10 Ready to copy Copies Collate Offset Collate Sn Place original On i aaa Each Page raa roras 08 08 2009 10 10 When you use offsetting printed copies are segregated after each set of copies or after each page NOTE The optional document finisher is required The procedure for using collate offset copying is explained below 1 6 Press the Copy key Place the originals on the platen Press Org Paper Finishing and then Collate Offset To use collate copying press On of Collate To use offset copying press Each Set of Offset Press OK If Off is selected for Collate press Off or Each Page of Offset Press OK Press the Start key Copying begins 3 14 Basic Operation Reserve Next This function allows you to reserve the next job during p
281. opy Copies 4 Press the key of the paper source corresponding to 3 the required paper size The cassette in which the ape a paper is loaded is selected IAT G If Auto is selected the paper matching the size of uto o the original is selected automatically Original ron E 5 Press OK e ME piain 10 10 2008 10 10 6 Press the Start key to start copying Copying Functions Selecting the Multi Purpose Tray Change the paper size and media type The available paper sizes and media types are shown in the table below Category Standard Sizes 1 How to Select Choose from the standard size Inch models Ledger Legal Letter Letter R Statement 8 5x13 5 Oficio Il and Executive Metric models A3 B4 A4 A4 R B5 B5 R A5 R B6 B6 R A6 R and Folio Standard Sizes 2 Choose from the standard sizes not included in the Standard Sizes 1 Inch models A3 B4 A4 A4 R B5 B5 R A5 R B6 R A6 R Folio 8K 16K and 16K R Metric models Ledger Legal Letter Letter R Statement 8 5x13 5 Oficio Il Executive 8K 16K and 16K R Others Choose from non standard sizes and custom sizes ISO B5 Envelope 10 Commercial 10 Envelope 9 Commercial 9 Envelope 6 Commercial 6 3 4 Envelope Monarch Envelope DL Envelope C5 Envelope C4 Hagaki Oufuku Hagaki Youkei 4 Youkei 2 and Custom 1 to 4 Enter the size not included in the standard sizes
282. or in each setting Date Timer Date Time ij Set the date and time 7 Press OK Eli E EE Cancel J A 08 08 2009 10 10 2 13 Preparation before Use Network Setup LAN Cable Connection The machine is equipped with network interface which is compatible with network protocols such as TCP IP IPv4 TCP IP IPv6 IPX SPX NetBEUI IPSec and AppleTalk It enables network printing on the Windows Macintosh UNIX NetWare and other platforms This section explains the TCP IP IPv4 Setup and AppleTalk Setup procedures For other network settings refer to the Network Setup on 8 64 e TCP IP IPv4 Setup 2 14 e AppleTalk Setup 2 16 NOTE If user login administration is enabled you can only change the settings by logging in with administrator privileges If user login administration is disabled the user authentication screen appears Enter a login user name and password and press Login Refer to Adding a User on page 11 5 for the default login user name and password TCP IP IPv4 Setup by Entering IP Addresses Set up TCP IP to connect to the Windows network Set the IP addresses subnet masks and gateway addresses The default settings are TCP IP Protocol On DHCP On Bonjour Off Auto IP On NOTE Prior to the IP address entries obtain permission from the network administrator Use the procedure below Press the System Menu key Press System Next of Network and th
283. or The administrator is not required to enter a password to gain access to any box User The user is required to enter a password to gain access to a box which is protected by a password The user is not required to enter a password to gain access to his her own boxes Creating new Custom Boxes when user login administration is enabled If you create a new Custom Box when user login administration is enabled the screen appears and you Box No Change Owner Change eas 0001 El DCBA9876 are can change the owner and permission settings Only Box Name change Usage Restriction Change Al in mini r r n r oe Chang ai g administrators and machine ad strators can create new Custom Boxes Box Password Change Permission Change SOS gt Private 2 Renae T EA Changing the owner Press Change of Owner and 30 day s gt Permit select the new owner for the Free Space Delete after Printed Change box from the displayed list off BEGEER aeee O Then press OK C cne fe rooster _ Changing the permission Press Change of l 08708 20000 10 Permission and select either Private or Shared Then press OK NOTE For information on specifying other settings refer to Creating a New Custom Box on page 6 2 Working With User Privileges When User Login Administration is Enabled When user login administration is enabled the owner of ET P a box with user privileges set can change the following 0001 DCBA987
284. or company name refer to the Paper on Appendix 13 2 21 Preparation before Use Loading Paper in the Cassettes The 2 standard cassettes will each hold plain paper recycled paper or color paper Cassette holds up to 500 sheets 80 g m The following paper sizes are supported Ledger Legal Oficio II 8 5x13 5 Letter Letter R Statement A3 B4 A4 A4 R B5 B5 R A5 Folio 8K 16K and 16K R IMPORTANT e You should not use inkjet printer paper or any paper with a special surface coating Such paper may cause paper jams or other faults e When using media types other than plain paper such as recycled or colored paper always specify the media type setting Refer to Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Cassettes on page 2 28 The cassettes can hold paper with weights up to 120 g m Do not load paper that is heavier than 121 g m in the cassettes Use the multi purpose tray for paper that is heavier than 121 g m 1 Pull the cassette out toward you until it stops NOTE Do not pull out more than one cassette at a time 2 Using the paper length guide move the plate to fit the paper When loading A4 or smaller paper into cassette 1 lift up the paper length guide For B4 or larger paper lower the paper length guide NOTE Paper sizes are marked on the cassette 3 Holding the paper width adjusting tab move the paper width guides to fit the paper
285. or each item and press OK The table below explains the items to be entered Max No of Description Characters Host Name FTP server host name or IP address 64 chars Path Path for the file to be stored e g User ScanData 128 chars If no path is entered the file is stored in the home directory Login User Name User name FTP server login 64 chars Login Password Password for FTP server login 64 chars If you specify a port number other than the default 21 use the Host name port number format e g FTPhostname 1 40 To enter the IPv6 address enclose the address in brackets e g 3ae3 9a0 cd05 b1d2 28a 1fc0 a1 10ae 140 NOTE Refer to the Character Entry Method on page Appendix 10 for details on entering characters Press Connection Test to check the connection to the FTP server you chose If the connection fails check the entries you made 8 52 Default Setting System Menu The Folder SMB Address Press Change of Host Name Path Login User Name and Login Password enter the information for each item and press OK The table below explains the items to be entered Description nae Toe P Characters Host Name Host name or IP address of the sending computer 64 chars Path Path to the folder used to save files e g User ScanData 128 chars Login User Name User name for folder access 64 chars For example abcdnet james smith Login Pass
286. or searched by destination name or address number Refer to Specifying Destination on page 3 28 for Address List 4 Press Detail The procedure differs depending on the details to be edited 8 54 Default Setting System Menu Editing a Contact 1 Change Address Number Name and destination type and address Refer to Adding a contact on page 8 51 for the details After you have completed the changes press Register Press Yes in the change confirmation screen to register the changed destination Editing a Group 1 Change Address Number and Name Refer to Adding a Group on page 8 53 for the details 2 Press Member 3 To delete any destination from the group select the destination and press Delete Press Yes on the screen to confirm the deletion After you have completed the changes press Register Press Yes in the change confirmation screen to register the changed group Deleting a Contact or Group Repeat Steps 1 to 3 press Delete Press Yes on the screen to confirm the deletion Deletion is performed Adding a Destination on One Touch Key GE Add a new destination contact or group A maximum of 1000 destinations can be registered NOTE Refer to Specifying Destination on page 3 28 for use of One Touch Key Use the procedure below to register a new destination under a One Touch key 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Edit Destination and Register Edit of One Touch Key 3 Select a
287. or selecting the orientation of the originals to be placed on the platen when using the following functions For more information refer to page 4 10 for Original Orientation e Duplex e Memo mode e Margin Centering originals e Page numbering e Border erase e Booklets e Combine mode e Staple optional feature Orientation Confirmation Setting Use the procedure below to select the default Orientation Confirmation setting 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Common Settings and Change of Orientation Confirmation 3 Select the default for Off or On 4 Press OK Function Defaults Defaults are the values automatically set after the warm up is completed or the Reset key is pressed Set the defaults for available settings such as copying and sending Setting the frequently used values as defaults makes subsequent jobs easier IMPORTANT When you have changed the defaults to enable the change immediately move to the copy send or document box screen and press the Reset key 8 14 Default Setting System Menu Original Orientation Set the original orientation defaults The available default settings are shown below C Top Edge Top Select the original s top edge at the top Top Edge Left Select the original s top edge at the left Refer to page 4 10 for Original Orientation Use the procedure below to select the default orientation when originals are placed on the platen 1 Press the System
288. orm in accordance with Monotype Imaging published specifications and the diskette will be free from defects in material and workmanship Monotype Imaging does not warrant that the Software is free from all bugs errors and omissions The parties agree that all other warranties expressed or implied including warranties of fitness for a particular purpose and merchantability are excluded Your exclusive remedy and the sole liability of Monotype Imaging in connection with the Software and Typefaces is repair or replacement of defective parts upon their return to Monotype Imaging In no event will Monotype Imaging be liable for lost profits lost data or any other incidental or consequential damages or any damages caused by abuse or misapplication of the Software and Typefaces Massachusetts U S A law governs this Agreement You shall not sublicense sell lease or otherwise transfer the Software and or Typefaces without the prior written consent of Monotype Imaging Use duplication or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at FAR 252 227 7013 subdivision b 3 ii or subparagraph c 1 ii as appropriate Further use duplication or disclosure is subject to restrictions applicable to restricted rights software as set forth in FAR 52 227 19 c 2 You acknowledge that you have read this Agreement understand it and agree to be bound by its ter
289. ort Next of Result Report Setting Next of Send Result Report and then Change of Canceled before Sending 3 Press Off On Press OK 8 40 Default Setting System Menu Adjustment Maintenance Adjust printing quality and conduct machine maintenance e Copy Density Adjustment 8 41 e Send Box Density Adjust 8 41 Print Density 8 42 Drum Refresh 8 42 e Auto Drum Refresh 8 42 e Correcting Fine Black Lines 8 43 e System Initialization 8 44 e Display Brightness 8 44 e Silent Mode 8 44 e Auto Color Correction 8 44 e Gray Adjustment 8 45 NOTE If user login administration is enabled you can only change the settings by logging in with administrator privileges Copy Density Adjustment c Adjust copy density Adjustment can be made in 7 levels both in auto and manual density modes Use the procedure below to adjust the copy density 1 Press the System Menu key Press v Adjustment Maintenance and then Next of Copy Density Adjustment Press Change of Auto or of Manual Press 3 3 Lighter Darker to adjust density Press OK a A W N Send Box Density Adjust Adjust scan density when sending or storing the data in Document Box Adjustment can be made in 7 levels both in auto and manual density modes Use the procedure below to adjust the density 1 Press the System Menu key Press v Adjustment Maintenance and then Next of Send Box
290. ory Remove the USB memory IMPORTANT Be sure to follow the proper procedure to avoid damaging the data or USB memory 1 Press the Document Box key 2 Press Removable Memory E Removable Memory 3 Press Remove Memory jovable Memory 1 Document 10 10 2008 09 30 B 2 Document 10 10 2008 09 40 B 3 Document 10 10 2008 09 50 Memory D 4 Document 10 10 2008 10 00 Information 5 5 Document 10 10 2008 10 05 Removable Memory 08 08 2009 10 10 4 Remove the USB memory after Removable Memory can be safely removed is displayed 6 21 Document Box Saving Documents to USB Memory Scan to USB This function allows you to store scanned image files in USB memory connected to the machine You can store files in PDF TIFF JPEG XPS or high compression PDF format NOTE The maximum number of the storable files is 100 Storing Documents The procedure for storing documents in removable USB memory is explained below 1 Plug the USB memory into the USB memory slot A1 IMPORTANT Use only USB memory that has been formatted on this machine If USB memory formatted on another device is used The removable memory is not formatted message may appear To format the USB memory press Format 2 When the machine reads the USB memory Removable Memory is recognized Displaying files may appear Press Yes to display the removable memory screen NOTE If the message does not appear p
291. otocol Internet Protocol TCP IP is a suite of protocols designed to define the way computers and other devices communicate with each other over a network TCP IP IPv6 TCP IP IPv6 is based on the current Internet protocol TCP IP IPv4 IPv6 is the next generation Internet protocol and expands the available address space which resolves the problem of the lack of addresses under IPv4 while also introducing other improvements such as additional security functionality and the capacity to prioritize data transmission TWAIN Technology Without Any Interested Name A technical specification for connecting scanners digital cameras and other image equipment to the computers The TWAIN compatible devices enable you to process image data on any relevant application software TWAIN is adopted on a large amount of graphic software e g Adobe Photoshop and OCR software USB Universal Serial Bus 2 0 A USB interface standard for Hi Speed USB 2 0 The maximum transfer rate is 480 Mbps This machine is equipped with USB 2 0 for high speed data transfer Appendix 30 Appendix WIA Windows Imaging Acquisition A function to import images supported after Windows Me XP from digital cameras and other peripheral devices This function replaces what TWAIN used to do the feature is provided as a part of Windows functions and improves ease of operation so that you import images directly to My Computer without using any application Ap
292. ox Settings Add shortcuts in the Quick Setup screen for easy access to the frequently used functions A function name linked to a registered shortcut can be changed as necessary You can register up to 6 shortcuts for copying functions sending functions and functions set for document box Adding Shortcuts Shortcut registration is performed in the setup screen of each function Shortcuts can be registered for all functions in which Add Shortcut appears on the screen Use the procedure below to register a shortcut 1 After making the desired settings in the setup screen of each function press Add Shortcut Ready to copy cos Memo Page Place original JEB Layout A 5 a z i Top Top LtoR RtoL None BE Layout B E E Top Edge Top Top Top Orientation 08 08 2009 10 10 2 Press the keys corresponding to the shortcut number 01 to 06 to register NOTE If you select a shortcut number already registered the currently registered shortcut can be replaced with a new one 3 Enter the shortcut name and press Register to add the shortcut Editing and Deleting Shortcuts Follow the steps as below to change shortcut number name or delete shortcut 1 Inthe setup screen of each function press Add Shortcut in the bottom of the screen 2 Press Edit and press the keys corresponding to the shortcut number 01 to 06 to change or delete 3 To edit a shortcut press Change to change
293. parency Rough a Labels Recycled Preprinted Bond Cardstock Color Prepunched Letterhead Envelope Thick High Quality Custom 1 Custom 2 Custom 3 Custom 4 Custom 5 Custom 6 Custom 7 ces 8 Coe 08 08 2009 10 10 Press the System Menu key Press Common Settings Next of Original Paper Settings Next of MP Tray Setting and then Change of Paper Size For automatic detection of the paper size press Auto and select Metric or Inch as the unit To select the paper size press any of Standard Sizes 1 Standard Sizes 2 Others or Size Entry and select the paper size If you have chosen Size Entry press or to enter X horizontal and Y vertical sizes You may enter the size directly using the numeric keys by pressing Keys 4 Press OK The previous screen reappears 5 Press Change of Media Type and select the media type Then press OK Preparation before Use Loading Originals Follow the steps below to load originals for copying sending or storing Placing Originals on the Platen You may place books or magazines on the platen in addition to ordinary sheet originals 1 Open the original cover NOTE If the optional document processor is installed open the document processor Before opening the document processor be sure that there are no originals left on the original table or on the original eject table Originals left o
294. pendix Send as E mail A function to send the image data stored in the machine as an E mail attachment E mail addresses can be selected from the list or entered at each time SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol A protocol for E mail transmission over the Internet or an intranet It is used for transferring mail between mail servers as well as for sending mail from clients to their servers Status Page The page lists machine conditions such as the memory capacity total number of prints and scans and paper source settings Subnet Mask The subnet mask is a way of augmenting the network address section of an IP address A subnet mask represents all network address sections as 1 and all host address sections as 0 The number of bits in the prefix indicates the length of the network address The term prefix refers to something added to the beginning and in this context indicates the first section of the IP address When an IP address is written the length of the network address is indicated by the prefix length after a forward slash For example 24 in the address 133 210 2 0 24 In this way 133 210 2 0 24 denotes the IP address 133 210 2 0 with a 24 bit prefix network section This new network address section originally part of the host address made possible by the subnet mask is referred to as the subnet address When you enter the subnet mask be sure to set the DHCP setting to Off TCP IP Transmission Control Pr
295. pendix 31 Appendix Appendix 32 Index Index Numerics Copy 4 17 1 sided 2 sided Selection 5 10 A Send 5 23 Bundled Items 2 2 Buzzer 8 3 Accessibility 8 76 Appendix 27 Adjusting Density 5 17 Auto 3 7 Manual 3 7 Adjusting the Operation Panel Angle 2 11 Adjustment Maintenance 8 41 Auto Color Correction 8 44 Color Calibration Cycle 8 45 Copy Density Adjustment 8 41 Correcting Fine Black Lines 8 43 Display Brightness 8 44 Drum Refresh 8 42 Gray Adjustment 8 45 Send Box Density 8 41 Silent Mode 8 44 System Initialization 8 44 AppleTalk Appendix 27 Setup 2 16 Applications 8 60 Attention Indicator 1 4 Auto Image Rotation 4 32 Auto Low Power Mode 2 9 Auto Paper Selection Appendix 27 Auto Sleep 2 10 Appendix 27 B C Cassette Loading Paper 2 22 Paper Size and Media Type 8 5 Cassette 1 1 4 Cassette 2 1 4 Caution Labels ix CD ROM 2 2 Centering 5 6 Changing Language 2 11 8 2 Character Entry Method Appendix 10 Cleaning Dual scanning area 9 3 Glass Platen 9 2 Original Cover 9 2 Separator 9 4 Slit Glass 9 3 Transfer Roller 9 5 Clip Holder 1 4 Color Background Density Adjust 5 20 Color Grayscale Black and White Selection 5 21 Color Profiles 5 32 Color Type 5 31 8 29 Gray Adjustment 8 45 Background density adjust Send 5 20 Bonjour Appendix 27 Booklet from Sheets 4 19 Left side 4 19 Right side 4 19 Top binding 4 19 Border Erase Color mode 3 6 Color Selection Send S
296. played Cancel Select the job you want to cancel from the list and press this key Detail Select the job whose detailed information you want to display from the list and press this key Refer to Checking the Detailed Information of Histories on page 7 10 7 5 Status Job Cancel Storing Jobs Status screen Status Status OoOo OOO i 7 ob No Acce epted Time Type Job Name 438 14 47 doc20070225144758 e l Printing Jobs Sending Jobs Storing Jobs Device Paper Supplies i ERS Status 08 08 2009 10 10 Display Key Details Job No Acceptance No of job Accepted Time Accepted Time of job Type Icons that indicate the job type Storing Job Scan S Storing Job Printer eS Storing Job FAX eS mStoring Job i FAX Join Box Document Copy Box Document ge Job Name Job name or file name is displayed User Name User Name for the executed job Status Status of job InProcess The status before starting to save such as during scanning originals Storing Storing Data Canceling Canceling the job Pause Pausing the job yw of Job Type Only selected type of jobs is displayed Cancel Select the job you want to cancel from the list and press this key Detail Select the job whose detailed information you want to display from the list and press this key Refer to Checking the Detailed Information of Histories on page 7 10 St
297. plex Unit and Cassette 1 Follow the steps below to clear paper jams in duplex unit and cassette 1 1 2 Pull up left cover 1 lever and open the left cover Remove any paper If the paper tears remove every loose scrap from inside the machine Lift duplex unit and remove any paper If the paper tears remove every loose scrap from inside the machine Pull out cassette 1 and remove the paper If the paper tears remove every loose scrap from inside the machine Push cassette 1 back in place securely 10 22 Troubleshooting 6 Press the specified position to close left cover 1 Paper Feed Unit Follow the steps below to clear paper jams in the paper feed unit 1 Pull up left cover 1 lever and open the left cover 1 2 Remove any paper If the paper tears remove every loose scrap from 0 inside the machine 3 Open front cover 10 23 Troubleshooting 4 Turn the lower green knob A1 clockwise 5 Remove any paper If you cannot remove the paper proceed with the next step 6 Pull out paper feed unit A2 7 Open paper feed unit cover A3 and remove any paper 8 Ifthe paper is torn pull paper feed unit A2 all the way out and lift it slightly to remove any paper 10 24 Troubleshooting 9 Remove the paper If you cannot remove the paper proceed with the next step 10 Push paper feed unit A2 ba
298. proper moisture level for at least 48 hours Do not store paper where it is exposed to heat sunlight or dampness Other Paper Specifications Porosity The density of the paper fibers Stiffness Paper must be stiff enough or it may buckle in the machine causing jams Curl Most paper naturally tends to curl after the package is opened When paper passes through the fixing unit it curls upward slightly To deliver flat printouts load the paper so that the curl faces towards the bottom of the paper tray Static electricity During printing paper is electrostatically charged so that the toner adheres Choose paper that can be discharged quickly so that copies do not cling together Whiteness Paper whiteness affects print contrast Use whiter paper for sharper brighter copies Quality Machine problems may occur if sheet sizes are not uniform or if corners are not square edges are rough sheets are uncut or edges or corners are crushed In order to prevent these problems be especially careful when you cut the paper yourself Packaging Choose paper that is properly packaged and stacked in boxes Ideally the packaging itself should have been treated with a coating to inhibit moisture Specially treated paper We do not recommend printing onto the following types of paper even if it conforms to the basic specifications When you use these kinds of paper purchase a small amount first as a sample to test Appendix 16 Appendix
299. pted TX page 5 31 keys appear for selecting the encryption method for the FTP transmission destination Select Auto DES 3DES or AES as the encryption method When selecting On for Entry Check for New Destination page 8 30 the confirmation screen appears Enter the same host name and path again and press OK When selecting On for Destination Check before Send page 8 29 the confirmation screen appears after pressing the Start key For details refer to Confirmation Screen of Destinations on page 3 27 3 26 Basic Operation Confirmation Screen of Destinations When selecting On for Destination Check before Send page 8 29 the confirmation screen of destinations appears after pressing the Start key Follow the steps below to confirm the destinations a Ready to send Destination 1 Press or A to confirm every destination Place original pestnation Petal mns te Press Detail to display the detailed information on CI abcd efg com To a the selected destination gy Feder Patt To delete the destination select the destination you ae a FAK want to delete and press Delete Press Yes in the Enty m HE WE i 0005 Cre confirmation screen The destination is deleted iA A BaP E IE ac HE am pee H To add the destination press Cancel and then return to the destination screen Destination Quick Setup opine sendy Color Image Quality ow 10 10 2 Press Check
300. pter 8 Default Setting System Menu Describes the System Menu options for general machine operation Chapter 9 Maintenance Describes cleaning and toner replacement Chapter 10 Troubleshooting Explains how to handle error messages paper jams and other problems Chapter 11 Management Explains user login administration and job accounting Appendix Explains how to enter characters and lists the machine specifications Introduces the convenient optional equipment available for this machine Provides information on media types and paper sizes Also includes a glossary of terms XXVI Conventions in This Guide The following conventions are used depending on the nature of the description Convention Description Example Bold Indicates the operation panel Press the Start key keys or a computer screen Regular Indicates the touch panel keys Press OK Italic Indicates a message displayed Ready to copy is displayed on the touch panel Used to emphasize a key word For more information refer to Sleep and phrase or references to Auto Sleep on page 2 9 additional information Indicates supplemental information or operations for reference Important Indicates items that are required or prohibited so as to avoid IMPORTANT problems Caution Indicates what must be observed to prevent injury or machine breakdown and how to CAUTION deal with it Description of Op
301. puter ij Select the destination computer and press OK Press Reload to reload the computer list Computer Name You can view information on the selected computer f pco00102 by pressing Detail W pc000103 1 1 pc000104 pcoo0105 08 08 2009 10 10 6 Select the type of originals file format etc as necessary 7 Press the Start key Sending begins and the software installed on the computer is activated Procedure Using WSD Scan from Your Computer 1 Press the Send Key The send screen appears NOTE Depending on the settings the address book screen may appear In this event press Cancel to display the screen for sending 2 Place the originals in the document processor or on the platen Press WSD Scan 4 Press From Computer and press Execute 5 Use the software installed on the computer to send the images 5 28 Sending Functions Job Finish Notice Sends a notice by e mail when a job is completed Use the procedure below to specify the Job Finish Notice settings 1 Press the Send key 2 Place the originals on the platen 3 Press Advanced Setup and then Job Finish Notice a Ready to send Destination 4 To select the destination from the address book Place original press Address Book on the left of the screen and l then press Address Book in the next screen m Select the destination to be notified then press Address OK
302. py is selected and press Next 4 Enter the new program name and press Register to register the program Recalling Programs Use the procedure below to recall a registered program 1 Press the Program key 2 Press Recall and press the key corresponding to the program number 01 to 50 to recall Press the Quick No Search key or No to enter the program number directly for recalling BE Program recalling NOTE If the program cannot be recalled the Document Box or the form overlay specified in the program might have been deleted Check the Document Box 08 08 2009 10 10 3 44 Basic Operation 3 Place the originals and press the Start key Copying is performed according to the registered program Editing and Deleting Programs You can change program number and program name or delete program Use the procedure below to edit or delete a program 1 Press the Program key 2 Press Edit and press the key s corresponding to the program number 01 to 50 to change or delete 3 Toeditaprogram use the procedure for registering a program and press Change Then change the program number and program name and press Register Choose Yes in the confirmation screen to change the program To delete the program press Delete this Program Choose Yes in the confirmation screen to finally delete the program 3 45 Basic Operation Registering Shortcuts Copy Send and Document B
303. py to Removable Mem 6 Press Next Copy to Move to Copy to Custom Box Custom Box Removable Mem Cancel Back amp Next Status 08 08 2009 10 10 6 8 Document Box a Tan E 7 To copy or move the document to a custom box select the destination box Move to Custom Box Select the destination box and press Move To copy the document to USB memory select the destination folder and press Next If necessary set the saved file size and the file format etc 0001 Documenti Administrator 0002 Document2 Administrator 8 Press Move or Copy and then press Yes in the 0003 Documents Administrator confirmation screen The selected document is 0004 Document4 Administrator moved or copied Status 08 08 2009 10 10 NOTE If the box to which the document is to be moved or copied is protected by a password enter the correct password Joining Documents GE The procedure for joining documents in a custom box is explained below NOTE You can only join a document to other documents in the same custom box If necessary move the documents to be joined beforehand 1 Press the Document Box key 2 Press Custom Box select the box containing the documents you want to join and press Open NOTE If a custom box is protected by a password enter the correct password 3 Select the documents in the list that you wish to join a by pressing the check
304. r 2 Remove cleaning brush blue colored 3 Pull up and open left cover 1 4 Asshown in the figure clean dirt from the separator by moving the brush from side to side along the separator 9 4 Maintenance 5 Put away the cleaning brush press the specified position of the front cover and left cover 1 to close 1 Open the front cover 2 Remove the cleaning brush blue colored Ga 3 Pull up and open left cover 1 9 5 Maintenance 4 As shown in the figure clean dirt from the transfer roller by moving the brush from side to side along the roller while rotating the roller by turning the gear at the left end of the roller 5 Put away the cleaning brush press the specified position of the front cover and left cover 1 to close 9 6 Maintenance Toner Container and Waste Toner Box Replacement When the touch panel displays Add toner replace the toner without delay even if several more copies are still possible When replacing the toner container replace the waste toner box as well Every time you replace the toner container be sure to clean the parts as instructed below Dirty parts may deteriorate output quality CAUTION Do not attempt to incinerate the toner container or the waste toner box Dangerous sparks may cause burns CAUTION Do not attempt to force open or destroy the toner container or the waste t
305. r Top Edge Left Press OK Press OK Press the Start key to start copying 4 24 Copying Functions Memo Mode Delivers copies with a space for adding notes You can also copy two originals onto the same sheet with a space or add lines to indicate page boundaries NOTE Memo mode is available for the copy paper sizes of Ledger Legal Oficio Il 8 5x13 5 Letter Letter R Statement R A3 B4 Folio A4 A4 R B5 B5 R A5 R 8K 16K and 16K R Layout A Reduces images of each original page for printing onto half of a page leaving the other half blank for notes Original Layout B Reduces images of two original pages for copying onto half of a single page leaving the other half blank for notes Ol ike lke Original 4 25 Copying Functions Types of Page Boundary Lines The following boundary lines are available ill lt w Dotted Borders Cropmark Use the procedure below to insert page boundary lines on your copies Copies Ready to copy Memo Page None Top Edge Top Original Orientation 08 08 2009 10 10 1 2 3 4 Press the Copy key Place the originals on the platen Press Layout Edit and then Memo Page Press Layout A or Layout B Select the page layout from Layout Press Border Line to select the page boundary
306. r Counts on page 11 18 Available Settings Split selected for Copier Printer Count ltem Detail Copy Restriction Total Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for copying Print Restriction Total Sets the default restriction on the total number of sheets used for printing Scan Restriction Others Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for scanning excludes copying FAX TX Restriction Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for sending faxes This is displayed when the optional fax kit is installed Total selected for Copier Printer Count Print Restriction Total Sets the default restriction on the total number of sheets used for copying and printing Scan Restriction Others Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for scanning excludes copying FAX TX Restriction Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for sending faxes This is displayed when the optional fax kit is installed Use the procedure below to specify the counter limits 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press User Login Job Accounting 3 If user login administration is disabled the user authentication screen appears Enter a login user name and password and press Login For this you need to login with administrator privileges Refer to Adding a User on page 11 5 for the default login user name and password 1
307. r Extra Heavy To print on preprinted or prepunched paper or on letterhead refer to Special Paper Action on page 8 10 NOTE If the optional FAX kit is installed the available media types for printing received faxes are as shown below Plain Recycled Bond Color High Quality Rough and Custom 1 to 8 2 28 Preparation before Use 1 Press the System Menu key ystem Menu 2 Press Common Settings Next of Original Paper Settings Next of Cassette Setting 3 Cassette Setting select one of Cassette 1 to Cassette 4 and press Next Then press Change of Paper Size NOTE Cassette 3 and Cassette 4 are shown when the optional paper feeder is installed 4 For automatic detection of the paper size press Auto and select Metric or Inch as the unit O To select the paper size press Standard Sizes 1 E Set cassette paper sten or Standard Sizes 2 and select the paper size g Ledger E Letter Letter oj Legal Statement ai Oficioll 08 08 2009 10 10 5 Press OK The previous screen reappears Ce ee 6 Press Change of Media Type and select the media type Then press OK i Select type of paper in Cassette 1 Rough Vellum Recycled Preprinted Bond Color Prepunched Letterhead High Quality Custom 1 Ea 2 Custom 3 A ES Custom 5 Custom 6 Custom 7 Custom 8 Cancel d OK 08 08 2009 10 10 2 29 Pr
308. r Feed Unit A2 Paper Feed Unit Cover A3 Green Knob Cleaner Rod Cleaning Brush Part Names 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 USB Memory Slot A1 Front Cover Paper Width Adjusting Tab Paper Length Guide Top Tray Main Power Switch Paper Width Guide Multi Purpose Tray Output Stopper Filter F1 Option Interface Slot OPT2 USB Memory Slot A2 USB Interface Connector B1 Network Interface Connector Option Interface Slot OPT1 2 Preparation before Use This chapter explains the preparations before using this equipment for the first time as well as the procedures for loading paper and originals ONGC the ACCESSO CS acta catncesed eras cecaentareeneeseaetuianme ae tanoen 2 2 e Determining the Connection Method and Preparing Cables 2 3 AMV I Cables shiva nosetadtalind es uheaceinn ecaddomnlesicaaamonahontbiminenenebntaiaes 2 5 BW eirese E EEEE Enie enr iiie 2 7 e Low Power Mode and Auto Low Power Mode cc eceeeeeeeees 2 9 e Sleep and Auto Sleep aincnssscievccuvacatesentcatrenternanentecapiicustaaticennseateineais 2 10 e Adjusting the Operation Panel Angle ssssssccccccccceeeeeeeseeeees 2 11 e Switching the Language for Display Language ceeeee 2 11 amp Seting Dateand TIME ssr
309. r Symbol Entry Screen Use the keyboard to enter Limit 128 characters Input 0 characters Soocooe ooo oes ER ERNE Fe A HO cancel fal Ok 08 08 2009 10 10 Display Key Description Is Tiv To enter a number or symbol not shown in the keyboard press the cursor key and scroll the screen to view other numbers or symbols to enter Appendix 11 Appendix Entering Characters Follow the steps shown below to enter List A 7 for example 1 Press Upper case 2 Press L The letter L is shown on the display Use the keyboard to enter Limit 128 characters L Input 1 characters 2 E z2 gt Backspace foooo oo Gone Ge JOC nan Boon oeoose EEEE Lower case No Symbol Space Cancel 3 K 08 08 2009 10 10 3 Press Lower case 4 Press i s t and Space Use the keyboard to enter 3 Limit 128 character List _ Input 4 characters 4 aCi jace 5 Press Upper case 6 Press A 7 Press No Symbol 8 Press A or v repeatedly to view the keyboard containing and 1 9 Press and 1 Limit 128 characters Input 8 characters La e gt rce Boeveooooooeo ES E naa eee Upper case Upper case Lower rose No Symbol Cancel 08 08 2009 10 10 10 Check that the entry is correct Press OK Appendix 12 Appendix Paper This
310. r as a 2 sided copy it is possible to lower the amount of paper used For more information see Duplex Copying on page 3 11 Paper Recycling This device supports the recycled paper which reduces the load on the environment Your sales or service representative can provide information about recommended paper types Energy Star ENERGY STAR Program We have determined as a participating company in the International Energy Star Program that z y this product is compliant with the standards laid out in the International Energy Star Program XXV About this Operation Guide This Operation Guide contains the following chapters Chapter 1 Part Names Identifies machine parts and operation panel keys Chapter 2 Preparation before Use Explains adding paper placing originals connecting the machine and necessary configurations before first use Chapter 3 Basic Operation Describes the procedures for basic copying printing and scanning Chapter 4 Copying Functions Describes the functions you can use when copying Chapter 5 Sending Functions Describes the functions you can use when sending originals Chapter 6 Document Box Provides a basic guide to using document boxes Chapter 7 Status Job Cancel Explains how to check the job status and job history and how to cancel jobs being printed or waiting to print Also explains how to check the remaining paper and device status and how to cancel fax transmission Cha
311. r detailed information on restarting the system refer to Restarting the System on page 8 63 Select whether or not to use Bonjour The default setting is Off Use the procedure below Press the System Menu key Press System Next of Network and then Next of TCP IP Setting 2 15 Preparation before Use Auto IP Settings O N O Oo A W Press Change of TCP IP Press On and then press OK Press Change of IPv4 Press Bonjour Press On or Off of Bonjour and then press OK After changing the setting restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON again For detailed information on restarting the system refer to Restarting the System on page 8 63 Select whether or not to use Auto IP The default setting is On Use the procedure below AppleTalk Setup O N O Oo A W Press the System Menu key Press System Next of Network and then Next of TCP IP Setting Press Change of TCP IP Press On and then press OK Press Change of IPv4 Press Auto IP Press On or Off of Auto IP and then press OK After changing the setting restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON again For detailed information on restarting the system refer to Restarting the System on page 8 63 Select the Apple Talk network connection The default setting is On Use the procedure below Press the System Menu key Press System Next of Network and then C
312. r login administration is enabled the screen to enter the login user name and password appears Enter a login user name and password to login Refer to Login Logout on page 11 3 If the user has already registered the account information the account ID entry would be skipped Refer to Adding a User on page 11 5 2 Proceed to complete the rest of the steps Logout When the operations are complete press the Logout key to return to the account ID entry screen 11 15 Management Adding an Account This section explains how to add a new account The following entries are required Item Description Account Name Enter the account name up to 32 characters Account ID Enter the account ID as many as eight digits between 0 and 99999999 Restriction This Prohibits printing scanning or restricts the number of sheets to load Refer to Restricting the Use of the Machine on page 11 18 Use the procedure below to register a new account 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press User Login Job Accounting 3 If user login administration is disabled the user authentication screen appears Enter your login user name and password and then press Login For this you need to login with administrator privileges Refer to Adding a User on page 11 5 for the default login user name and password 4 Press Next of Job Accounting Setting Register Edit of Accounting List and then Add 5 Press Change
313. r on page 11 5 for the default login user name and password 3 Press Next of Browser Environment 4 To set your home page press Change of Home Page press URL enter the URL and then press OK Press OK again NOTE Refer to the Character Entry Method on page Appendix 10 for details on entering characters 8 58 Default Setting System Menu 5 To set the text size press Change of Text Size select Large Medium or Small as the text size and then press OK 6 To set the display mode press Change of Display Mode select Normal Just Fit Rendering or Smart Fit Rendering as the display mode and then press OK 7 To specify the settings for accepting cookies press Change of Cookie select Accept All Reject All or Prompt before Accepting as your cookie acceptance policy and then press OK Proxy Settings Use the procedure below to specify the proxy settings 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press v and then Internet NOTE If user login administration is disabled the user authentication screen appears Enter your login user name and password and then press Login For this you need to login with administrator privileges Refer to Adding a User on page 11 5 for the default login user name and password 3 Press Change of Proxy and then press On To set a proxy server HTTP GE 1 Press Keyboard of Proxy Server HTTP enter the proxy address and press OK 2 Pr
314. re deleted after 1 day 1 week Documents are deleted after 1 week Use the procedure below to set automatic deletion for temporary documents 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Document Box Removable Memory Next of Job Box then Change of Deletion of Job Retention 3 Select the time for automatic deletion To deactivate automatic deletion press Off 4 Press OK NOTE This function is valid for documents saved after the function is set Regardless of this function setting temporary documents are deleted when the main power switch is turned off Form for Form Overlay Box Storing a Form You can store forms to be used for the form overlay in the Form for Form Overlay box You can store a 1 page form Use the procedure below to store a form 1 Press the Document Box key 2 Place the original in the document processor or on the platen 3 Press Job Box 6 17 Document Box Files Private Print Stored Job E Quick Copy Proof and Hold BB Repeat Copy E Form for Form Overlay ara 08 08 2009 10 10 Form for Form Overlay 5 fanene as broardtine Jase m 1010200809530900 10 10 2008 09 00 1010200800530910 10 10 2008 09 10 1010200800530920 10 10 2008 09 20 Status 08 08 2009 10 10 4 Select Form for Form Overlay and press Open Press Store File If necessary select the image quality of original scanning density etc before the original is
315. res or pamphlets A booklet such as a magazine is made by folding at the center You can copy the cover page onto colored paper or thick paper Paper for the cover is supplied from the multi purpose tray To feed the cover paper from the cassette refer to Paper Source for Cover Paper on page 8 10 The supported original and paper sizes are as follows Type of Original One sided original Two sided original Original Size All Paper Size A3 B4 A4 A4 R B5 B5 R A5 A5 R Ledger Legal Letter and Letter R All A3 B4 A4 R Ledger Legal and Letter R Book original A3 B4 A4 R B5 R A5 R Ledger Letter R and 8K A4 A4 R B5 B5 R Letter and Letter R A3 B4 A4 R B5 R A5 R Ledger and Letter R Except for custom sized originals For binding on the left side Original A4 R and Letter R The folded copies can be read from left to right The folded copies can be read from right to left The folded copies can be read from top to bottom The procedure for using Booklet copying is explained below 1 Press the Copy key 4 19 Copying Functions 2 Place the originals on the platen Press Layout Edit and then Booklet Ready to copy Copies 4 Press 1 sided gt gt Booklet to produce a booklet from single sided originals ames 1 sided gt gt Booklet Booklet Press 2 sided gt gt Bo
316. ress the Document Box key and then Removable Memory 3 Select the folder where the file will be stored and press Open The machine will display the top 3 folder levels including the root folder na Removable Memory 4 Press Store File E Removable Memory A 1 Document 10 10 2008 09 30 1 MB 2 Document 10 10 2008 09 40 B 3 Document 10 10 2008 09 50 Memory 4 Document 10 10 2008 10 00 Information B 5 Document 10 10 2008 10 05 Remove Memory Delete Detail Open Store File n J Removable Memory f 08 08 2009 10 10 5 Set the type of original file format etc as desired 6 Press the Start key The original is scanned and the data is stored in the USB memory 6 22 7 Status Job Cancel This chapter explains how to check the status and history of jobs and cancel the jobs being processed or waiting to be printed This chapter also explains how to check the remaining amount of toner and paper and the status of devices and how to cancel the fax communication at COME CW ING OU SUIS aeni n er N 7 2 Checking Job HISTO osised adnan adnan ahaaha 7 9 e Sending the Job Log HiStOry ececeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesenaaees 7 11 Pause and Resumption of MODS ces caievcscnctessinitennidndresiednsumucencrencuattentas 7 13 ACC o OG seated sia eane EOE 7 13 e Priority Override for Waiting JODS cecsccccceeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeneeees 7 14 e Reordering Pri
317. rinter You can check the number of pages printed in each paper size by pressing Printed Pages by Paper Size Black amp White 300 Scanned Pages Copy FAX Originals 300 Print Printed Pages Status Page by Paper Size 08 08 2009 10 10 Data Security Kit Operations Installing the optional Data Security Kit adds Data Security on the System Menu Refer to the Data Security Kit E Operation Guide on the bundled CD ROM for descriptions of the Data Security options and the procedures for using them 11 27 Management 11 28 Appendix amp Optional TE ba secises de tenn Sxceencen canst davenencdetceiteunanacien Appendix 2 Ciaracter Entry MOOG ciisscccscsceccntecustradearsstenautecieeduau Appendix 10 PAGE E T E E E Appendix 13 e Specifications eee eeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeseeesesnaeeaeees Appendix 21 E GOS Sa Ue eee OR nt ODE Pr OER E a TR MeN pe Ee eRe PET Pr Appendix 27 Appendix 1 Appendix Optional Equipment Overview of Optional Equipment The following optional equipment is available for the machine Document Processor Job Separator Built in Finisher Document Finisher Paper Feeder Appendix 2 Appendix FAX Kit SN w Cc Key Counter Expansion Memory Appendix 3 Appendix Document Processor Paper Feeder Doc
318. rinting Using this function the original will be scanned while the machine is printing When the current print job ends the reserved copy job is printed The procedure differs depending on the Reserve Next Priority refer to page 8 26 If Reserve Next Priority is set to On The Copy function default screen appears on the touch panel during printing 1 Place the originals onto the machine for reserving copy and configure the copy settings Ready to copy one Tac Copy Image fo pps 1 D e Shortcut 2 Place original R Shortcut 3 100 Normal 0 R Shortcut 4 Paper Zoom Density sclecion S Shortcut 5 2 sided 2in1 E gt 2 sided Ee Imag sen lai SEA 009 10 10 2 Press the Start key The machine starts scanning the originals When the current print job ends the reserved copy job is printed If Reserve Next Priority is set to Off The Copying screen appears on the touch panel during printing 1 Press Reserve Next Copying pi pying 24 Job No 000021 Job Name Doc10102008101031 User Name The default screen for copying appears Scanner Setting Printer Setting Scanned Copies a m a A4 A4 Plain gt 100 2 sided gt 2 sided t kd Collate gt Top Edge Top gt gt Top Tray Cancel l Reserve Next 0 10 2 Place the originals onto the machine for reserving copy and configure the copy settings 3 Press the Start key The ma
319. rmine whether the original is color or black and white during Auto Color Mode Setting a lower value will result in more originals being identified as color while a larger value will tend to increase the number of originals being identified as black and white Use the procedure below to set the Auto Color Detection Level 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Adjustment Maintenance v and then Change of Auto Color Correction 3 Press one of keys 1 to 5 Color B amp W to set the detection level 4 Press OK 8 44 Default Setting System Menu Gray Adjustment After prolonged use or from the effects of surrounding temperature or humidity the hue of printed color output may shift or color drift may occur Use this function to correct color settings when the color of a finished copy does not match the original NOTE To perform gray adjustment verify that either 11 x 8 1 2 or A4 paper is loaded into a cassette Use the procedure below for adjustment 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press x Adjustment Maintenance v and then Next of Gray Adjustment Press Execute A color pattern is printed As shown in the illustration place the printed side down on the platen with the three black boxes aligned to the top 5 Press Execute The color pattern is read and adjustment begins GE 6 Press OK in the adjustment end confirmation screen 8 45 Default Setting System Menu
320. rs or less and domain aas name 256 characters or less for the Eee Authentication Server Select NTLM or Kerberos Authentication Server Type NTLM Kerberos as the server type IEEE NOTE If the login user name and password are rejected check the following settings e Network Authentication setting of the machine e User property of the Authentication Server e Date and time setting of the machine and the Authentication Server If you cannot login because of the setting of the machine login with any administrator registered in the local user list and correct the settings If the server type is Kerberos only domain names entered in uppercase will be recognized 6 Press OK Login Logout Once you enable user login administration a login user name and password entry screen appears each time you use this machine Use the procedure below to login 1 If the screen below appears during the operations ye Enter login user name and password press Login User Name no e Press Keys to enter the login data using the Ee abcdef numeric keys Keys an I 2 Enter the login user name and press OK NOTE Refer to the Character Entry Method on Appendix 10 for details on entering characters IC Card Login Check Counter Cancel J fel Login 08 08 2009 10 10 3 Press Login Password Press keys to enter the login data using the numeric keys 11 3 Manageme
321. rt the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON again For detailed information on restarting the system refer to Restarting the System on page 8 63 8 71 Default Setting System Menu Interface Block Setting This allows you to protect this machine by blocking the interface with external devices such as USB hosts or optional interfaces The following interface block settings are available e USB Host USB memory slot setting e USB Device USB interface setting e Optional interface Optional interface card setting USB Host USB memory slot setting This locks and protects the USB memory slot A1 or USB port A2 USB host The default setting is Unblock Use the procedure below to specify the USB Host setting 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press System Next of Interface Block Setting and then Change of USB Host NOTE If user login administration is disabled the user authentication screen appears Enter your login user name and password and then press Login For this you need to login with administrator privileges Refer to Adding a User on page 11 5 for the default login user name and password 3 Press Block 4 Press OK USB Device USB interface setting This locks and protects the USB interface connector B1 USB Device The default setting is Unblock Use the procedure below to specify the USB Device setting 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press System Next of Interface Block Sett
322. s 64 characters Login Password When Other is selected for Authenticate the password set here will be used for authentication The maximum length of the login password is 64 characters POP before SMTP Timeout Set the amount of time to wait before time out in seconds when you have selected POP before SMTP as the Authentication Protocol Test This will test if the SMTP connection can be successfully established E mail Size Limit Enter the maximum size of E mail that can be sent in kilobytes When the value is 0 the limitation for E mail size is disabled Sender Address Signature Enter the E mail address of the person responsible for the machine such as the machine administrator so that a reply or non delivery report will go to a person rather than to the machine The sender address must be entered correctly for SMTP authentication The maximum length of the sender address is 128 characters Enter the signature The signature is free form text that will appear at the end of the E mail body It is often used for further identification of the machine The maximum length of the signature is 512 characters Domain Restriction 3 Click Submit Enter the domain names that can be permitted or rejected The maximum length of the domain name is 32 characters You can also specify E mail addresses 2 20 Preparation before Use Loading Paper Paper can be loaded standardly in the two cass
323. s E mail Address Enter the LDAP Attribute to obtain the e mail address and press OK Press Search Timeout to set the amount of time to wait before time out Press or the numeric keys to enter the time Press LDAP Security to select the type of encryption according to the type of security employed by the LDAP server Select Off LDAP over SSL or L DAPv3 TLS and press OK 11 13 Management Job Accounting Job accounting Manages the copy print count accumulated by individual accounts by assigning an ID to each account Job accounting helps the following activities in business organizations e Manageability of up to 1 000 individual accounts e Availability for account IDs with as many as eight digits between 0 and 99999999 for security e Integrated management of printing and scanning statistics through the use of an identical account ID Tracking the print volume for each account and for all accounts combined e Restricting the print counter in one page increments up to 9 999 999 copies e Resetting the print counter for each account or for all accounts combined First Job Accounting Setup Follow these steps for the first job accounting setup Enable job accounting page 11 14 v Add an account page 11 16 v Log out page 11 15 v Other users login for operations page 11 15 Enabling Disabling Job Accounting Enable job accounting Use the procedure below to specify the job accou
324. scanned Press the Start key The original is scanned and stored in the Form for Form Overlay box NOTE For information on using image overlays with a stored form see Form Overlay on page 4 22 and Form Overlay from Custom Boxes on page 6 7 Deleting a Form Stored You can delete the form stored in the Form for Form Overlay box Use the procedure below to delete a form 1 2 3 Press the Document Box key Press Job Box Select Form for Form Overlay and press Open Document Box Form for Form Overlay A Name 1010200800530910 10 10 2008 09 10 1010200800530920 10 10 2008 09 20 Status 08 08 2009 10 10 4 Select the form to delete and press Delete The delete confirmation screen appears 5 Press Yes The form is deleted 6 19 Document Box Printing Documents Stored in Removable USB Memory Plugging USB memory directly into the machine enables you to quickly and easily print the files stored in the USB memory without having to use a computer Limitations The following file types can be printed ePDF file Version 1 5 TIFF file TIFF V6 TTN2 format JPEG file XPS file Encrypted PDF file PDF files you wish to print should have an extension pdf Files to be printed should be saved no further down than the top 3 folder levels Use USB memory properly formatted by this machine Plug the USB memory directly into the USB memory slot
325. se 8 19 Default Setting System Menu You can use the numeric keys to enter the number directly 4 Press OK Border Erase to Back Page Select the Border Erase Method for Back Page of a sheet The table below shows the available settings a ae Same as Front Page Border Erase performed in the same setting as the front page Do Not Erase No Border Erase performed on the back page NOTE Refer to page 4 17 and page 5 23 for Border Erase Use the procedure below to specify the border erase setting for the back of the page 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Common Settings v Next of Function Defaults v and then Change of Border Erase to Back Page 3 Press Same as Front Page or Do Not Erase 4 Press OK Margin Default Set the default margin The table below shows the measurement ranges that can be set Inch 0 75 to 0 75 in 0 01 increments Metric 18 mm to 18 mm in 1 mm increments Use the procedure below to set the default margin width 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Common Settings v Next of Function Defaults v and then Change of Margin Default 3 Use the or to enter the margin widths for Left Right and Top Bottom You can use the numeric keys to enter the number directly 4 Press OK 8 20 Default Setting System Menu Auto Image Rotation Select the default Auto Image Rotation setting The table below shows the a
326. se the procedure below 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press User Login Job Accounting 3 If user login administration is disabled the user authentication screen appears Enter your login user name and password and then press Login For this you need to login with administrator privileges Refer to Adding a User on page 11 5 for the default login user name and password See 4 Press Next of User Login Setting Next of Group i Register the groups that is restricted the machine usage Maximum 20 Authorization Set Register Edit of Group List and then Add Group Name Group ID Others Detail Delete Cancel fe Register 08 08 2009 10 10 1 1 e Press Change of Group ID Group ID Group Name Enter the group ID and press OK Access Level Print Restriction gt Copy Restriction 5 6 7 Press Change of Group Name 8 Enter the group name and press OK Send Reston z NOTE Refer to the Character Entry Method on Appendix 10 for details on entering characters Cancel J Register 08 08 2009 10 10 9 Press Change of Access Level 10 Select the user access privilege and press OK 11 Press Change of Print Restriction 12 Select Reject Usage or Off and press OK 11 11 Management 13 Follow steps 11 and 12 above to set Copy Restriction Send Restriction FAX TX Restriction Storing Restr in Box and Storing Restr in Memory 14 Pre
327. se them Keep the following points in mind Do not use envelopes with exposed adhesive In addition do not use the type of envelope in which the adhesive is exposed after the top layer is peeled off Serious damage may be caused if the paper covering the adhesive comes off in the machine Do not use envelopes with certain special features For example do not use envelopes with a grommet for winding a string to close the flap or envelopes with an open or film covered window If paper jams occur load fewer envelopes at once To prevent paper jams when printing onto multiple envelopes do not allow more than ten envelopes remain in the output tray at once Thick Paper Before loading thick paper in the multi purpose tray fan it and align the edges Some thick paper may still have rough edges developed by a paper cutter on the back side Remove any such rough edges just as with Hagaki Appendix 18 Appendix by placing the paper on a flat surface and rubbing the edges gently a few times with a ruler Printing onto paper with rough edges may cause jams NOTE If the paper is not supplied correctly even after it is smoothed load the paper in the multi purpose tray with the leading edge raised a few millimeters Label Be sure to feed labels from the multi purpose tray For selecting labels use extreme care so that the adhesive may not come in direct contact with any part of the machine and that the labels are not easily p
328. send an E mail using the transmission function the date and time as set here will be printed in the header of the E mail message Set the date time and time difference from GMT of the region where the machine is used NOTE If user login administration is enabled you can only change the settings by logging in with administrator privileges If user login administration is disabled the user authentication screen appears Enter a login user name and password and press Login Refer to Adding a User on page 11 5 for the default login user name and password Be sure to set the time difference before setting the date and time If you change Date Time setting trial functions will be unavailable For details refer to Optional Functions on page 8 75 1 Press the System Menu key ystem Menu 2 Press v Date Timer and then Change of Time Zone 3 Select the region Date Timer Time Zone i Set time zone Select the location nearest you NOTE Press A or v to view the next region Time Zone 12 00 International Date Line West ERS 4 Press Off or On of Summer Time and press OK 10 00 Hawaii 09 00 Alaska Ee Catala NOTE If you select a region that does not utilize susie j summer time the summer time setting screen will not h Cancel x appear 08 08 2009 10 10 5 Press Change of Date Time 2 12 Preparation before Use 6 Set the date and time Press
329. ser Name or Password Enter correct login user name or password Job Accounting restriction exceeded Job separator is full of paper Is the acceptable printing count restricted by Job Accounting exceeded Is the maximum capacity of the job separator exceeded The printing count exceeded the acceptable count restricted by Job Accounting Cannot print any more This job is canceled Press End Take some paper out of the job separator Printing then resumes KPDL error PostScript error has occurred The job is canceled Press End Machine failure Maximum number of scanned pages Is the acceptable scanning count exceeded Internal error has occurred Make a note of the error code displayed on the touch panel Turn off the machine unplug the power cord and contact your Service Representative Only one copy of the scanned pages is available Press Continue to print send or store the scanned pages Press Cancel to cancel printing sending or storing 10 8 Troubleshooting Error Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions eg Memory is full Unable to continue the job as the memory is used up Press Continue to print the scanned pages The print job cannot be processed completely Press Cancel to cancel the job The process cannot be performed due to insufficient memory If only End is available press End The job will be canceled Paper jam If a
330. sired binding orientation 4 Press OK Fa e ee 08 08 2009 10 10 Scan next original s Copies 5 Place the originals in the document processor or on Place the originals and press Start key Press Finish Scan to start copying the platen and press the Start key Job No 000021 Job Name doc20080505113414 User Name Scanner a Finishing H H If Job Build is selected the next page can be _ EM uh A A changed Press Sheet Insertion to insert a blank Pelee paper Press Next Copy On Back in duplex 3 3 copying to print the next page on back page 2 sided Book a fo Shs Erase Original Next Copy On Back Sheet a Density 1 2 f v 08 08 2009 10 10 6 Place the next original and press the Start key Repeat these steps to scan the remaining originals After scanning all originals press Finish Scan to start copying 4 31 Copying Functions Auto Image Rotation Automatically rotates the image when the sizes of the original and the loaded paper matches but the orientations are different The images will be rotated 90 counter clockwise prior to copying NOTE To set Auto Image Rotation as the default mode refer to Auto Image Rotation on page 8 21 The procedure for making copies using Auto Image Rotation is explained below 1 2 Negative Image Inverts black and white portions of the image for printing Press the Copy key Place the origi
331. ss Common Settings Next of Original Paper Settings v and then Change of Paper Source for Cover 3 Select the paper source to load cover paper 4 Press OK Special Paper Action When printing on Prepunched Preprint and Letterhead punch holes might not be aligned or the print direction might be upside down depending on how originals are set and the combination of copying functions In such a case select Adjust Print Direction to adjust the print direction When paper orientation is not important select Speed Priority The table below lists the available settings and their details Item Description Adjust Print Direction Adjust print direction Print speed is a little slower Select this item to print on Prepunched Preprint and Letterhead Speed Priority Give the job speed top priority and disregard the paper orientation Select this item when paper orientation is not important 8 10 Default Setting System Menu If you select Adjust Print Direction load paper according to the steps below Example copying on Letterhead Original Paper Finished Cassette ABC ABC Original Paper Finished Cassette Multi Purpose Tray NOTE When loading cover paper in a cassette or multi purpose tray load the face on which printing is supposed to be done upward Use the procedure below to specify the actions performed for special paper types
332. ss Register to add a new group on the group list Obtain Network User Property Set the required information to obtain the network user property from the LDAP server NOTE To obtain the network user property from the LDAP server Network Authentication must be selected for the authentication method in Enabling Disabling User Login Administration on page 11 2 The table below explains the required information to be registered Use the procedure below Item Description Server Name Enter the LDAP server name or the IP address up to 64 characters Port Set the LDAP port number or use the default port 389 Name 1 2 Enter the LDAP Attribute to obtain the user name to be displayed from the LDAP server up to 32 characters Name 2 3 Enter the LDAP Attribute to obtain the user name to be displayed from the LDAP server up to 32 characters E mail Address Enter the LDAP Attribute to obtain the e mail address from the LDAP server up to 32 characters Search Timeout Set the amount of time to wait before time out in seconds from 5 to 255 seconds LDAP Security Select the type of encryption according to the type of security employed by the LDAP server 1 If using Active Directory of Windows the server name may be same as the server name entered in the network authentication 2 If using Active Directory of Windows displayName of Attribute may be used as Name 1 3 Name 2 can be left out When
333. ss the Start key Scan the remaining originals by the same procedure When you have scanned all the originals press Finish Scan to start sending 5 22 Sending Functions Border Erase Use Border Erase to remove black shadows that appear around the outside of the original when scanning and sending originals The following options can be selected Border Erase Sheet Erases black borders around the single sheet original Original Border Erase Book Erases black borders around the edges and in the middle of the original such as a thick book You can specify the widths individually to erase the borders around the edges and in the center of the book Original Individual Border Erase Specify border erase widths individually for all edges Original In each option the available ranges are as below Input units Border Erase Range Inch models 0 to 2 in 0 01 increments Metric models 0 mm to 50 mm in 1 mm increments 5 23 Sending Functions Border Erase to Back Page When scanning a 2 sided original this allows you to erase the borders on the back of the original The table below shows the available settings Border Erase performed using the same setting as the front page Same as Front Page Do Not Erase No Border Erase performed on the back page Use the procedure below to erase borders when sending scanned originals
334. t Remove in Hard Disk Removable Memory Removable Memory Not connected FAX Port 2 ssi OOOOOO 08 08 2009 10 10 3 When Device can be removed safely is displayed remove the USB memory 7 17 Status Job Cancel Canceling FAX Communication Cancel fax communication Use the procedure below to cancel the fax communication 1 Press the Status Job Cancel key 2 Press Device Communication gt Line Off in FAX Scare Port 1 or FAX Port 2 Printer Removable Memory Format Remove Bir Check New FAX J Device Communication 08 08 2009 10 10 3 Press Yes in the confirmation screen The line is disconnected and the fax communication is canceled 7 18 8 Default Setting System Menu This chapter explains how to configure various settings of the machine using the menus on the operation panel ES ORO CN atone een ee a ete 8 2 BI SINOS snieman se cet etme cee 8 25 OB CNS MN Siriznsisenn E n 8 28 Doc ment BOX SUNOS acsseccestcecventet eee rencennetse eerie eenlencns 8 31 PAUMO OOM lt lt geen even ey ar err ote MRE PET Ee Oe iry Oe 8 33 e Printing Reports Sending Notice cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeseeeeeeeees 8 38 Adjustment Maintenance enccernceictaincnsnieisitciaincnnaiisniniasduiGonieiniaacuadeecin 8 41 s DO O eai EEE 8 46 e Editing Destination Address Book Adding One Touch Keys 8 51 e Internet Browser Setup siaiscascwacenicenacenr
335. t appear around the outside of the original when making copies The following options can be selected Border Erase Sheet Erases black borders around the single sheet original Original Border Erase Book Erases black borders around the edges and in the middle of the original such as a thick book You can specify the widths individually to erase the borders around the edges and in the center of the book Original Individual Border Erase Specify border erase widths individually for all edges Original In each option the available ranges are as below Inputunits e Border Erase Range Inch Models 0 to 2 in 0 01 increments Metric Models 0 mm to 50 mm in 1 mm increments NOTE To specify the default width value of Border Erase refer to Border Erase Default on page 8 19 for details 4 17 Copying Functions Border Erase to Back Page When scanning a 2 sided original this allows you to erase the borders on the back of the original The table below shows the available settings ltem Detail Border Erase performed using the same setting Same as Front Page as the front page Do Not Erase No Border Erase performed on the back page NOTE You can change the default setting for Border Erase to Back Page For details refer to Paper Selection on page 8 25 Use the procedure below to erase borders when copying Ready to copy Border
336. t to check the details of and press Detail You can now view detailed information on the selected application Accessibility Display Enlarged Touch Panel Display Touch panel characters and key displays can be enlarged Use the numeric keys to select items and proceed to the next screen NOTE Accessibility can be used only with Copying and Sending registered on the Quick Setup screen To set functions other than those displayed in the accessibility screens you must return to the original display Press the Accessibility Display key again Press the Accessibility Display key when in the Copy Accessibility or Send i e the Copy or Send key indicator is On Display F Ready to copy oE Enlarged keys or characters appear on the touch panel il Operation can also be made by pressing any numeric key corresponding to the number displayed e g Press the 2 key to adjust zoom Follow the instructions on the screen for subsequent operations 08 08 2009 10 10 8 76 9 Maintenance This chapter describes cleaning and toner replacement Be ING E E E A E e Toner Container and Waste Toner Box Replacement 9 1 Maintenance Cleaning Clean the machine regularly to ensure optimum output quality CAUTION For safety always unplug the power cord before cleaning the machine Original Cover Glass Platen Wipe the backside of the original cover the inside of the document processor and the g
337. tained You can use the procedure below to change the maximum number of copy jobs that can be retained in the document box Use the procedure below to change the maximum number of copy jobs retained 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Document Box Removable Memory and then Next of Job Box Press Change of Repeat Copy Job Retention 4 Use the or key to enter the maximum Document Box Removable Memory Repeat Copy Job Retention Set the maximum number of repeat copy jobs to retain re te nti on nu mbe r Use or the numeric keys to enter a number Set this number to 0 to not retain any jobs You can also enter the number from the numeric keys 0 50 Sze A number between 0 and 50 can be entered as the Eas number of retained jobs NOTE If you enter a value of 0 zero you cannot use OE the Repeat Copy function 08 08 2009 10 10 5 Press OK 4 37 Copying Functions 4 38 5 Sending Functions This chapter explains the functions available for sending originals e Original Size SCISCNON ica cccicicccevsneccatececaneceatsiiedonsndeacasceptienebeaeecuenctaad 5 2 OSI IS SelechioM reiris i iaie 5 3 E E E A A ENS EEE os eke ENET E ANE E 5 5 SE EE iE E A E E A ic A E E 5 6 e Mixed Sized Originals iiseatissrciacntncesentanccentansseuscaraineigeccerthensigimsemantcas 5 7 e 1 sided 2 sided SEIS CHO igecoin necniuiasti nie laeisiadennaieiniuimonbordeiminaaacenmneie 5 10 SIM
338. tc falls into the machine turn the main power switch off immediately Next remove the power plug from the outlet to avoid the danger of fire or electrical shock Then contact your service representative Do not remove or connect the power plug with wet hands as there is a danger of electrical shock Always contact your service representative for maintenance or repair of internal parts oon A BO xii A CAUTION Do not pull the power cord when removing it from the outlet If the power cord is pulled the wires may become broken and there is a danger of fire or electrical shock Always grasp the power plug when removing the power cord from the outlet Always remove the power plug from the outlet when moving the machine If the power cord is damaged there is a danger of fire or electrical shock Always hold the designated parts only when lifting or moving the machine If this machine will be left unused for an extended period e g overnight turn it off at the main power switch If the machine will not be used for an even longer period of time e g vacation remove the power plug from the outlet as a safety precaution If the optional Fax kit is installed note that turning the machine off at the main power switch disables fax transmission and reception For safety purposes always remove the power plug from the outlet when performing cleaning operations If dust accumulates within the machine there is a danger of fire
339. te agi ee en eee eee EIEEE ee ee eee Ra 4 34 Pile Name erdre x erode ted oa ee tee dee ee A wa ad kak ween ens 4 35 Priority Override 1 1 20 0c cette eee 4 35 Repeat Copy suis aiana waard detain debe babe he Eb Rebeka deed ea dd wee 4 36 Sending Functions Original Size Selection 2 2 0 0 ct eee 5 2 Sending Size Selection 0 00 teens 5 3 ZOOM E LEE EA eae Sees og eae te see Bee neyo ee ek Ae S E ee eta eee EE E 5 5 Centering 24 nee ed e ee beet pe cde thee eect tease e elena eee abews ae ye na 5 6 Mixed Sized OriginalS 0 0 c ccc ete eee 5 7 1 sided 2 sided Selection 0 0 c ccc tet e eee 5 10 Original Orientation 2 2 20 00 teens 5 11 File Formats Taa a amain weet ad eed he A a A a AAA ae AAE A eee eee 5 12 File Separation anua anaua aa 5 13 PDF Encryption FUNCIONS lt siis4 a eia etn eta Ye ed A A A ee ek A A E E A 5 14 image QUAY sec vies i ae aa E a oh a E EE EA E a E E E E a e i 5 16 Adjusting Density s ccci2ec44 a a E a E E a EAEE a A AE A E E S A EA 5 17 Scan Resolution auauna naana 5 18 SharpneSSs 4 dati a pai Geo aa eel oe eae MEA ed eee Sed a i een a D ia 5 19 Background Density Adjustment 2 0 0 c eee teas 5 20 Color Grayscale Black and White Selection 0 00 ccc eee eens 5 21 Continuous Scan 2 0 eee eee 5 22 Border Erase sss ctuc ede ceil aah dads Win eon i a ee ee ae bead Wiha ee ie 5 23 Border Erase to Back Page 0 0 cece
340. tect all paper from humidity by removing it from the cassettes and sealing it in the paper storage bag 7 Select the media type plain recycled etc loaded in the cassette Refer to Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Cassettes on page 2 28 Loading Paper in the Multi Purpose Tray The multi purpose tray will hold up to 200 sheets of plain paper 80 g m The multi purpose tray accepts paper sizes from A3 to A6 and Hagaki and from Ledger to Statement R 8K 16K and 16K R Be sure to use the multi purpose tray when you print on any special paper IMPORTANT When using media types other than plain paper such as recycled or colored paper always specify the media type setting Refer to Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Multi Purpose Tray on page 2 30 If you are using a paper weight of 106 g m or more set the media type to Thick The capacity of the multi purpose tray is as follows e Hagaki 80 sheets e OHP film 25 sheets e Envelope DL Envelope C5 Envelope 10 Commercial 10 Monarch Youkei 4 Youkei 2 20 sheets NOTE When you load custom size paper enter the paper size by referring to Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Multi Purpose Tray on page 2 30 When you use special paper such as transparencies or thick paper select the media type by referring to Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Multi Purpose Tray on page 2 30 2 24 Preparation before Use 1 Ope
341. tect it from humidity Preparation before Use Low Power Mode and Auto Low Power Mode Low Power Mode To activate Low Power Mode press the Energy Saver key Touch panel and all indicators on the operation panel will go out to save power except the Energy Saver Power and main power indicators This status is referred to as Low Power Mode If print data is received during Low Power Mode the machine automatically wakes up and starts printing Also when fax data arrives while the machine is in Low Power Mode when using the optional fax the machine automatically wakes up and starts printing To resume perform one of the following actions The machine will be ready to operate within 10 seconds e Press any key on the operation panel e Open the original cover or the optional document processor e Place originals in the optional document processor Note that ambient environmental conditions such as ventilation may cause the machine to respond more slowly Auto Low Power Mode Auto Low Power Mode automatically switches the machine into Low Power Mode if left idle for a preset time The default preset time is 1 minute Preparation before Use Sleep and Auto Sleep Sleep Gme aN Auto Sleep To enter Sleep press the Power key Touch panel and all indicators on the operation panel will go out to save a maximum amount of power except the Main Power indicator Th
342. th a network cable 100BASE TX or 10BASE T Embdded Web Server Bee Network Send E mail Administrator s i PC Network settings Scanner default settings User and r Sends the image data destination registration E of scanned originals to the desired recipient as a file attached to an E mail message I H a I L Printing Send SMB Saves the scanned image as a data file on your PC Network Network FAX Option Send FTP Sends the scanned image as a data file on the FTP TWAIN Scanning FAX Option Network r WIA Scanning TWAIN and WIA are standardized interface for communication between software applications and image acquisition devices Network 2 3 Preparation before Use Preparing Necessary Cables The following interfaces are available to connect the equipment to a PC Prepare the necessary cables according to the interface you use Available Standard Interfaces Function Interface Necessary Cable Printer Scanner Network FAX Network interface LAN 10Base T or 100Base TX Shielded Printer USB interface USB2 0 compatible cable Hi Speed USB compliant Max 5 0 m Shielded Function available when using optional fax kit For details on Network FAX refer to the Fax Kit Operation Guide Preparation before Use Connecting Cables Connecting LAN Cable Optional
343. th facing pages such as books The following modes are available One sided to Two sided Produces two sided copies from one sided originals In case of an odd number of originals the back side of the last copy will be blank Original The following binding options are available A Original Left Right to Binding Left Right Images on the second sides are not rotated B Original Left Right to Binding Top Images on the Original second sides are rotated 180 Copies can be bound on the top edge facing the same orientation when turning the pages Two sided to One sided Copies each side of a two sided original onto two individual sheets The optional document processor is required The following binding options are available Binding Left Right Images on the second sides are not rotated Binding Top Images on the second sides are rotated 180 Two sided to Two sided Produces two sided copies from two sided originals The optional document processor is required NOTE The paper sizes supported in Two sided to Two sided are Ledger Legal Letter Letter R Original Executive Statement R Oficio Il 8 5x13 5 A3 B4 A4 A4 R B5 B5 R A5 R and Folio 3 11 Basic Operation Book to One sided Produces a 1 sided copy of a 2 sided or open book original _ 2 The following bin
344. the shortcut button number and name and press OK and then Register Choose Yes in the confirmation screen to change the shortcut To delete the shortcut press Delete this Shortcut Choose Yes in the confirmation screen to delete the shortcut 3 46 Basic Operation Using the Internet Browser This section explains how to use the Internet browser NOTE To use the internet browser internet browser must be set to On in Internet Browser Setting on page 8 58 Launching and Exiting the Browser Use the procedure below to launch and exit the Internet browser 1 Press the Application key The application list screen appears j Application 2 Press Internet Browser The Internet browser starts up 08 08 2009 10 10 3 Use the browser screen to browse web pages For information on how to use the browser screen refer to Using the Browser Screen on page 3 48 4 To exit the browser press X Close and then press Yes in the exit confirmation screen The application list screen reappears NOTE You can specify preferences such as the way the Internet browser screen is displayed For details refer to Internet Browser Setup page 8 58 3 47 Basic Operation Using the Browser Screen The operations available in the Internet browser screen are shown below Search box Pressing the text box displays a keyboard You can then perform a search by entering a keyword and pressing the
345. the Machine 11 18 Job Box Form Overlay Box 6 17 Private Print Stored Job Box 6 12 Quick Copy Proof and Hold Print Box 6 13 Repeat Copy Box 6 15 Job Finish Notice 5 29 Copy 4 34 Key Counter Appendix 8 KPDL Appendix 29 L Label Appendix 19 LAN Cable Connecting 2 5 LAN Interface Setup 8 71 LDAP Protocol Detail 8 66 Left Cover 1 1 4 Left Cover 1 Lever 1 4 Left Cover 2 1 4 Left cover 2 Handle 1 4 Legal Information xx Login 3 2 11 3 Logout 3 2 11 3 Low Power Timer 8 48 LPD Protocol Detail 8 66 M Main Charger 9 9 Main Power Switch 1 6 Management 11 1 Job Accounting 11 14 User Login Administration 11 2 Margin Centering Mode 4 15 Memo Mode 4 25 Mirror Image 4 33 Mixed Sized Originals 4 7 Combinations 4 7 Copy Size 4 9 Send 5 7 Monotype Imaging License Agreement xxiv MP Tray Cleaning 8 46 Multi Purpose MP Tray Appendix 29 Paper Size and Media 2 30 8 6 Multi Purpose Tray 1 6 Index 4 Index Multi Sending Sending to Different Types of Destinations 3 30 N Original Cover 1 4 Cleaning 9 2 Original Orientation Copy 4 10 Document Processor 4 10 Negative Image 4 32 NetBEUI Appendix 29 Protocol Detail 8 66 NetWare Appendix 29 Setup 8 67 Network Preparation 2 14 Setup 8 64 Network Cable 2 4 Connecting 2 5 Network Interface 2 4 O Orientation Confirmation 8 14 Send 5 11 Original Placement Indicator Indications and Status 2 35 Original Size Indicator Plates 1 4 2 32 Or
346. the confirmation screen appears press Yes Installation of the application begins Depending on the application being installed the installation may take some time Once the installation ends the original screen reappears 7 To install another application repeat steps 5 to 6 To remove the USB memory press Remove Memory and wait until the Removable Memory can be safely removed message appears Then remove the USB memory 8 60 Default Setting System Menu Activating Deactivating Application To use an application set the application to Activate Use the procedure below to start using an application 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press w and then Application NOTE If user login administration is disabled the user authentication screen appears Enter your login user name and password and then press Login For this you need to login with administrator privileges Refer to Adding a User on page 11 5 for the default login user name and password 3 Select the desired application and press Activate You can view detailed information on the selected application by pressing Detail NOTE To exit an application press Deactivate 4 Enter the license key and press Official Some applications do not require you to enter a license key If the license key entry screen does not appear GE go to Step 5 To use the application as a trial press Trial without entering the license key 5 When
347. then Next of Optional Function NOTE If user login administration is disabled the user authentication screen appears Enter your login user name and password and then press Login For this you need to login with administrator privileges Refer to Adding a User on page 11 5 for the default login user name and password 3 Select the desired application and press Activate You can view detailed information on the selected application by pressing Detail 4 Inthe license key entry screen press Official Some applications do not require you to enter a license key If the license key entry screen does not appear go to Step 5 To use the application as a trial press Trial without entering the license key 5 When the confirmation screen appears press Yes IMPORTANT If you change the date time while using an application you will no longer be able to use the application 8 75 Default Setting System Menu Checking Application Details Use the procedure below to check the details of an application 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press System and then Next of Optional Function NOTE If user login administration is disabled the user authentication screen appears Enter your login user name and password and then press Login For this you need to login with administrator privileges Refer to Adding a User on page 11 5 for the default login user name and password 3 Select the application you wan
348. ting you can specify that a job is not printed until you release the job at the operation panel When sending the job from the application software specify a 4 digit access code in the printer driver The job is released for printing by entering the access code on the operation panel ensuring confidentiality of the print job The data will be deleted upon completion of print job or after the main power switch is turned off In Hold Job access codes are not mandatory but can be set on the printer driver if printing with PIN security is required In this event you need to enter the access code to print the stored jobs Print data will be stored in the hard disk after printing This will allow printing of the same print data repeatedly Quick Copy Proof and Hold Box page 6 13 Quick Copy feature facilitates additional prints of a document already printed Activating Quick Copy and printing a document using the printer driver allow the print data to be stored in the Quick Copy Job Box 3 31 Basic Operation When additional copies are required you can reprint the required number of copies from the operation panel By default up to 32 documents can be stored When power is turned off all stored jobs will be deleted NOTE When you attempt to store documents in excess of the above maximum the oldest document data will be overwritten by the latest document data The Proof and Hold feature produces only a single proof print o
349. tion 3 Select the desired alternative emulation and then press OK 4 Press OK Setting of KPDL error report When an error has occurred during printing in KPDL emulation mode set whether or not the error report is output The default setting is Off not output Use the procedure below to specify the KPDL error report setting 1 Press the System Menu Key 2 Press Printer gt Change of Emulation gt KPDL or KPDL Auto gt KPDL Error Report 3 Press On or Off and then press OK 4 Press OK EcoPrint EcoPrint conserves toner when printing This is recommended for test copies where faded printing is not a problem Use the procedure below to specify the EcoPrint setting 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Printer and Change of EcoPrint 3 Press Off or On 4 Press OK Override A4 Letter Select whether to treat A4 size and Letter which are similar in size as the same size when printing The table below shows the available settings Item Description A4 and Letter are regarded as the same in size The machine will use whichever size is in the paper source A4 and Letter are not regarded as the same in size Use the procedure below to specify the override A4 Letter setting 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Printer and Change of Override A4 Letter 3 Press Off or On 4 Press OK 8 34 Default Setting System Menu Duplex Select binding orienta
350. tion for duplex mode The table below shows the available settings Description 1 sided No duplex mode Finish 2 sided Bind Shorter edge bound ShortEdge 2 sided Bind Longer edge bound LongEdge Use the procedure below to select a duplex setting 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Printer and Change of Duplex 3 Press 1 sided 2 sided Bind LongEdge or 2 sided Bind ShortEdge 4 Press OK Copies Set the default number of copies from 1 to 999 Use the procedure below to specify the default number of copies 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Printer and Change of Copies 3 Press or the numeric keys to set the default number of copies 4 Press OK Orientation Set the default orientation Portrait or Landscape Landscape Printer Use the procedure below to set the default orientation for printing 8 35 Default Setting System Menu Press the System Menu key Press Printer and Change of Orientation Press Portrait or Landscape A O N a Press OK Form Feed Timeout Receiving print data from the computer the machine may sometimes wait if there is no information signaling that the last page does not have any more data to be printed When the preset timeout passes the machine automatically prints paper The options are between 5 and 495 seconds Use the procedure below to set the form feed timeout 1
351. tions e Avoid locations with direct exposure to hot or cold air e Avoid poorly ventilated locations If the floor is delicate against casters when this machine is moved after installation the floor material may be damaged During copying some ozone is released but the amount does not cause any ill effect to one s health If however the machine is used over a long period of time in a poorly ventilated room or when making an extremely large number of copies the smell may become unpleasant To maintain the appropriate environment for copy work it is suggested that the room be properly ventilated Power supply Grounding the machine A WARNING Do not use a power supply with a voltage other than that specified Avoid multiple connections in the same outlet These types of situations present a danger of fire or electrical shock Plug the power cord securely into the mains power outlet and the power socket on the machine A buildup of dust around the prongs on the plug or contact between the prongs and metallic objects may cause a fire or electric shock Incomplete electrical contact could cause overheating and ignition Always connect the machine to an outlet with a ground connection to avoid the danger of fire or electrical shock in case of an electric short If an earth connection is not possible contact your service representative Other precautions Connect the power plug to the closest outlet possible to the machine
352. tly prohibited it must be collected separately The dumping of these devices at unequipped and unauthorized places may have hazardous effects on health and the environment Offenders will be subjected to the penalties and measures laid down by the law TO DISPOSE OF OUR DEVICES CORRECTLY a Contact the Local Authorities who will give you the practical information you need and the instructions for handling the waste correctly for example location and times of the waste collection centres etc b When you purchase a new device of ours give a used device similar to the one purchased to our dealer for disposal The crossed dustbin symbol on the device means that when it to be disposed of the device is to be taken to the equipped waste collection centres and is to be handled separately from urban waste The producer guarantees the activation of the treatment collection recycling and disposal procedures in accordance with Directive 2002 96 CE and subsequent amendments 2 FOR OTHER COUNTRIES NOT IN THE EU The treatment collection recycling and disposal of electric and electronic devices will be carried out in accordance with the laws in force in the country in question
353. to the Printer Driver User Guide on how to print a job as Quick Copy or Proof and Hold Print job using the printer driver Setting the Number of Stored Jobs To maintain free space on the hard disk you can set the maximum number of stored jobs Use the procedure below to set the number of stored jobs 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Document Box Removable Memory Next of Job Box then Change of Quick Copy Job Retention Document Box Document Box Removable Memory Quick Copy Job Retention 3 Press or to enter the maximum number of Set the maximum number of quick copy proof print jobs to retain stored jobs You can enter any number between 0 Use or the numeric keys to enter a number Set this number to 0 to not retain any jobs and 50 You can also enter the number using the numeric oe keys 32 job s Bra NOTE If you enter a value of 0 zero you cannot use the Repeat Copy function Cancel ED Oe 4 Press OK The maximum number of stored jobs is set Printing a Document You can print documents stored in the Quick Copy Proof and Hold box Use the procedure below to print a document 1 Press the Document Box key 2 Press Job Box 3 Select Quick Copy Proof and Hold and press Open HES 4 Select the creator of the document and press Open Quick Copy Proof and Hold 08 08 2009 10 10 5 Select the document to print and press Print
354. tore 8 16 Color type 5 31 Combine Mode 2 in 1 Mode 4 13 4 in 1 Mode 4 13 Page Boundary Lines 4 14 Connecting Index 1 Index LAN Cable 2 5 Power Cable 2 6 USB Cable 2 6 Connection Method 2 3 Continuous Scan Copy 4 31 Send 5 22 Conventions in This Guide xxvii Copy Appendix 9 Adjusting Density 3 7 Collate Copying 3 13 Duplex Copying 3 11 Offset Copying 3 13 Originals 4 2 Selecting Image Quality 3 8 Setup 8 25 Zoom Copying 3 9 Copy Settings 8 25 Auto Priority 8 26 Auto Paper Selection 8 25 Border Erase for Back Page 8 25 Paper Selection 8 25 Preset Limit 8 27 Quick Setup Registration 8 27 Reserve Next Priority 8 26 Copying Functions 4 1 Counting the Number of Pages Printed by Paper Size 11 25 Counter 11 27 Each Job 11 24 Printing a Report 11 26 Total Job 11 23 Unknown Account ID Jobs 11 27 Counting the Number of Pages Printed 11 23 Cover Mode 4 21 Custom Box Creating a New Box 6 2 Deleting Documents 6 11 Editing Documents 6 8 Form Overlay 6 7 Join Documents 6 9 Move Documents 6 8 Printing Documents 6 5 Sending Documents 6 6 Storing Documents 6 4 User Privileges 3 38 D Date Timer 8 46 Auto Error Clear 8 49 Auto Panel Reset 8 47 Auto Sleep 8 48 Date Format 8 46 Date Time 8 46 Low Power Timer 8 48 Setup 8 46 Time Zone 8 47 Default 8 14 Auto Image Rotation 8 21 Border Erase 8 19 Border Erase to Back Page 8 20 Collate Offset 8 21 Color Selection Send Store 8 16 Color TIFF Compression Setti
355. ttings Le ee Auto Search the paper source that matches the selected paper size and type Fixed Print on paper loaded in the specified paper source Use the procedure below to select the paper feed mode 1 Press the System Menu key Press Printer v and Change of Paper Feed Mode Press Auto or Fixed A N Press OK 8 37 Default Setting System Menu Printing Reports Sending Notice Print reports to check the machine settings and status Default settings for printing the result reports can also be configured NOTE If user login administration is enabled you can only print by logging in with administrator privileges Printing Reports Printable reports are as follows Status Page Check the information including current settings available memory space and optional equipment installed Status Page MFP Firmware Version Check the font samples installed in the machine Font List Fe Scalable Bitmap Passwort d Selection FSET ENEEEHI REGRET LET EERE RGRRRGEE LELLI LETT anal onan HEREEEE HEEEEEE BEHI LLLI LLLLLLLLI LLLLLLLI BEHI LOLLI LELLI ERREEN LLLI LLLI LTT TY SHGRRRE anal onan LLLLLL LLLLLLLI LLLI ann GRGRRREET ORGRRRE BEHI LOLLI LELLLLLLII LLLLLCLLI EHHI onan 8 38 Default Setting System Menu Network Status Page Check the information including network interface firmware vers
356. tup Select the HTTP security level This setup is available when SSL is On The default setting is HTTPS Only 8 69 Default Setting System Menu NOTE HTTP must be set to On in Protocol Detail on page 8 66 Use the procedure below 1 Press the System Menu key Press System Next of Network Next of Secure Protocol and then Change of HTTPS Security Press HTTP or HTTPS or HTTPS Only Press OK a fF W N After changing the setting restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON again For detailed information on restarting the system refer to Restarting the System on page 8 63 LDAP Security Setup Select the type of encryption according to the type of security employed by the LDAP server This setup is available when SSL is On The default setting is Off NOTE LDAP must be set to On in Protocol Detail on page 8 66 The table below shows the available settings Item Description Off Do not use security employed by the LDAP server LDAP over SSL Use implicit mode for data communication The server provides services using the LDAP over SSL port 636 Encryption is applied to any data communication using this port LDAPv3 TLS Use explicit mode for data communication Select this if the server supports the start TLS command This uses the same port 389 as LDAP Use the procedure below 1 Press the System Menu key Press System Next of Network Next of Secure
357. twork In order to do this it is necessary to register the sender and destination recipient address on the network A network environment which enables the machine to connect to a mail server is required It is recommended that a Local Area Network LAN be used to assist with transmission speed and security issues At the same time as you send a scanned image you can also print the image or send it to the Document Box To use the Scanning Function perform the following steps e Program the settings including the E mail setting on the machine e Use Embedded Web Server the internal HTML web page to register the IP address the host name of the SMTP server and the recipient e Register the destination in the Address Book or One Touch keys e When the PC Folder SMB FTP is selected it is necessary to share the destination folder For setting up the PC Folder contact your administrator e Creating Registering a Document Box when a Document Box is selected as the destination e Detailed transmission settings to select a Document Box as the destination or to print and send the image at the same time Follow the steps below for basic sending The following four options are available Send as E mail Sends a scanned original image as an E mail attachment page 3 22 Send to Folder SMB Stores a scanned original image in a shared folder of any PC page 3 23 Send to Folder FTP Stores a scanned original image in a folder o
358. u can use the Count by Duplex Combine to check the number of pages used in Duplex 1 sided mode Duplex 2 sided mode and the total for both as well as the pages used in Combine None mode Combine 2in1 mode Combine 4in1 mode and the total for all three Scanned Pages Displays the number of pages scanned for copying faxing and other functions as well as the total number of pages scanned FAX Transmission Pages Displays the number of pages faxed FAX Transmission Time Displays the total duration of fax transmissions Only displayed when the optional fax kit is installed Total Job Accounting Resetting the Counter This counts the number of pages for all accounts and resets the counts for those accounts together at the same time Use the procedure below to check and reset the counter 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press User Login Job Accounting 3 If user login administration is disabled the user authentication screen appears Enter your login user name and password and then press Login For this you need to login with administrator privileges Refer to Adding a User on page 11 5 for the default login user name and password 11 23 Management 4 Press Next of Job Accounting Setting and then Next of Total Job Accounting Sa hi nn a 5 Press Check at the function to check the count tee E eo T The results will be displayed FAX Transmission Pages FAX Transmission Time
359. ue for the storage capacity of the Custom Box in megabytes by pressing or number keys You can enter a limit between 1 and 30 000 Changes according to the number of created custom boxes Auto File Deletion Automatically deletes stored documents after a set period of time Press On to enable automatic deletion and then use and or the numeric keys to enter the number of days for which documents are stored You can enter any number between 1 and 31 day s To disable automatic file deletion press Off Overwrite Setting Specifies whether or not old stored documents are overwritten when new documents are stored To overwrite old documents press Permit To retain old documents press Prohibit Delete after Printed Automatically delete document from the box once printing is complete To delete the document press On To retain the document press Off NOTE If user login administration is enabled Owner and Permission are also displayed Refer to Creating new Custom Boxes when user login administration is enabled on page 3 39 5 Check the details you have entered and then press Register The Custom Box is created Seiting the document deletion time Sets the time when documents stored in a custom box are deleted The procedure for using Auto File Deletion Time is explained below 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Document Box Removable Memory Next of Custom Box Next
360. ument Finisher Built in Finisher Automatically scans originals Also you can perform duplex copying and split copying For document processor operation refer to Loading Originals in the Document Processor on page 2 34 Two additional cassettes identical to the printer s double cassettes can be installed in the printer Paper capacity and loading method are the same as Cassettes 1 and 2 NOTE Left cover 4 is located on the left side of the paper feeder for use in clearing paper jams The document finisher holds a large quantity of finished copies The finisher offers a convenient means of sorting Sorted finished copies may also be stapled For further details refer to the document finisher Operation Guide The built in finisher holds a large quantity of finished prints The finisher offers a convenient means of sorting Sorted finished prints may also be stapled 1 Ejected paper guide extension Ejected paper guide 1 Ejected paper guide 2 2 3 4 Finisher Tray 5 Process Table 6 Finisher tray extension The finisher tray serves as an output tray of sorted prints Appendix 4 Appendix The paper sizes are marked on the finisher tray PTT rol s OO extension Open ejected paper guides 1 and 2 as necessary to match the paper size When stapling Legal Statement A3 or B4 paper open the finisher tray extension to ensure that
361. vailable settings a re No Auto Image Rotation performed Auto Image Rotation performed NOTE Refer to page 4 32 for Auto Image Rotation Use the procedure below to set the default Auto Image Rotation settings 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Common Settings v Next of Function Defaults v and then Change of Auto Image Rotation 3 Select the default for Off or On 4 Press OK EcoPrint Select the EcoPrint default The table below shows the available settings a a rr ee No EcoPrint performed EcoPrint performed NOTE Refer to page 4 13 for EcoPrint Use the procedure below to set the default EcoPrint setting 1 2 3 4 Press the System Menu key Press Common Settings v Next of Function Defaults v twice and then Change of EcoPrint Select Off or On for the default Press OK 8 21 Default Setting System Menu PDF TIFF JPEG Image Select the default PDF TIFF JPEG file quality Five options are available from 1 Low Quality High Comp to 5 High Quality Low Comp NOTE Higher quality will make the stored files larger Refer to page 5 72 for file formats Use the procedure below to select the default file quality setting 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Common Settings v and Next of Function Defaults Press v twice and then Change of PDF TIFF JPEG Image 3 Select the default image quality from
362. web page displays basic information about the machine and Embedded Web Server as well as their current status Address 2 http 192 168 48 21 Start Basic Printer Scanner Select a category from the navigation bar on the left of the screen The values for each category must be set separately If restrictions have been set for Embedded Web Server enter the correct user name and password to access pages other than the startup page For details refer to the Embedded Web Server Operation Guide 2 18 Preparation before Use Sending E mail Specifying the SMTP settings allows you to send images loaded onto this machine as E mail attachments To use this function this machine must be connected to a mail server using the SMTP protocol Before sending images loaded onto this machine as E mail attachments check the following The network environment used to connect this machine to the mail server A full time connection via a LAN is recommended e SMTP Settings Use Embedded Web Server to register the IP address or host name of the SMTP server If limits have been set on the size of E mail messages it may not be possible to send very large E mails The procedure for specifying the SMTP settings is explained below 1 Click Advanced gt SMTP gt General Basic Printer Scanner FAX f I FAX Jobs Document Box v Advanced S MTP Protocols SEF z L General E mail Recipient 1 E mail Recipient
363. word Password for folder access 64 chars If you specify a port number other than the default 139 use the Host name port number format e g SMBhostname 140 To enter the IPv6 address enclose the address in brackets e g 3ae3 9a0 cd05 b1d2 28a 1fc0 a1 10ae 140 NOTE Refer to the Character Entry Method on page Appendix 10 for details on entering characters Press Connection Test to check the connection to the computer you chose If the connection fails check the entries you made 9 Check if the destination entry is correct and press Register The destination is added to the Address Book Adding a Group Compile two or more contacts into a group Designations in the group can be added at the same time When adding a group a maximum of 500 groups can be added in the Address Book NOTE Before adding a group in the Address Book the contacts to be included in the group must be added first Up to 100 destinations for the e mail 500 destinations for the FAX and the total of 10 destinations for the FTP and SMB can be registered per a group Use the procedure below to register a group 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Edit Destination Register Edit of Address Book Add Group and then Next 3 To specify the address number press Change in Address Number 8 53 Default Setting System Menu 4 Use or the numeric keys to enter an address number 1 to 2500 To have the nu
364. y selecting Name or No from the Sort cnet Ja j pull down menu 08 08 2009 10 10 NOTE To cancel the selection press the check box and remove the checkmark For details on the external address book refer to Embedded Web Server Operation Guide 3 Press OK to register the selected destination in the destination list NOTE To delete a destination in the list select the destination and press Delete 3 28 Basic Operation Destination Search Destinations registered in the Address Book can be searched Advanced search by type or by initial letter is also available Address Book Addr Book Address Book y Sort Name y Dest No Type Name Detail 0001 ABCD abcd efg com vV 0002 TUVW tuvw xyz com gt d Register Edit Address Book Detail Groupi g 0004 Group2 CJ 0005 Group3 Bee er l we er aaor Cancel J a OK 08 08 2009 10 10 Search type Subjects searched Search by name Search by registered name Search by address Search by registered address number number Advanced search Advanced search by initial letter of registered name by initial letter Advanced search Advanced search by type of registered destination by destination E mail Folder SMB FTP FAX i FAX or Group FAX Only when the optional fax kit is installed i FAX Only when the optional internet fax kit is inst
365. you For portrait form envelopes close the flap Insert the envelope all the way along the width guides keeping the printing side face up and the edge with the flap facing the insertion slot 2 26 Preparation before Use When you load envelopes or cardstock in the multi purpose tray Load envelope with the print side facing up Landscape form envelopes S Portrait form envelopes Cardstock Hagaki Return postcard Oufuku Hagaki NOTE Use unfolded return postcard Oufuku Hagaki IMPORTANT How to load envelopes orientation and facing will differ depending on the type of envelope Be sure to load it in correctly otherwise printing may be done in the wrong direction or on the wrong face NOTE When you load envelopes in the multi purpose tray select the envelope type by referring to Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Multi Purpose Tray on page 2 30 2 27 Preparation before Use Specifying Paper Size and Media The default paper size setting for cassettes 1 and 2 for multi purpose tray and for the optional paper feeder cassettes 3 and 4 is Auto and the default media type setting is Plain To fix the type of paper to be used in cassettes specify the paper size and media type setting Refer to Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Cassettes on page 2 28 To fix the type of paper to be used in multi purpose tray specify the paper size setting Refer
366. zooming it depending on the sending size The table below lists the available options No Zoom to be scanned at actual size Zoomed automatically according to the specified sending size NOTE When zooming in or out see Sending Size Selection on page 5 3 when selecting the sending size Depending on the combination of original size and sending size the image is placed at the edge of the paper To center the image vertically and horizontally on the page use the centering setting described in Centering on page 5 6 Use the procedure below to enlarge or reduce the original to match the transmission size 1 Press the Send key Place the originals on the platen Select the transmission size Press Advanced Setup and then Zoom a Ready to send Destination Press 100 or Auto Place original O oa A W N Press OK Enlarge or reduce original when scanning 100 Scan at actual size Auto Enlarge or reduce to match sending size storing size 08 08 2009 10 10 7 Specify the destination and press the Start key to start sending Sending Functions Centering When you have scanned the original after specifying the original size and sending size depending on these sizes a margin is created at the bottom left or right side of paper By using the centering the image is placed with a margin equally created at each of the page Top Bottom and Left Right Use the procedure below t

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

  HP LaserJet Professional M1130/M1210 MFP Series User Guide  service manual, throttle assembly replacement  ITB RO14.99.3506 video splitter  PT-125-OFR-A-oipm-SY-2011.qxd_Page 1  Sylvain RouSSeau    

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file